EN / ACS580 drives standard control program firmware manual

EN / ACS580 drives standard control program firmware manual
ABB general purpose drives
Firmware manual
ACS580 standard control program
List of related manuals
Drive manuals and guides
ACS580 firmware manual
ACS580-01 hardware manual
ACS580-01 quick installation and start-up guide for
frames R0 to R3
ACS580-01 quick installation and start-up guide for
frame R5
ACS580-01 quick installation and start-up guide for
frames R6 to R9
ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual
Code (English)
3AXD50000016097
3AXD50000018826
3AUA0000076332
3AXD50000007518
3AXD50000009286
3AUA0000085685
Option manuals and guides
CDPI-01 communication adapter module user's manual 3AXD50000009929
DPMP-01 mounting platform for ACS-AP control panel 3AUA0000100140
DPMP-02/03 mounting platform for ACS-AP control panel 3AUA0000136205
FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module user's manual
3AFE68615500
FCNA-01 ControlNet adapter module user's manual
3AUA0000141650
FDNA-01 DeviceNet™ adapter module user's manual 3AFE68573360
FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module user's manual
3AUA0000068940
FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module user's
3AUA0000093568
manual
FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module user's 3AUA0000123527
manual
FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module user's manual 3AFE68573271
FSCA-01 RS-485 adapter module user's manual
3AUA0000109533
Tool and maintenance manuals and guides
Drive composer PC tool user's manual
Converter module capacitor reforming instructions
NETA-21 remote monitoring tool user's manual
NETA-21 remote monitoring tool installation and start-up
guide
3AUA0000094606
3BFE64059629
3AUA00000969391
3AUA0000096881
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section Document
library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the Document library,
contact your local ABB representative.
The QR code below opens an online listing of the manuals applicable to this product.
ACS580-01 manuals
Table of contents
1. Introduction to the manual
2. Start-up, control with I/O and
ID run
3. Control panel
4. Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
5. Control macros
6. Program features
7. Parameters
8. Additional parameter data
9. Fault tracing
10. Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
interface (EFB)
11. Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
12. Control chain diagrams
Further information
3AXD50000016097 Rev C
EN
EFFECTIVE: 2015-01-20
 2015 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Table of contents 1
Table of contents
List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. Introduction to the manual
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety
Categorization by frame (size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
2. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start up the drive using the First start assistant on the assistant control panel . . .
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to perform the ID run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
14
14
25
27
28
3. Control panel
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and reinstalling the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout of the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout of the control panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
33
34
35
37
38
4. Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start, stop, reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock, region, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset to defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
40
42
42
44
45
46
47
49
51
53
54
55
56
2 Table of contents
5. Control macros
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABB standard (vector) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the ABB standard (vector) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the 3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand/PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the Hand/PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the Panel PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFC macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections for the PFC macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter default values for different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
59
60
60
62
62
64
64
66
66
68
68
70
70
72
72
74
74
76
76
78
78
80
6. Program features
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating modes of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive configuration and programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring via parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable frequency input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable I/O extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
86
86
87
89
91
91
91
91
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
95
95
95
95
Table of contents 3
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Constant speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Critical speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rush control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Scalar motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DC magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Energy optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Speed compensated stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Application control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Control macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Pump and fan control (PFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Voltage control and trip limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Safety and protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fixed/Standard protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Automatic fault resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Energy saving calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Backup and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Data storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7. Parameters
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03 Input references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
136
137
139
139
141
4 Table of contents
04 Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
05 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
06 Control and status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
07 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Standard DI, RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 Standard AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 Standard AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 I/O extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 Start/stop/direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22 Speed reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23 Speed reference ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 Speed reference conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 Torque reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28 Frequency reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 Process PID set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41 Process PID set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45 Energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46 Monitoring/scaling settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49 Panel port communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51 FBA A settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52 FBA A data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53 FBA A data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58 Embedded fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71 External PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76 PFC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77 PFC maintenance and monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95 HW configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98 User motor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99 Motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings . . .
142
143
144
150
150
154
156
160
166
173
174
184
192
200
204
204
209
213
223
228
234
240
247
255
258
261
272
273
275
276
279
282
283
284
288
290
290
291
297
299
305
305
307
312
315
316
322
8. Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table of contents 5
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter groups 1…9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter groups 10…99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
326
327
330
9. Fault tracing
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pure events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editable messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning/fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing warning/fault information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QR code generation for mobile service application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
357
357
357
358
358
358
358
358
359
360
368
10. Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the fieldbus to the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data input/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the control profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Word for the ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Word for the DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Word for the ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Word for the DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State transition diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual values for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus holding register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile . . . . . .
Modbus function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coils (0xxxx reference set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
377
378
379
380
382
383
383
383
383
383
385
386
386
387
390
390
391
393
393
395
395
396
396
397
397
398
399
400
6 Table of contents
Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Error code registers (holding registers 400090…400100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
11. Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basics of the fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of the fieldbus Control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of the fieldbus Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the drive for fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter setting example: FPBA (PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
405
405
407
408
409
410
411
413
414
415
416
12. Control chain diagrams
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency reference modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed reference source selection I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed reference source selection II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed reference ramping and shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed error calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque reference source selection and modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference selection for torque controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
Further information
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
435
435
435
Introduction to the manual 7
1
Introduction to the manual
Contents of this chapter
The chapter describes applicability, target audience and purpose of this manual. It
also describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for
more information.
Applicability
The manual applies to the ACS580 standard control program (version 1.40).
To check the firmware version of the control program in use, see system information
(select Menu - System info) or parameter 07.05 Firmware version (see page 150) on
the control panel.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions.
•
Read the complete safety instructions in the Hardware manual of the drive
before you install, commission, or use the drive.
•
Read the firmware function-specific warnings and notes before changing
parameter values. These warnings and notes are included in the parameter
descriptions presented in chapter Parameters.
Target audience
The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical
components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given.
8 Introduction to the manual
Purpose of the manual
This manual provides information needed for designing, commissioning, or operating
the drive system.
Contents of this manual
The manual consists of the following chapters:
•
Introduction to the manual (this chapter, page 7) describes applicability, target
audience, purpose and contents of this manual. At the end, it lists terms and
abbreviations.
•
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run (page 13) describes how to start up the drive
as well as how to start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust
the motor speed through the I/O interface.
•
Control panel (page 33) contains instructions for removing and reinstalling the
assistant control panel and briefly describes its display, keys and key shortcuts.
•
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel (page 39) describes the
simplified settings and diagnostic functions provided on the assistant control
panel.
•
Control macros (page 59) contains a short description of each macro together
with a connection diagram. Macros are pre-defined applications which will save
the user time when configuring the drive.
•
Program features (page 85) describes program features with lists of related user
settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
•
Parameters (page 135) describes the parameters used to program the drive.
•
Additional parameter data (page 325) contains further information on the
parameters.
•
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) (page 377)
describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using the embedded
fieldbus interface of the drive.
•
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page 405) describes the
communication to and from a fieldbus network using an optional fieldbus adapter
module
•
Fault tracing (page 357) lists the warning and fault messages with possible
causes and remedies.
•
Control chain diagrams (page 419) describes the parameter structure within the
drive.
•
Further information (inside of the back cover, page 435) describes how to make
product and service inquiries, get information on product training, provide
feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet.
Introduction to the manual 9
Related documents
See List of related manuals on page 2 (inside of the front cover).
Categorization by frame (size)
The ACS580 is manufactured in several frames (frame sizes), which are denoted as
RN, where N is an integer. Some information which only concern certain frames are
marked with the symbol of the frame (RN).
The frame is marked on the type designation label attached to the drive, see chapter
Operation principle and hardware description, section Type designation label in the
Hardware manual of the drive.
10 Introduction to the manual
Terms and abbreviations
Term/abbreviation
Explanation
ACS-AP-x
Assistant control panel, advanced operator keypad for communication
with the drive. The ACS580 supports types ACS-AP-I and ACS-AP-S.
AI
Analog input; interface for analog input signals
AO
Analog output; interface for analog output signals
Brake chopper
Conducts the surplus energy from the intermediate circuit of the drive to
the brake resistor when necessary. The chopper operates when the DC
link voltage exceeds a certain maximum limit. The voltage rise is
typically caused by deceleration (braking) of a high inertia motor.
Brake resistor
Dissipates the drive surplus braking energy conducted by the brake
chopper to heat. Essential part of the brake circuit. See chapter Brake
chopper in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Control board
Circuit board in which the control program runs.
CDPI-01
Communication adapter module
CCA-01
Configuration adapter
CEIA-01
Embedded EIA-485 fieldbus adapter module
CHDI-01
Optional 115/230 V digital input extension module
CMOD-01
Optional multifunction extension module (external 24 V AC/DC and
digital I/O extension)
CMOD-02
Optional multifunction extension module (external 24 V AC/DC and
isolated PTC interface)
DC link
DC circuit between rectifier and inverter
DC link capacitors
Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage
DI
Digital input; interface for digital input signals
DO
Digital output; interface for digital output signals
DPMP-01
Mounting platform for ACS-AP control panel (flange mounting)
DPMP-02/03
Mounting platform for ACS-AP control panel (surface mounting)
Drive
Frequency converter for controlling AC motors
EFB
Embedded fieldbus
FBA
Fieldbus adapter
FCAN-01
Optional CANopen adapter module
FCNA-01
ControlNet adapter module
FDNA-01
Optional DeviceNet adapter module
FECA-01
Optional EtherCAT adapter module
FENA-01/-11/-21
Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP and
PROFINET IO protocols
FEPL-02
Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module
FPBA-01
Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module
Introduction to the manual 11
Term/abbreviation
Explanation
Frame (size)
Refers to drive physical size, for example R0 and R1. The type
designation label attached to the drive shows the frame of the drive, see
chapter Operation principle and hardware description, section Type
designation label in the Hardware manual of the drive.
FSCA-01
Optional RSA-485 adapter module
ID run
Motor identification run. During the identification run, the drive will
identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control.
IGBT
Insulated gate bipolar transistor
Intermediate circuit
See DC link.
Inverter
Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and voltage.
I/O
Input/Output
LSW
Least significant word
Macro
Pre-defined default values of parameters in drive control program. Each
macro is intended for a specific application. See chapter Control macros
on page 59.
NETA-21
Remote monitoring tool
Network control
With fieldbus protocols based on the Common Industrial Protocol
(CIPTM), such as DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP, denotes the control of the
drive using the Net Ctrl and Net Ref objects of the ODVA AC/DC Drive
Profile. For more information, see www.odva.org, and the following
manuals:
• FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module user’s manual (3AFE68573360
[English]), and
• FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module user’s manual
(3AUA0000093568 [English]).
Parameter
User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal measured or
calculated by the drive
PID controller
Proportional–integral–derivative controller. Drive speed control is based
on PID algorithm.
PLC
Programmable logic controller
PROFIBUS,
PROFIBUS DP,
PROFINET IO
Registered trademarks of PI - PROFIBUS & PROFINET International
R0, R1, ...
Frame (size)
RO
Relay output; interface for a digital output signal. Implemented with a
relay.
Rectifier
Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and voltage.
STO
Safe torque off. See chapter The Safe torque off function in the
Hardware manual of the drive.
12 Introduction to the manual
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 13
2
Start-up, control with I/O and
ID run
Contents of this chapter
The chapter describes how to:
•
perform the start-up
•
start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the
motor through the I/O interface
•
perform an Identification run (ID run) for the drive.
14 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
How to start up the drive
 How to start up the drive using the First start assistant on the
assistant control panel
Safety
Do not start-up the drive unless you are a qualified electrician.
Read and obey the instructions in chapter Safety instructions at the beginning of the
Hardware manual of the drive. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment
Check the installation. See chapter Installation checklist in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Make sure there is no active start on (DI1 in factory settings, that is, ABB standard
macro). The drive will start up automatically at power-up if the external run
command is on and the drive is in the remote control mode.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if
• there is a risk of damage in case of an incorrect direction of rotation, or
• a Normal ID run is required during the drive start-up, when the load torque is higher
than 20% or the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during
the ID run.
Hints on using the assistant control panel
The two commands at the bottom of the display
(Options and Menu in the figure on the right),
show the functions of the two softkeys
and
located below the display. The commands
assigned to the softkeys vary depending on the
context.
Use keys
,
,
and
to move the cursor
and/or change values depending on the active
view.
Key
? shows a context-sensitive help page.
For more information, see ACS-AP-x assistant
control panels user’s manual (3AUA0000085685
[English]).
1 – First start assistant guided settings:
Language, date and time, and motor nominal values
Have the motor name plate data at hand.
Power up the drive.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 15
The First start assistant guides you through the
first start-up.
The assistant begins automatically. Wait until the
control panel enters the view shown on the right.
Select the language you want to use by
highlighting it (if not already highlighted) and
pressing
(OK).
Note: After you have selected the language, it
takes a few minutes to download the language file
to the control panel.
Select Start set-up and press
(Next).
Select the localization you want to use and press
(Next).
Change the units shown on the panel if needed.
• Go to the edit view of a selected row by
pressing
.
• Scroll the view with
and
.
Go to the next view by pressing
(Next).
Set the date and time as well as date and time
display formats.
• Go to the edit view of a selected row by
pressing
.
• Scroll the view with
and
Go to the next view by pressing
.
(Next).
16 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
In an edit view:
• Use
right.
and
to move the cursor left and
• Use
and
to change the value.
• Press
(Save) to accept the new setting,
or press
(Cancel) to go back to the
previous view without making changes.
To give the drive a name that will be shown at the
top, press
.
If you do not want to change the default name
(ACS580), continue straight to the set-up of the
motor nominal values by pressing
(Next).
Enter the name:
• To select the character mode (lower case /
upper case / numbers / special characters),
press
until symbol
is highlighted and
then select the mode with
and
. Now you
can start adding characters. The mode remains
selected until you select another one.
• To add a character, highlight it with
and press
.
• To remove a letter, press
and
.
• Press
(Save) to accept the new setting,
or press
(Cancel) to go back to the
previous view without making changes.
,
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 17
Refer to the motor nameplate for the following nominal value settings of the motor. Enter the
values exactly as shown on the motor nameplate.
Example of a nameplate of an induction (asynchronous) motor:
ABB Motors
3
motor
V
690 Y
400 D
660 Y
380 D
415 D
440 D
Cat. no
M2AA 200 MLA 4
IEC 200 M/L 55
No
Ins.cl. F
IP 55
Hz
kW
r/min
A
cos
IA/IN t E/s
30
32.5 0.83
1475
50
56
50
0.83
1475
30
50
0.83
34
1470
30
30
0.83
59
1470
50
50
0.83
54
1475
30
35 1770
0.83
59
60
3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3
6210/C3
180
IEC 34-1
Select the motor type.
Check that the motor data is correct. Values are
predefined on the basis of the drive size but you
should verify that they correspond to the motor.
Start with the motor nominal current.
If you have to change the value, go to the edit
view of the selected row by pressing
(when
this symbol is shown at the end of the row).
Set the correct value:
• Use
right.
and
to move the cursor left and
• Use
and
to change the value.
Press
(Save) to accept the new setting, or
press
(Cancel) to go back to the previous
view without making changes.
Continue to check/edit the nominal values and
select scalar or vector control mode.
Motor nominal cos Φ and nominal torque are
optional.
Roll down with
to see the last row in the view.
After editing the last row, the panel goes to the
next view.
To go directly to the next view, press
(Next).
18 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Direction test is optional, and requires rotating the
motor. Do not do this if it could cause any risk, or if
the mechanical set-up does not allow it.
To do the direction test, select Spin the motor
and press
(Next).
Press the Start key
drive.
on the panel to start the
Check the direction of the motor.
If it is forward, select Yes, motor is spinning
forward and press
(Next) to continue.
If the direction is not forward, select No, fix
direction and press
(Next) to continue.
Forward direction
Reverse direction
If you want to make a backup of the settings made
so far, select Backup and press
(Next).
If you do not want to make a backup, select Not
now and press
(Next).
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 19
The first start is now complete and the drive is
ready for use.
Press
(Done) to enter the Home view.
The Home view monitoring the values of the
selected signals is shown on the panel.
2 – Additional settings in the Primary settings menu
Make any additional adjustments, for example,
macro, ramps, and limits, starting from the Main
menu – press
(Menu) to enter the Main
menu.
Select Primary settings and press
(or
).
(Select)
We recommend that you make at least these
additional settings:
• Choose a macro or set start, stop and reference
values individually
• Ramps
• Limits
With the Primary settings menu, you can also
adjust settings related to the motor, PID, fieldbus,
advanced functions and clock, region and display.
In addition, the menu contains an item to reset the
panel Home view.
To get more information on Primary settings
menu items, press ? to open the help page.
20 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
2 – Additional settings: Macro
Select Macro: and press
(Select) (or
).
To change the macro in use, select the new macro
and press
(Select), or to go back without
changes, press
(Back).
Notes:
• Changing macro resets all settings except
motor data to the default values of the selected
macro.
• When you change the macro, you also change
the use of the I/O signals in the drive. Make
sure the actual I/O wiring and the use of I/O in
the control program match each other. You can
check the current I/O use in the I/O menu under
the Main menu (see page 22).
To get information on a selected macro, press
? .The help page shows the use of signals and
I/O connections. For detailed I/O connection
diagrams, see chapter Control macros on page
59.
Scroll the page with
and
.
To return to the Control macro submenu, press
(Exit).
• All macros, except the ABB standard (vector)
macro, use scalar motor control by default. At
the first start you can select to use scalar or
vector motor control. If you later want to change
the selection, Select Menu - Primary settings Motor - Control mode and follow the
instructions.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 21
2 – Additional settings: Start, stop and reference values
If you do not wish to use a macro, define the
settings for start, stop and reference:
Select Start, stop, reference and press
(Select) (or
).
Adjust the parameters according to your needs.
Select parameter and press
(Select).
When you change the settings, you also change
the use of the I/O signals in the drive. Make sure
the actual I/O wiring and the use of I/O in the
control program match each other. You can check
the current I/O use in the I/O menu under the
Main menu (see page 22).
After making the adjustments, go back to the
Primary settings menu by pressing
(Back).
2 – Additional settings: Ramps
(acceleration and deceleration times for the motor)
Select Ramps and press
(Select) (or
).
Adjust the parameters according to your needs.
Select a parameter and press
(Edit).
After making the adjustments, go back to the
Primary settings menu by pressing
(Back).
22 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
2 – Additional settings: Limits
Select Limits and press
(Select) (or
).
Adjust the parameters according to your needs.
Select a parameter and press
(Select).
After making the adjustments, go back to the
Primary settings menu by pressing
(Back).
3 – I/O menu
After the additional adjustments, make sure that
the actual I/O wiring matches the I/O use in the
control program.
In the Main menu, select a I/O and press
(Select) to enter the I/O menu.
Select a the connection you want to check and
press
(Select) (or
).
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 23
To view the details of a parameter that cannot be
adjusted via the I/O menu, press
(View).
To adjust the value of a parameter, press
(Edit), adjust the value using
,
,
and
keys and press
(Save). Note that the actual
wiring must match the new value.
Go back to the Main menu by pressing
(Back) repeatedly.
4 – Diagnostics menu
After making the additional adjustments and
checking the I/O connections, use the
Diagnostics menu to make sure that the setup is
functioning correctly.
In the Main menu, select Diagnostics and press
(Select) (or
).
Select the diagnostics item you want to view and
press
(Select).
Return to the Diagnostics menu by pressing
(Back).
24 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
5 – Backup
After you have finished start-up we recommend
that you make a backup.
In the Main menu, select Backups and press
(Select) (or
).
Press
(Select) to start backup.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 25
How to control the drive through the I/O interface
The table below describes how to operate the drive through the digital and analog
inputs when:
•
the motor start-up is performed, and
•
the default parameter settings of the ABB standard macro are in use.
Preliminary settings
If you need to change the direction of rotation, check
that limits allow reverse direction: Go to Menu Primary settings - Limits and make sure that the
minimum limit has a negative value and the maximum
limit has a positive value.
Make sure that the control connections are wired
according to the connection diagram given for the ABB
standard macro.
See section ABB standard macro on
page 60.
Make sure that the drive is in remote control. Press
key Loc/Rem to switch between remote and local
control.
In remote control, the panel display
shows text Remote at the top left.
Starting and controlling the speed of the motor
Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
The arrow starts rotating. It is dotted until the setpoint
is reached.
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by
adjusting voltage of analog input AI1.
Changing the direction of the motor rotation
Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
26 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Stopping the motor
Switch digital input DI1 off. The arrow stops rotating.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 27
How to perform the ID run
The drive automatically estimates motor characteristics using Standstill ID run when
the drive is started for the first time in vector control and after any motor parameter
(group 99 Motor data) is changed. This is valid when
•
parameter 99.13 ID run requested selection is Standstill and
•
parameter 99.04 Motor control mode selection is Vector.
In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID run. The ID run should
be selected manually if:
•
vector control mode is used (parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to
Vector), and
•
permanent magnet motor (PM) is used (parameter 99.03 Motor type is set to
Permanent magnet motor), or
•
drive operates near zero speed references, or
•
operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed
range is needed.
Do the ID run with the ID run assistant by selecting Menu - Primary settings - Motor
- ID run (see page 28) or with parameter 99.13 ID run requested (see page 30).
Note: If motor parameters (group 99 Motor data) are changed after the ID run, it must
be repeated.
Note: If you have already parameterized your application using the scalar motor
control mode (99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar) and you need to change
motor control mode to Vector,
•
change the control mode to vector with the Control mode assistant (go to Menu Primary settings - Motor - Control mode) and follow the instructions. The ID run
assistant then guides you through the ID run.
or
•
set parameter 99.04 Motor control mode to Vector, and
•
for I/O controlled drive, check parameters in groups 22 Speed reference
selection, 23 Speed reference ramp, 12 Standard AI, 30 Limits and 46
Monitoring/scaling settings.
•
for torque controlled drive, check also parameters in group 26 Torque
reference chain.
28 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
 ID run procedure
With the ID run assistant
Pre-check
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the nominal
speed during the ID run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Make
sure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run!
De-couple the motor from the driven equipment
Check that the values of the motor data parameters are equivalent to those on the motor
nameplate.
Check that the STO circuit is closed.
The assistant will ask if you want to use temporary motor limits. They must meet the
following conditions:
Minimum speed < 0 rpm
Maximum speed = motor rated speed (Normal ID run procedure needs the motor to be
run at 100% speed.)
Maximum current > IHD
Maximum torque > 50%
Make sure that the panel is in local control (text Local shown at the top left). Press key
Loc/Rem to switch between local and remote control.
ID run
Go to the Main menu by pressing
in the Home view.
(Menu)
Select Primary settings and press
(Select) (or
).
Select Motor and press
(Select) (or
).
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 29
Select ID run (shown only when the drive is in
vector control mode) and press
(Select) (or
).
Select the type of ID run you want to do and
press
(Select) (or
).
Warning message Identification run is shown at
the top for a few seconds.
Panel LED starts blinking green to indicate an
active warning.
Check the motor limits shown on the panel. If you
need other limits during the ID run you can enter
them here. The originals limits will be restored
after the ID run.
Press
(Next).
Press the start key (
) to start the ID run.
In general, it is recommended not to press any
control panel keys during the ID run. However,
you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing
the stop key (
).
During the ID run a progress view is shown.
After the ID run is completed, text ID run done is
shown. The LED stops blinking.
If the ID run fails, fault FF61 ID run is shown. See
chapter Fault tracing on page 357 for more
information.
30 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
With parameter 99.13 ID run requested
Pre-check
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the nominal
speed during the ID run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Make
sure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run!
De-couple the motor from the driven equipment
Check that the values of the motor data parameters are equivalent to those on the motor
nameplate.
Check that the STO circuit is closed.
If parameter values (from group 10 Standard DI, RO to group 99 Motor data) are changed
before the ID run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:
30.11 Minimum speed < 0 rpm
30.12 Maximum speed = motor rated speed (Normal ID run procedure needs the motor to
be run at 100% speed.)
30.17 Maximum current > IHD
30.20 Maximum torque 1 > 50% or 30.24 Maximum torque 2 > 50%, depending on which
torque limit set is in use according to parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Check that signals
run enable (parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source) is active
start enable (parameter 20.19 Enable start command) is active
enable to rotate (parameter 20.22 Enable to rotate) is active.
Make sure that the panel is in local control (text Local shown at the top left). Press key
Loc/Rem to switch between local and remote control.
ID run
Go to the Main menu by pressing
in the Home view.
Press
.
(Menu)
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 31
Select Parameters and press
).
Select Complete list and press
(or
).
(Select) (or
(Select)
Scroll the page with
and
, and select
parameter group 99 Motor data and press
(Select) (or
).
Scroll the page with
and
, and select
parameter 99.13 ID run requested (99.13 ID run
requested) and press
(Select) (or
).
Select the ID run type and press
).
(Save) (or
32 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
The panel returns to the previous view and
warning message Identification run is shown at
the top for a few seconds.
Panel LED starts blinking green to indicate an
active warning (AFF6).
The AFF6 warning view is shown when no key
has been pressed for one minute. Pressing
(How to fix) shows text informing that the ID run
will be done at the next start. You can hide the
warning view by pressing
(Hide).
Press the start key (
) to start the ID run.
In general, it is recommended not to press any
control panel keys during the ID run. However,
you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing
the stop key (
).
During the ID run the arrow is rotating at the top.
After the ID run is completed, text ID run done is
shown. The LED stops blinking.
If the ID run fails, fault FF61 ID run is shown. See
chapter Fault tracing on page 357 for more
information.
Control panel 33
3
Control panel
Contents of this chapter
This chapter contains instructions for removing and reinstalling the assistant control
panel and briefly describes its display, keys and key shortcuts. For more information,
see ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).
Removing and reinstalling the control panel
To remove the control panel, press the retaining clip at the top (1a) and pull it forward
from the top edge (1b).
1a
1b
34 Control panel
To reinstall the control panel, put the bottom of the container in position (1a), press
the retaining clip at the top (1b) and push the control panel in at the top edge (1c).
1b
1c
1a
Layout of the control panel
1
2
4
6
3
5
7
8
9
10
1
Layout of the control panel display
6
The arrow keys
2
Left softkey
7
Stop (see Start and Stop)
3
Right softkey
8
Start (see Start and Stop)
4
Status LED, see chapter Maintenance
and hardware diagnostics, section
LEDs in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
9
Local/Remote (see Loc/Rem)
5
Help
10
USB connector
Control panel 35
Layout of the control panel display
In most views, the following elements are shown on the display:
1
2
3
4
1
5
1
6
7
8
7
1. Control location and related icons: Indicates how the drive is controlled:
•
No text: The drive is in local control, but controlled from another device. The
icons in the top pane indicate which actions are allowed:
Text/Icons
•
Starting from this
control panel
Stopping from this
control panel
Giving reference
from this panel
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Local: The drive is in local control, and controlled from this control panel. The
icons in the top pane indicate which actions are allowed:
Text/Icons
Starting from this
control panel
Stopping from this
control panel
Giving reference
from this panel
Local
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
36 Control panel
•
Remote: The drive is in remote control, ie, controlled through I/O or fieldbus.
The icons in the top pane indicate which actions are allowed with the control
panel:
Text/Icons
Starting from this
control panel
Stopping from this
control panel
Giving reference
from this panel
Remote
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Remote
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Remote
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Remote
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
2. Panel bus: Indicates that there are more than one drive connected to this panel.
To switch to another drive, go to Options - Select drive.
3. Status icon: Indicates the status of the drive and the motor. The direction of the
arrow indicates forward (clockwise) or reverse (counter-clockwise) rotation.
Status icon
-
Animation
Drive status
Stopped
-
Stopped, start inhibited
Blinking
Stopped, start command given but start inhibited. See
Menu - Diagnostics on the control panel
Blinking
Faulted
Blinking
Running, at reference, but the reference value is 0
Rotating
Running, not at reference
Rotating
Running, at reference
4. Drive name: If a name has been given, it is displayed in the top pane. By default,
it is “ACS580”. You can change the name on the control panel by selecting Menu
- Primary settings - Clock, region, display (see page 53).
5. Reference value: Speed, frequency, etc. is shown with its unit. For information on
changing the reference value in the Primary settings menu (see page 44).
6. Content area: The actual content of the view is displayed in this area. The
content varies from view to view. The example view on page 35 is the main view
of the control panel which is called the Home view.
7. Softkey selections: Displays the functions of the softkeys (
given context.
and
) in a
8. Clock: The clock displays the current time. You can change the time and time
format on the control panel by selecting Menu - Primary settings - Clock,
region, display (see page 53).
You can adjust the display contrast and back light functionality on the control panel by
selecting Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display (see page 53).
Control panel 37
Keys
The keys of the control panel are described
below.
Left softkey
The left softkey (
) is usually used for
exiting and canceling. Its function in a given
situation is shown by the softkey selection in
the bottom left corner of the display.
Holding
down exits each view in turn until you are back in the Home view. This
function does not work in special screens.
Right softkey
The right softkey (
) is usually used for selecting, accepting and confirming. The
function of the right softkey in a given situation is shown by the softkey selection in
the bottom right corner of the display.
The arrow keys
The up and down arrow keys (
and
) are used to highlight selections in menus
and selection lists, to scroll up and down on text pages, and to adjust values when,
for example, setting the time, entering a passcode or changing a parameter value.
The left and right arrow keys (
and
) are used to move the cursor left and right in
parameter editing and to move forward and backward in assistants. In menus,
and
function the same way as
and
, respectively.
Help
The help key ( ? ) opens a help page. The help page is context-sensitive, in other
words, the content of the page is relevant to the menu or view in question.
Start and Stop
In local control, the start key (
respectively.
) and the stop key (
) start and stop the drive,
Loc/Rem
The location key ( Loc/Rem ) is used for switching the control between the control panel
(Local) and remote connections (Remote). When switching from Remote to Local
while the drive is running, the drive keeps running at the same speed. When
switching from Local to Remote, the status of the remote location is adopted.
38 Control panel
Key shortcuts
The table below lists key shortcuts and combinations. Simultaneous key presses are
indicated by the plus sign (+).
Shortcut
+
Available in
Effect
any view
Save a screenshot. Up to fifteen images may be stored
in the control panel memory.
To transfer images to PC, connect the assistant control
panel to PC with a USB cable and the panel will mount
itself as an MTP (media transfer protocol) device.
Pictures are stored in the screen shots folder.
+
For more instructions, see ACS-AP-x assistant control
panels user’s manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).
+
+
,
any view
Adjust backlight brightness.
+
+
,
any view
Adjust display contrast.
or
Home view
Adjust reference.
+
parameter edit views Revert an editable parameter to its default value.
+
view showing a list
of selections for a
parameter
Show/hide selection index numbers.
any view
Return to the Home view by pressing down the key until
the Home view is shown.
(keep down)
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 39
4
Settings, I/O and diagnostics
on the control panel
Contents of this chapter
This chapter provides detailed information about the Primary settings, I/O and
Diagnostics menus on the control panel.
To get to the Primary settings, I/O or Diagnostic menu from the Home view, first
select Menu to go the Main menu, and in the Main menu, select Primary settings,
I/O or Diagnostics.
40 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Primary settings menu
To go the Primary settings menu from the Home view, select Menu - Primary
settings.
The Primary settings menu enables you to adjust and define additional settings
used in the drive.
After making the guided settings using the first start assistant, we recommend that
you make at least these additional settings:
•
Select a Macro or set Start, stop, reference values
•
Ramps
•
Limits
With the Primary settings menu, you can also adjust settings related to the motor,
PID, fieldbus, advanced functions and clock, region and display. In addition, you can
reset the fault and event logs, panel Home view, parameters not related to hardware,
fieldbus settings, motor data and ID run results, all parameters, end user texts as well
as reset everything to factory defaults. Note that the Primary settings menu only
enables you to modify some of the settings: more advanced configuration is done via
the parameters: Select Menu - Parameters. For more information on the different
parameters, see chapter Parameters on page 135.
In the Setting menu, the
symbol indicates multiple connected signals/parameters.
The
symbol indicates that the setting provides an assistant when modifying the
parameters.
To get more information on Primary settings menu items, press the ? key to open
the help page.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 41
The figure below shows how to navigate in the Primary settings menu.
…
42 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
The sections below provide detailed information about the contents of the different
submenus available in the Primary settings menu.
 Macro
Use the Macro submenu to quickly set up drive control and reference source by
selecting from a set of predefined wiring configurations.
Note: For detailed information about the available macros, see Control macros on
page 39.
If you do not wish to use a macro, manually define the settings for Start, stop,
reference. Note that even if you select to use a macro, you can also modify the other
settings to suit your needs.
 Motor
Use the Motor submenu to adjust motor-related settings, such as nominal values,
control mode or thermal protection.
Note that settings that are visible depend on other selections, for example vector or
scalar control mode, used motor type or selected start mode.
Three assistants are available: Control mode, Nominal value and ID run (for vector
control mode only).
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 43
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Motor menu.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Control mode
Selects whether to use scalar or vector control
mode.
99.04 Motor control
mode
For information on scalar control mode, see Scalar
motor control on page 103.
Nominal values
Thermal protection
estimated
For information on vector control mode, see Vector
control on page 95.
Enter the motor's nominal values from the motor's 99.06 Motor nominal
current …
nameplate.
99.12 Motor nominal
torque
The settings in this submenu are meant to protect 35 Motor thermal
protection
the motor from overheating by automatically
triggering a fault or warning above a certain
temperature.
By default, motor thermal estimate protection is on.
We recommend checking the values for the
protection to function properly.
Thermal protection
measured
Start mode:
Flux braking:
U/f ratio:
IR compensation:
Pre-heating
Phase order:
For more information, see Motor thermal protection
on page 123.
The settings in this submenu are meant to protect 35 Motor thermal
protection
the motor with a thermal measurement from
overheating by automatically triggering a fault or
warning above a certain temperature.
For more information, see Motor thermal protection
on page 123.
Sets how the drive starts the motor (e.g. premagnetize or not).
Sets how much current to use for braking, ie. how
the motor is magnetized before starting. For more
information, see Flux braking on page 105.
The form of voltage to frequency ratio below field
weakening point. For more information, see U/f
ratio on page 105.
Sets how much to boost voltage at zero speed.
Increase this for higher break-away torque. For
more information, see IR compensation for scalar
motor control on page 103.
Turns pre-heating on or off. The drive can prevent
condensation in a stopped motor by feeding it a
fixed current (% of motor nominal current). Use in
humid or cold conditions to prevent condensation.
If the motor turns in the wrong direction, change
this setting to fix the direction instead of changing
the phase order on the motor cable.
21 Start/stop mode
97.05 Flux braking
97.20 U/F ratio
97.13 IR compensation
21.14 Pre-heating input
source
21.16 Pre-heating
current
99.16 Motor phase order
44 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
 Start, stop, reference
Use the Start, stop, reference submenu to set up start/stop commands, reference,
and related features, such as constant speeds or run permissions.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Start, stop, reference menu.
Menu item
Description
Reference from
Sets where the drive gets its reference when
remote control (Ext1) is active.
Corresponding
parameter
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1 or
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1
min
The voltage or current fed to the input is converted 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1
max
into a value the drive can use (e.g. reference).
Reference-related
settings (e.g. AI
scaling, AI2 scaling,
Motor potentiometer
settings) depending
on the selected
reference
Start/stop/dir from:
Sets where the drive gets start, stop, and
(optionally) direction commands when remote
control (Ext1) is active.
Secondary control
Settings for the secondary remote control location,
location
Ext2. These settings include reference source,
start, stop, direction and command sources for
Ext2.
By default, Ext2 is set to Off.
20.01 Ext1 commands
19.11 Ext1/Ext2
selection
28.15 Ext2 frequency
ref1 or
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
12.17 AI1 min
12.18 AI1 max
12.27 AI2 min
12.28 AI2 max
20.06 Ext2 commands
20.08 Ext2 in1 source
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
20.10 Ext2 in3 source
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 45
Menu item
Description
Constant speeds /
These settings are for using a constant value as
Constant frequencies the reference. By default, this is set to On. For
more information, see Constant
speeds/frequencies on page 97.
Jogging
Run permissions
These settings allow you to use a digital input to
briefly run the motor using predefined speed and
acceleration/deceleration ramps. By default,
jogging is disabled and it can only be used in the
Vector control mode. For more information, see
Jogging on page 99.
Settings to prevent the drive from running or
starting when a specific digital input is low.
Corresponding
parameter
28.21 Constant
frequency function or
22.21 Constant speed
function
28.26 Constant
frequency 1
28.27 Constant
frequency 2
28.28 Constant
frequency 3
22.26 Constant speed 1
22.27 Constant speed 2
22.28 Constant speed 3
20.25 Jogging enable
22.42 Jogging 1 ref
22.43 Jogging 2 ref
23.20 Acc time jogging
23.21 Dec time jogging
20.12 Run enable 1
source
20.11 Run enable stop
mode
20.19 Enable start
command
20.22 Enable to rotate
21.05 Emergency stop
source
21.04 Emergency stop
mode
23.23 Emergency stop
time
 Ramps
Use the Ramps submenu to set up acceleration and deceleration settings.
46 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Ramps menu.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Acceleration time:
This is the time between standstill and “scaling
speed” when using the default ramps (set 1).
Deceleration time:
This is the time between standstill and “scaling
speed” when using the default ramps (set 1).
Shape time:
Sets the shape of the default ramps (set 1).
Stop mode:
Use two ramp sets
Sets how the drive stops the motor.
Enables the use of a second
acceleration/deceleration ramp set. If unselected,
only one ramp set is used.
23.12 Acceleration time
1
28.72 Freq acceleration
time 1
23.13 Deceleration time
1
28.73 Freq deceleration
time 1
23.32 Shape time 1
28.82 Shape time 1
21.03 Stop mode
Note that if this selection is not enabled, the
selection below are not available.
Activate ramp set 2: To switch ramp sets, you can either:
• use a digital input (low = set 1; high = set 2), or
• automatically switch to set 2 above a certain
frequency/speed.
Acceleration time 2: Sets the time between standstill and “scaling
speed” when using ramp set 2.
Deceleration time 2: Sets the time between standstill and “scaling
speed” when using ramp set 2.
Shape time 2:
Sets the shape of ramps in set 2.
23.11 Ramp set
selection
28.71 Freq ramp set
selection
23.14 Acceleration time
2
28.74 Freq acceleration
time 2
23.15 Deceleration time
2
28.75 Freq deceleration
time 2
23.33 Shape time 2
28.83 Shape time 2
 Limits
Use the Limits submenu to set the allowed operating range. This function is intended
to protect the motor, connected hardware and mechanics. The drive stays within
these limits, no matter what reference value it gets.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 47
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Limits menu.
Menu item
Description
Minimum frequency
Sets the minimum operating frequency. Affects
scalar control only.
Maximum frequency Sets the maximum operating frequency. Affects
scalar control only.
Minimum speed
Sets the minimum operating speed. Affects vector
control only.
Maximum speed
Sets the maximum operating speed. Affects vector
control only.
Minimum torque
Sets the minimum operating torque. Affects vector
control only.
Maximum torque
Sets the maximum operating torque. Affects vector
control only.
Maximum current
Sets the maximum output current.
Corresponding
parameter
30.13 Minimum
frequency
30.14 Maximum
frequency
30.11 Minimum speed
30.12 Maximum speed
30.19 Minimum torque 1
30.20 Maximum torque
1
30.17 Maximum current
 PID
The PID submenu contains settings and actual values for the process PID controller.
PID is only used in remote control.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
PID menu.
Menu item
PID controls:
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Sets what to use PID output for:
40.07 Process PID
operation mode
• Not selected: PID not used.
PID output:
Unit:
• Frequency reference (or Speed reference,
depending on the motor control mode): Uses
PID output as a frequency (speed) reference
when remote control (Ext1) is active.
View the process PID output or set its range.
PID customer unit. Sets the text shown as the unit
for setpoint, feedback and deviation.
40.01 Process PID
output actual
40.36 Set 1 output min
40.37 Set 1 output max
48 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item
Description
Deviation:
View or invert process PID deviation.
Setpoint:
Feedback:
Tuning
Corresponding
parameter
40.04 Process PID
deviation actual
40.31 Set 1 deviation
inversion
View or configure the process PID setpoint, ie. the 40.03 Process PID
setpoint actual
target process value.
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
You can also use a constant setpoint value instead source
of (or in addition to) an external setpoint source.
When a constant setpoint is active, it overrides the
normal setpoint.
40.02 Process PID
View or configure process PID feedback, ie. the
feedback actual
measured value.
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1
source
40.11 Set 1 feedback
filter time
40.32 Set 1 gain
The Tuning submenu contains settings for gain,
40.33 Set 1 integration
integration time and derivation time.
time
1. Make sure it is safe to start the motor and run the 40.34 Set 1 derivation
actual process.
time
40.35 Set 1 derivation
2. Start the motor in remote control.
filter time
3. Change setpoint by a small amount.
4. Watch how feedback reacts.
5. Adjust gain/integration/derivation.
Sleep function
6. Repeat steps 3-5 until feedback reacts as
desired.
The sleep function can be used to save energy by
stopping the motor during low demand. By default,
sleep function is disabled. If enabled, the motor
automatically stops when demand is low, and starts
again when deviation grows too large. This saves
energy when rotating the motor at low speeds
would be useless.
40.43 Set 1 sleep level
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost
time
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost
step
40.47 Set 1 wake-up
deviation
See section Sleep and boost functions for process 40.48 Set 1 wake-up
delay
PID control on page 112.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 49
 Fieldbus
Use the settings in the Fieldbus submenu to use the drive with a fieldbus:
•
Modbus (RTU or TCP)
•
PROFIBUS
•
PROFINET
•
Ethernet/IP
You can also configure all the fieldbus related settings via the parameters (parameter
groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A settings, 52 FBA A data in, 53 FBA A
data out, 58 Embedded fieldbus), but the purpose of the Fieldbus menu is to make
the protocol configurations easier.
Note that only Modbus RTU is embedded and the other fieldbus modules are optional
adapters. For the optional modules, the following adapters are required to enable the
needed protocols:
•
ModbusTCP: FENA-11/-21
•
PROFIBUS: FBPA-01
•
PROFINET FENA-11/-21
•
Ethernet/IP: FENA-11/-21
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Fieldbus menu. Note that some of the items only became active once you have
enabled fieldbus.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Fieldbus selection
Select this if you want to use the drive with a
fieldbus.
51.01 FBA A type
58.01 Protocol enable
50 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Communication
setup
51 FBA A settings
To set up communication between the drive and
the fieldbus master, define these settings and then 51.01 FBA A type
51.02 FBA A Par2
select Apply settings to fieldbus module.
51.27 FBA A par refresh
51.31 D2FBA A comm
status
50.13 FBA A control
word
50.16 FBA A status
word
58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01 Protocol enable
58.03 Node address
58.04 Baud rate
58.05 Parity
58.25 Control profile
Drive control setup Sets how a fieldbus master can control this drive, 20.01 Ext1 commands
19.11 Ext1/Ext2
and how the drive reacts if the fieldbus
selection
communication fails.
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1
22.41 Speed ref safe
28.41 Frequency ref
safe
50.03 FBA A comm loss
t out
46.01 Speed scaling
46.02 Frequency scaling
23.12 Acceleration time
1
23.13 Deceleration time
1
28.72 Freq acceleration
time 1
28.73 Freq deceleration
time 1
51.27 FBA A par refresh
58.14 Communication
loss action
58.15 Communication
loss mode
58.16 Communication
loss time
50.13 FBA A control
Received data from Sets what the drive's fieldbus module expects to
word
master
receive from the fieldbus master (PLC). After
changing these settings, select Apply settings to 53 FBA A data out
51.27 FBA A par refresh
fieldbus module.
58.18 EFB control word
03.09 EFB reference 1
Send data to master Sets what the drive's fieldbus module sends to the 50.16 FBA A status
word
fieldbus master (PLC). After changing these
52 FBA A data in
settings, select Apply settings to fieldbus
51.27 FBA A par refresh
module.
58.19 EFB status word
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 51
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Apply settings to
fieldbus module
Applies modified settings to the fieldbus module.
51.27 FBA A par refresh
58.06 Communication
control
 Advanced functions
The Advanced functions submenu contains settings for advanced functions, such
as triggering or resetting faults via I/O, signal supervision, using the drive with timed
functions, or switching between several entire sets of settings.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Advanced functions menu.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
External events
31.01 External event 1
Enables you to define custom faults or warnings
you can trigger via digital input. The texts of these source
31.02 External event 1
messages are customizable.
type
31.03 External event 2
source
31.04 External event 2
type
31.05 External event 3
source
31.06 External event 3
type
Additional fault reset You can reset an active fault via I/O: a rising pulse 31.11 Fault reset
selection
in the selected input means reset.
Reset from keypad
and...
Autoreset faults
A fault can be reset from the fieldbus even if Reset
faults manually is unselected.
Define from where you want to reset faults
manually. Note that this submenu is active only if
you have selected to reset faults manually.
Reset faults automatically. For more information,
see Automatic fault resets on page 128.
31.11 Fault reset
selection
31.12 Autoreset
selection
31.14 Number of trials
31.15 Total trials time
31.16 Delay time
52 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Supervision
You can select three signals to be supervised. If a
signal is outside predefined limits a fault or warning
is generated. For complete settings, see group 32
Supervision on page 234.
Stall protection
The drive can detect a motor stall and
automatically fault or show a warning message.
32.01 Supervision
status
32.05 Supervision 1
function
32.06 Supervision 1
action
32.07 Supervision 1
signal
32.09 Supervision 1 low
32.10 Supervision 1
high
32.11 Supervision 1
hysteresis
…
32.25 Supervision 3
function
32.26 Supervision 3
action
32.27 Supervision 3
signal
32.29 Supervision 3 low
32.30 Supervision 3
high
32.31 Supervision 3
hysteresis
31.24 Stall function
31.25 Stall current limit
31.26 Stall speed limit
31.27 Stall frequency
limit
31.28 Stall time
Stall condition is detected when:
• current is high (above certain % of motor
nominal current), and
• output frequency (scalar control) or motor speed
(vector control) is below a certain limit, and
Timed functions
• the conditions above have been true for a certain
minimum duration.
Enables using the drive with timed functions. For 34.100 Timed function 1
complete settings, see group 34 Timed functions 34.101 Timed function 2
34.102 Timed function 3
on page 240.
34.11 Timer 1
configuration
34.12 Timer 1 start time
34.13 Timer 1 duration
…
34.44 Timer 12
configuration
34.45 Timer 12 start
time
34.46 Timer 12 duration
34.111 Extra time
activation source
34.112 Extra time
duration
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 53
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
User sets
This submenu enables you to save multiple sets of
settings for easy switching. For more information
about user sets, see User parameter sets on page
133.
96.11 User set
save/load
96.10 User set status
96.12 User set I/O mode
in1
 Clock, region, display
The Clock, region, display submenu contains settings for language, date and time,
display (such as brightness) and settings for changing how information is displayed
on screen.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the
Clock, region, display menu.
Menu item
Description
Language
96.01 Language
Change the language used on the control panel
screen. Note that the language is loaded from the
drive so this takes some time.
Set the time and date, and their formats.
Select the units used for power, temperature and
torque.
The drive name defined in this setting is shown in
the status bar at the top of the screen while using
the drive. If more than one drives are connected to
the control panel, the drive names make it easy to
identify each drive. It also identifies any backups
you create for this drive.
Define a fixed text that is shown during any fault
(for example, who to contact in case of a fault).
Date & time
Units
Drive name:
Contact info in fault
view
Display settings
If a fault occurs, this information appears on the
panel screen (in addition to the fault-specific
information).
Adjust the brightness, contrast and display power
save delay of the panel screen or to invert white
and black.
Corresponding
parameter
54 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item
Description
Show in lists
Show or hide the numeric IDs of:
Corresponding
parameter
• parameters and groups
• option list items
• bits
• devices in Options > Select drive
Show inhibit pop-up Enables or disables pop-up views showing
information on inhibits, for example when you try to
start the drive but it is prevented.
 Reset to defaults
The Reset to defaults submenu enables you to reset parameters and other settings.
Menu item
Description
Reset fault and event Clears all events from the drive’s fault and event
logs
logs.
Reset home view
Restores the home view layout back to show the
layout
values of the default parameters defined by the
control macro in use.
Reset non-HW
Restores all editable parameter values to default
parameters
values, except
• motor data and ID run results
Corresponding
parameter
96.51 Clear fault and
event logger
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection Reset
home view
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection
Restore defaults
• I/O extension module settings
• end user texts, such as customized warnings
and faults, and the drive name
• control panel/PC communication settings
• fieldbus adapter settings
• control macro selection and the parameter
defaults implemented by it
Reset all fieldbus
settings
• parameter 95.02 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it.
Restores all fieldbus and communication related
settings to default values.
Note: Fieldbus, control panel and PC tool
communication are interrupted during the restore.
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection Reset
all fieldbus settings
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 55
Menu item
Description
Corresponding
parameter
Reset motor data
and IR run results
Restores all motor nominal values and motor ID
run results to default values.
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection Reset
motor data
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection Clear
all
Reset all parameters Restores all editable parameter values to default
values, except
• end user texts, such as customized warnings
and faults, and the drive name
• control macro selection and the parameter
defaults implemented by it
• parameter 95.02 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it.
Reset end user texts Restores all end user texts to default values,
including the drive name, contact info, customized
fault and warning texts, PID unit and currency unit.
Reset all to factory
Restores all drive parameters and settings back to
defaults
initial factory values, except
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection Reset
end user texts
96.06 Parameter
restore, selection All to
factory defaults
• parameter 95.02 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it.
I/O menu
To go the I/O menu from the Home view, select Menu - I/O.
Use the I/O menu to make sure that the actual I/O wiring matches the I/O use in the
control program. It answers the questions:
•
What is each input being used for?
•
What is the meaning of each output?
In the I/O menu, each row provides the following information:
•
Terminal name and number
•
Electrical status
•
Logical meaning of the drive
Each row also provides a submenu that provides further information on the menu
item and lets you make changes to the I/O connections.
56 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
The table below provides detailed information about the contents of the different
submenus available in the I/O menu.
Menu item
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
AI1
AI2
RO1
RO2
RO3
AO1
AO2
Description
This submenu lists the functions that use DI1 as input.
This submenu lists the functions that use DI2 as input.
This submenu lists the functions that use DI3 as input.
This submenu lists the functions that use DI4 as input.
This submenu lists the functions that use DI5 as input.
This submenu lists the functions that use DI6 or FI as input. The
connector can be used as either digital input or frequency input.
This submenu lists the functions that use AI1 as input.
This submenu lists the functions that use AI2 as input.
This submenu lists what information goes into relay output 1.
This submenu lists what information goes into relay output 2.
This submenu lists what information goes into relay output 3.
This submenu lists what information goes into AO1.
This submenu lists what information goes into AO2.
Diagnostics menu
To go the Diagnostics menu from the Home view, select Menu - Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu provides you with diagnostic information, such as faults and
warnings, and helps you to resolve potential problems. Use the menu to make sure
that the drive setup is functioning correctly.
The table below provides detailed information about the contents of the different
views available in the Diagnostics menu.
Menu item
Description
Start, stop, reference This view shows where the drive is currently taking its start and stop
summary
commands and reference. The view is updated in real time.
Limit status
If the drive is not starting or stopping as expected, or runs at an undesired
speed, use this view to find out where the control comes from.
This view describes any limits currently affecting operation.
If the drive is running at undesired speed, use this view to find out if any
limitations are active.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 57
Menu item
Active faults
Active warnings
Active inhibits
Fault & event log
Fieldbus
Load profile
Description
This view shows the currently active faults and provides instructions on
how to fix and reset them.
This view shows the currently active warnings and provides instructions
on how to fix them.
This view shows the active start inhibits and how to fix them.
This view lists the faults, warnings and other events that have occurred in
the drive.
This view provides status information and sent and received data from
fieldbus for troubleshooting.
This view provides status information regarding load distribution (that is,
how much of the drive's running time was spent on each load level) and
peak load levels.
58 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Control macros 59
5
Control macros
Contents of this chapter
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and default control connections of
the application. At the end of chapter there are tables showing those parameter
default values that are not the same for all macros.
General
Control macros are sets of default parameter values suitable for a certain control
configuration. When starting up the drive, the user typically selects the best-suited
control macro as a starting point, then makes any necessary changes to tailor the
settings to their purpose. This usually results in a much lower number of user edits
compared to the traditional way of programming a drive.
Control macros can be selected in the Primary settings menu: Menu - Primary
settings - Macro or with parameter 96.04 Macro select (page 307).
Note: All macros are made for scalar control
except ABB standard which exists in two
versions. If you want to use vector control, do
as follows:
•
Select the macro.
•
Check nominal values of the motor: Menu Primary settings - Motor - Nominal
values.
•
Change motor control mode to vector: Menu
- Primary settings - Motor - Control mode, and follow the instructions (see the
figure on the right).
60 Control macros
ABB standard macro
This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration with three
constant speeds. One signal is used to start or stop the motor and another to select the
direction. The ABB standard macro uses scalar control; for vector control, use the ABB standard
(vector) macro (page 62).
 Default control connections for the ABB standard macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Output frequency reference: 0…10 V
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Not configured
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1)
DI2
Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
DI3
Constant frequency selection1)
DI4
Constant frequency selection1)
DI5
Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1)2)
DI6
Not configured
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 61
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant frequencies or parameter
group 28 Frequency reference chain.
DI3
DI4
Operation/Parameter
0
0
Set frequency through AI1
1
0
28.26 Constant frequency 1
0
1
28.27 Constant frequency 2
1
1
28.28 Constant frequency 3
2)
See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
DI5 Ramp set
Parameters
0
1
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1
1
2
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2
28.75 Freq deceleration time 2
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog frequency reference (AI1)
Start/stop selection (DI1)
Direction selection (DI2)
Constant frequency selection (DI3, DI4)
Ramp set (1 of 2) selection (DI5)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
62 Control macros
ABB standard (vector) macro
The ABB standard (vector) uses vector control; otherwise it is similar to the ABB standard
macro, providing a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration with three constant speeds. One
signal is used to start or stop the motor and another to select the direction. To enable the macro,
select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to ABB standard
(vector).
 Default control connections for the ABB standard (vector) macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Output Speed reference: 0…10 V1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Not configured
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1)
DI2
Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
DI3
Speed selection1)
DI4
Speed selection1)
DI5
Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1)2)
DI6
Not configured
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 63
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds or parameter
group 22 Speed reference selection.
DI3
DI4
Operation/Parameter
0
0
Set speed through AI1
1
0
22.26 Constant speed 1
0
1
22.27 Constant speed 2
1
1
22.28 Constant speed 3
2)
See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.
DI5 Ramp set
Parameters
0
1
23.12 Acceleration time 1
23.13 Deceleration time 1
1
2
23.14 Acceleration time 2
23.15 Deceleration time 2
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog speed reference (AI1)
Start/stop selection (DI1)
Direction selection (DI2)
Constant speed selection (DI3, DI4)
Ramp set (1 of 2) selection (DI5)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
64 Control macros
3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It provides three
constant speeds. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter
96.04 Macro select to 3-wire.
 Default control connections for the 3-wire macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Ext. speed/frequency reference 1: 0…10 V1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Not configured
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Start (pulse
)
DI2
Stop (pulse
)
DI3
Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
DI4
Constant speed/frequency selection2)
DI5
Constant speed/frequency selection2)
DI6
Not configured
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 65
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
AI1 is used as a speed reference if vector control is selected.
2)
In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant
frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds
or parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
DI4 DI5
Operation/Parameter
Scalar control (default)
Vector control
0
0
Set frequency through AI1
Set speed through AI1
1
0
28.26 Constant frequency 1
22.26 Constant speed 1
0
1
28.27 Constant frequency 2
22.27 Constant speed 2
1
1
28.28 Constant frequency 3
22.28 Constant speed 3
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog speed/frequency reference (AI1)
Start, pulse (DI1)
Stop, pulse (DI2)
Direction selection (DI3)
Constant speed/frequency selection (DI4, DI5)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
66 Control macros
Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration where one signal starts the motor in the forward
direction and another signal to start the motor in the reverse direction. To enable the macro,
select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Alternate.
 Default control connections for the Alternate macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Ext. speed/frequency reference 1: 0…10 V
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Not configured
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Start forward; If DI1 = DI2: Stop
DI2
Start reverse
DI3
Constant speed/frequency selection1)
DI4
Constant speed/frequency selection1)
DI5
Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1)2)
DI6
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 67
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant
frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds
or parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
DI3 DI4
Operation/Parameter
Scalar control (default)
Vector control
0
0
Set frequency through AI1
Set speed through AI1
1
0
28.26 Constant frequency 1
22.26 Constant speed 1
0
1
28.27 Constant frequency 2
22.27 Constant speed 2
1
1
28.28 Constant frequency 3
22.28 Constant speed 3
2)
In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 28
Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 23 Speed
reference ramp.
DI5 Ramp
Parameters
set
Scalar control (default)
Vector control
0
1
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1
23.12 Acceleration time 1
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1
23.13 Deceleration time 1
1
2
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2
23.14 Acceleration time 2
28.75 Freq deceleration time 2
23.15 Deceleration time 2
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog speed/frequency reference (AI1)
Start motor forward (DI1)
Start motor in reverse (DI2)
Constant speed/frequency selection (DI3, DI4)
Ramp set (1 of 2) selection (DI5)
Run enable (DI6)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
68 Control macros
Motor potentiometer macro
This macro provides a way to adjust the speed with the help of two-push buttons, or a costeffective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals.To enable
the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Motor
potentiometer.
 Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro
max.
500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
Voltage/Curre Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Not configured
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Not configured
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
U
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1)
DI2
Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
DI3
Reference up1)
DI4
Reference down1)
DI5
Constant frequency/speed 12)
DI6
Run enable; If 0, drive stops
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 69
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1) If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the frequency/speed reference is unchanged.
The existing frequency/speed reference is stored during stop and power down.
2)
In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant
frequencies or parameter 28.26 Constant frequency 1.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds
or parameter 22.26 Constant speed 1.
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop selection (DI1)
Direction selection (DI2)
Reference up (DI3)
Reference down (DI4)
Constant frequency/speed 1 (DI5)
Run enable (DI6)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
70 Control macros
Hand/Auto macro
This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is needed. Both
have their own control and reference signals. One signal is used to switch between these two.
To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro
select to Hand/Auto.
 Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
2)
3)
4)
3)
See the notes on
the next page.
3)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Output speed/freq, reference (Hand): 0…10 V
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Output speed/freq, ref. (Auto): 4…20 mA1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
U
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand)
DI2
Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Hand)
DI3
Hand control (0) / Auto control (1)
DI4
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
DI5
Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Auto)
DI6
Stop (0) / Start (1) (Auto)
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 71
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
2)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
3)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
4)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two speed/frequency analog reference (AI1, AI2)
Control location (Hand or Auto) selection (DI3)
Start/stop selection, Hand (DI1)
Direction selection, Hand (DI2)
Start/stop selection, Auto (DI6)
Direction selection, Auto (DI5)
Run enable (DI4)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
72 Control macros
Hand/PID macro
This macro controls the drive with the built-in process PID controller. In addition this macro has
a second control location for the direct speed/frequency control mode. To enable the macro,
select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Hand/PID.
 Default control connections for the Hand/PID macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
4)
5)
6)
5)
See the notes on
the next page.
5)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Ext. Hand reference or Ext. PID ref.: 0…10 V1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Actual PID feedback: 4…20 mA2)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1) Hand
DI2
Hand (0) / PID (1) selection
DI3
Constant frequency selection3)
DI4
Constant frequency selection3)
DI5
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
DI6
Stop (0) / Start (1) PID
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 73
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
Hand: 0…10 V -> frequency reference.
PID: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint.
2)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
3)
In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant
frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter)
Scalar control (default)
0
0
Set frequency through AI1
1
0
28.26 Constant frequency 1
0
1
28.27 Constant frequency 2
1
1
28.28 Constant frequency 3
4)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
5)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
6)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog reference (AI1)
Actual feedback from PID (AI2)
Control location (Hand or PID) selection (DI2)
Start/stop selection, Hand (DI1)
Start/stop selection, PID (DI6)
Constant frequency selection (DI3, DI4)
Run enable (DI5)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
74 Control macros
PID macro
This macro is suitable for applications where the drive is always controlled by PID and the
reference comes from analog input AI1. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings
menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to PID.
 Default control connections for the PID macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Ext. PID reference: 0…10 V
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Actual PID feedback: 4…20 mA1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1) PID
DI2
Constant PID setpoint 1: parameter 40.21
DI3
Constant PID setpoint 2: parameter 40.22
DI4
Constant frequency 1: parameter 28.26 2)
DI5
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
DI6
Not configured
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 75
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
2)
If Constant frequency is activated it overrides the reference from the PID controller output.
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog reference (AI1)
Actual feedback from PID (AI2)
Start/Stop selection, PID (DI1)
Constant setpoint 1 (DI2)
Constant setpoint 1 (DI3)
Constant frequency 1 (DI4)
Run enable (DI5)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
76 Control macros
Panel PID macro
This macro is suitable for applications where the drive is always controlled by PID and the
setpoint is defined with the control panel. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings
menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Panel PID.
 Default control connections for the Panel PID macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
3)
5)
5)
4)
See the notes on
the next page.
4)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Not configured.
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Actual PID feedback: 4…20 mA 1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1) PID
DI2
Constant PID setpoint 1: parameter 40.21
DI3
Constant PID setpoint 2: parameter 40.22
DI4
Constant frequency 1: parameter 28.26 2)
DI5
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
DI6
Not configured
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 77
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
2)
If Constant frequency is activated it overrides the reference from the PID controller output.
3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
4)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PID setpoint given from the control panel
Actual feedback from PID (AI2)
Start/Stop selection, PID (DI1)
Constant setpoint 1 (DI2)
Constant setpoint 1 (DI3)
Constant frequency 1 (DI4)
Run enable (DI5)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Ready run
Relay output 2: Running
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
78 Control macros
PFC macro
Pump and fan control logic for controlling multiple pumps or fans through the drive's relay
outputs. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04
Macro select to PFC.
 Default control connections for the PFC macro
1…10 kohm
max.
500 ohm
2)
5)
4)
3)
See the notes on
the next page.
3)
S1
S2
XI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3
X2 & X3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X6, X7, X8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
X5
29
30
31
S4
S5
X4
34
35
36
37
38
X10
40
41
AI1 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI1: U
I
AI2 U/I
Voltage/Current selection for AI2: U
I
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
PID setpoint source: 0…10 V
AGND
Analog input circuit common
+10V
Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2
Actual PID feedback: 4…20 mA1)
AGND
Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0…20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0…20 mA
AGND
Analog output circuit common
AO1 I/U
Voltage/Current selection for AO1: I
U
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND
Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM
Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1) (EXT1)
DI2
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
DI3
EXT1 (0) / EXT2 (1): parameter 19.11
DI4
Not configured
DI5
Not configured
DI6
Stop (0) / Start (1) (EXT2)
Relay outputs
RO1C
Running
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1A
2A
RO1B
RO2C
Fault (-1)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2A
2A
RO2B
RO3C
PFC2 (2nd motor=1st aux. motor)
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3A
2A
RO3B
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
Ainterface (EFB) on page 377.
DGND
TERM
Serial data link termination switch
BIAS
Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
OUT1
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
OUT2
must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter
SGND
The Safe torque off function in the Hardware
IN1
manual of the drive.
IN2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC- in R5…R9 only: Ext. 24V AC/DC input to power up the
24 V AC/DC+ in control unit when the main supply is disconnected.
Control macros 79
Terminal sizes:
R0…R3: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (terminals +24V, DGND, DCOM, B+, A-)
0.14…1.5 mm2 (terminals DI, AI, AO, AGND, RO, STO)
R5…R9: 0.14…2.5 mm2 (all terminals)
Tightening torques: 0.5…0.6 N·m (0.4 lbf·ft)
Notes:
1)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
2)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
3)
Connected with jumpers at the factory.
4)
Note: Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setpoint for PID (AI1)
Actual feedback from PID (AI2)
Start/Stop selection, EXT1 (DI1)
Run enable (DI2)
EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI3)
Start/Stop selection, EXT2 (DI6)
Output signals
•
•
•
•
•
Analog output AO1: Output frequency
Analog output AO2: Motor current
Relay output 1: Running
Relay output 2: Fault (-1)
Relay output 3: PFC2 (first PFC auxiliary motor)
80 Control macros
Parameter default values for different macros
Chapter Parameters on page 135 shows the default values of all parameters for the
ABB standard macro (factory macro). Some parameters have different default values
for other macros. The tables below lists the default values for those parameter for
each macro.
96.04 Macro select
1=
17 =
ABB standard ABB standard (vector)
11 =
3-wire
12 =
Alternate
13 =
Motor potentiometer
10.24 RO1 source
2 = Ready run
2 = Ready run
2 = Ready run
2 = Ready run
2 = Ready run
10.27 RO2 source
7 = Running
7 = Running
7 = Running
7 = Running
7 = Running
10.30 RO3 source
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1
max
50.0
1500.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
13.12 AO1 source
2 = Output
frequency
1 = Motor
speed used
2 = Output
frequency
2 = Output
frequency
2 = Output
frequency
13.18 AO1 source max
50.0
1500.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
19.11 Ext1/Ext2
selection
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
20.01 Ext1 commands
2 = In1 Start;
In2 Dir
2 = In1 Start;
In2 Dir
5 = In1P Start; 3 = In1 Start
In2 Stop; In3
fwd; In2 Start
2 = In1 Start;
In2 Dir
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
20.04 Ext1 in2 source
3 = DI2
0 = Not
selected
3 = DI2
3 = DI2
3 = DI2
20.05 Ext1 in3 source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
4 = DI3
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.06 Ext2 commands
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.08 Ext2 in1 source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.12 Run enable 1
source
1 = Selected
1 = Selected
1 = Selected
7 = DI6
7 = DI6
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 15 = Motor
potentiometer
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
22.22 Constant speed
sel1
4 = DI3
4 = DI3
5 = DI4
4 = DI3
6 = DI5
22.23 Constant speed
sel2
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
6 = DI5
5 = DI4
0 = Not
selected
Control macros 81
96.04 Macro select
2=
Hand/Auto
3=
Hand/PID
14 =
PID
15 =
Panel PID
16 =
PFC
10.24 RO1 source
2 = Ready run
2 = Ready run
2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 7 = Running
10.27 RO2 source
7 = Running
7 = Running
7 = Running
7 = Running
15 = Fault (-1)
10.30 RO3 source
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
15 = Fault (-1)
44 = PFC2
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1
max
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
13.12 AO1 source
2 = Output
frequency
2 = Output
frequency
2 = Output
frequency
2 = Output
frequency
2 = Output
frequency
13.18 AO1 source max
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
19.11 Ext1/Ext2
selection
5 = DI3
4 = DI2
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
5 = DI3
20.01 Ext1 commands
2 = In1 Start;
In2 Dir
1 = In1 Start
1 =In1 Start
1 =In1 Start
1 =In1 Start
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
20.04 Ext1 in2 source
3 = DI2
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.05 Ext1 in3 source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.06 Ext2 commands
2 = In1 Start;
In2 Dir
1 = In1 Start
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
1 = In1 Start
20.08 Ext2 in1 source
7 = DI6
7 = DI6
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
7 = DI6
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
6 = DI5
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
20.12 Run enable 1
source
5 = DI4
6 = DI5
6 = DI5
6 = DI5
3 = DI2
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 16 = PID
16 = PID
16 = PID
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
2 = AI2 scaled 16 = PID
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
16 = PID
22.22 Constant speed
sel1
0 = Not
selected
4 = DI3
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
0 = Not
selected
22.23 Constant speed
sel2
0 = Not
selected
5 = DI4
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
82 Control macros
96.04 Macro select
1=
17 =
ABB standard ABB standard (vector)
11 =
3-wire
12 =
Alternate
13 =
Motor potentiometer
22.71 Motor
potentiometer
function
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
(init at powerup)
22.73 Motor
potentiometer up
source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
4 = DI3
22.74 Motor
potentiometer
down source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
5 = DI4
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 15 = Motor
potentiometer
28.15 Ext1 frequency
ref2
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
28.22 Constant
frequency sel1
4 = DI3
4 = DI3
5 = DI4
4 = DI3
6 = DI5
28.23 Constant
frequency sel2
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
6 = DI5
5 = DI4
0 = Not
selected
28.71 Freq ramp set
selection
6 = DI5
6 = DI5
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
6 = DI5
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
40.07 Process PID
operation mode
0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
source
11 = AI1
percent
11 = AI1
percent
11 = AI1
percent
11 = AI1
percent
11 = AI1
percent
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2
source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
40.19 Set 1 internal
setpoint sel1
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
40.20 Set 1 internal
setpoint sel2
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
40.32 Set 1 gain
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
40.33 Set 1 integration
time
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
76.21 PFC configuration 0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
76.25 Number of motors 1
1
1
1
1
76.27 Max number of
motors allowed
1
1
1
1
1
Control macros 83
96.04 Macro select
2=
Hand/Auto
3=
Hand/PID
14 =
PID
15 =
Panel PID
16 =
PFC
22.71 Motor
potentiometer
function
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
22.73 Motor
potentiometer up
source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
22.74 Motor
potentiometer
down source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 16 = PID
16 = PID
16 = PID
28.15 Ext1 frequency
ref2
2 = AI2 scaled 16 = PID
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
16 = PID
28.22 Constant
frequency sel1
0 = Not
selected
4 = DI3
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
0 = Not
selected
28.23 Constant
frequency sel2
0 = Not
selected
5 = DI4
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
28.71 Freq ramp set
selection
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
0 = Acc/Dec
time 1
40.07 Process PID
operation mode
0 = Off
2 = On when
drive running
2 = On when
drive running
2 = On when
drive running
2 = On when
drive running
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
source
11 = AI1
percent
11 = AI1
percent
11 = AI1
percent
13 = Control
panel (ref
11 = AI1
percent
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2
source
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
2 = Internal
setpoint
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
40.19 Set 1 internal
setpoint sel1
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
3 = DI2
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
40.20 Set 1 internal
setpoint sel2
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
4 = DI3
0 = Not
selected
0 = Not
selected
40.32 Set 1 gain
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.50
40.33 Set 1 integration
time
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
3.0
76.21 PFC configuration 0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
0 = Off
2 = PFC
76.25 Number of motors 1
1
1
1
2
76.27 Max number of
motors allowed
1
1
1
2
1
84 Control macros
Program features 85
6
Program features
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes some of the more important functions within the control
program, how to use them and how to program them to operate. It also explains the
control locations and operating modes.
86 Program features
Local control vs. external control
The AC580 has two main control locations: external and local. The control location is
selected with the Loc/Rem key on the control panel or in the PC tool.
Drive
External control
I/O 1)
Local control
PLC
(= Programmable
logic controller)
Embedded fieldbus
interface
Fieldbus adapter (Fxxx)
Control panel or Drive composer
PC tool (optional)
M
3~
MOTOR
1)
Extra inputs/outputs can be added by installing an optional I/O extension module
(CMOD-01, CMOD-02 or CHDI-01) in drive slot.
 Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC
equipped with Drive composer when the drive is in local control. Speed and torque
control modes are available in vector motor control mode; frequency mode is
available when scalar motor control mode is used (see parameter 19.16 Local control
mode).
Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The control
panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control.
Changing the control location to local can be prevented by parameter 19.17 Local
control disable.
The user can select by a parameter (49.05 Communication loss action) how the drive
reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break. (The parameter has no
effect in external control.)
Program features 87
 External control
When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through
•
the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs), or optional I/O extension modules
•
the fieldbus interface (via the embedded fieldbus interface or an optional fieldbus
adapter module).
Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. The user can select
the sources of the start and stop commands separately for each location in the
Primary settings menu (Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference) or setting
parameters 20.01…20.10. The operating mode can be selected separately for each
location, which enables quick switching between different operating modes, for
example speed and torque control. Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is done via
any binary source such as a digital input or fieldbus control word (Menu - Primary
settings - Start, stop, reference - Secondary control location or parameter 19.11
Ext1/Ext2 selection). The source of reference is selectable for each operating mode
separately.
Block diagram: Run enable source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for run enable for
external control location EXT1.
0
1
DI1
DI6
Embedded fieldbus
Fieldbus adapter
Timed function
Supervision
A bit in a parameter
Not selected
Select
Selected
DI1
EXT1
Run enable
DI6
EFB MCW bit 3
FBA A MCW bit 3
20.12
Timed function 1…3
Supervision 1…3
Other [bit]
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Secondary control
location; Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference
•
Parameters 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection (page 173); 20.01…20.10 (page 174).
Motor potentiometer
The motor potentiometer is, in effect, a counter whose value can be adjusted up and
down using two digital signals selected by parameters 22.73 Motor potentiometer up
source and 22.74 Motor potentiometer down source.
88 Program features
When enabled by 22.71 Motor potentiometer function, the motor potentiometer
assumes the value set by 22.72 Motor potentiometer initial value. Depending on the
mode selected in 22.71, the motor potentiometer value is either retained or reset over
a power cycle.
The change rate is defined in 22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time as the time it
would take for the value to change from the minimum (22.76 Motor potentiometer min
value) to the maximum (22.77 Motor potentiometer max value) or vice versa. If the up
and down signals are simultaneously on, the motor potentiometer value does not
change.
The output of the function is shown by 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act, which can
directly be set as the reference source in the main selector parameters, or used as an
input by other source selector parameters, both in scalar and vector control.
The following example shows the behavior of the motor potentiometer value.
1
22.73
0
1
22.74
0
22.77
22.80
0
22.76
22.75
Settings
Parameters 22.71…22.80 (page 198).
Program features 89
Operating modes of the drive
The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of reference.
The mode is selectable for each control location (Local, EXT1 and EXT2) in
parameter group 19 Operation mode. An overview of the different reference types
and control chains is shown below.
PID
Torque
reference
Speed
reference
Frequency
reference
Vector motor control mode
Scalar motor control mode
Torque controller
Frequency controller
The following is a more detailed representation of the reference types and control
chains. The page numbers refer to detailed diagrams in chapter Control chain
diagrams.
90 Program features
Process PID setpoint and
feedback source selection
(p 430)
Process PID controller
(p 431))
Torque reference
source selection and
modification
(p 427)
Speed reference
source selection I
(p 422))
Frequency reference
source selection and
modification
(p 420…421)
Speed reference source
selection II
(p 423)
Speed reference ramping and
shaping
(p 424)
Speed error calculation
(p 425)
Speed controller
(p 426)
Reference selection for torque
controller
(p 428)
Torque limitation
(p 429)
Vector motor control mode
Scalar motor control mode
Torque controller
Frequency controller
Program features 91
 Speed control mode
The motor follows a speed reference given to the drive. This mode can be used either
with estimated speed used as feedback.
Speed control mode is available in both local and external control. It is supported in
vector motor control only.
 Torque control mode
Motor torque follows a torque reference given to the drive. Torque control mode is
available in both local and external control. It is supported in vector motor control
only.
 Frequency control mode
The motor follows a frequency reference given to the drive. Frequency control is
available in both local and external control. It is supported in scalar motor control only.
 Special control modes
In addition to the above-mentioned control modes, the following special control
modes are available:
•
Process PID control. For more information, see section Process PID control (page
111).
•
Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3: Drive stops along the defined
deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops.
•
Jogging mode: Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the
jogging signal is activated. For more information, see section Jogging (page 99).
•
Pre-magnetization: DC magnetization of the motor before start. For more
information, see section Pre-magnetization (page 106).
•
DC hold: Locking the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of normal operation.
For more information, see section DC hold (page 107).
•
Pre-heating (motor heating): Keeping the motor warm when the drive is stopped.
For more information, see section Pre-heating (Motor heating) (page 107).
92 Program features
Drive configuration and programming
The drive control program performs the main control functions, including speed,
torque and frequency control, drive logic (start/stop), I/O, feedback, communication
and protection functions. Control program functions are configured and programmed
with parameters.
Drive control program
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Drive logic
I/O interface
Fieldbus interface
Protections
M
 Configuring via parameters
Parameters configure all of the standard drive operations and can be set via
•
the control panel, as described in chapter Control panel
•
the Drive composer PC tool, as described in Drive composer user’s manual
(3AUA0000094606 [English]), or
•
the fieldbus interface, as described in chapters Fieldbus control through the
embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus
adapter.
All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive.
However, if an external +24 V DC power supply is used for the drive control unit, it is
highly recommended to force a save by using parameter 96.07 Parameter save
manually before powering down the control unit after any parameter changes have
been made.
If necessary, the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 96.06
Parameter restore.
Program features 93
Control interfaces
 Programmable analog inputs
The control unit has two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can be
independently set as a voltage (0/2…10 V) or current (0/4…20 mA) input by a switch
on the control unit. Each input can be filtered, inverted and scaled.
Settings
Parameter group 12 Standard AI (page 156).
 Programmable analog outputs
The control unit has two current (0…20 mA) analog outputs. Each output can be
filtered, inverted and scaled.
Settings
Parameter group 13 Standard AO (page 160).
 Programmable digital inputs and outputs
The control unit has six digital inputs.
Digital input DI6 can be used as a frequency input.
Six digital inputs can be added by using a CHDI-01 115/230 V digital input extension
module and one digital output by using a CMOD-01 multifunction extension module.
Settings
Parameter groups 10 Standard DI, RO (page 150) and 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
(page 154).
 Programmable frequency input and output
Digital input (DI6) can be configured as a frequency input. A frequency output can be
implemented with a CMOD-01 multifunction extension module.
Settings
Parameter groups 10 Standard DI, RO (page 150) and 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
(page 154).
 Programmable relay outputs
The control unit has three relay outputs. The signal to be indicated by the outputs can
be selected by parameters.
Two relay outputs can be added by using a CMOD-01 multifunction extension module
or a CHDI-01 115/230 V digital input extension module.
94 Program features
Settings
Parameter group 10 Standard DI, RO (page 150).
 Programmable I/O extensions
Inputs and outputs can be added by using a CMOD-01 multifunction extension
module or a CHDI-01 115/230 V digital input extension module. The module is
mounted on option slot 2 of the control unit.
The table below shows the number of I/O on the control unit as well as optional
CMOD-01 and a CHDI-01 modules.
Digital
inputs
(DI)
Digital
outputs
(DO)
Digital
I/Os
(DIO)
Analog
inputs
(AI)
Analog
outputs
(AO)
Relay
outputs
(RO)
6
-
-
2
2
3
CMOD-01
-
1
-
-
-
2
CHDI-01
6
-
-
-
-
2
Location
Control unit
The I/O extension module can be activated and configured using parameter group
15.
Note: The configuration parameter group contains parameters that display the values
of the inputs on the extension module. These parameters are the only way of utilizing
the inputs on an I/O extension module as signal sources. To connect to an input,
choose the setting Other in the source selector parameter, then specify the
appropriate value parameter (and bit, for digital signals) in group 15.
Settings
Parameter group 15 I/O extension module (page 166).
 Fieldbus control
The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its
fieldbus interfaces. See chapters Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
interface (EFB) (page 377) and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page
405).
Settings
Parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) (page 284), 51 FBA A settings (page
288), 52 FBA A data in (page 290), and 53 FBA A data out (page 290) and 58
Embedded fieldbus (page 291).
Program features 95
Motor control
 Motor types
The drive supports asynchronous AC induction and permanent magnet (PM) motors.
 Motor identification
The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined
during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed
for several seconds and the motor and motor cable resistance are measured to allow
the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most
applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification run (ID run) can be performed.
Settings
99.13 ID run requested (page 319)
 Power loss ride-through
See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 119.
 Vector control
The switching of the output semiconductors is controlled to achieve the required
stator flux and motor torque. The output frequency is changed only if the actual
torque and stator flux values differ from their reference values by more than the
allowed hysteresis. The reference value for the torque controller comes from the
speed controller or directly from an external torque reference source.
Motor control requires measurement of the DC voltage and two motor phase
currents. Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space.
Motor torque is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux and the rotor current.
By utilizing the identified motor model, the stator flux estimate is improved. Actual
motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor control.
The main difference between traditional control and vector control is that torque
control operates at the same time level as the power switch control. There is no
separate voltage and frequency controlled PWM modulator; the output stage
switching is wholly based on the electromagnetic state of the motor.
The best motor control accuracy is achieved by activating a separate motor
identification run (normal ID run).
See also section Speed control performance figures (page 102).
96 Program features
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Control mode
•
Parameters 99.04 Motor control mode (page 317) and 99.13 ID run requested
(page 319).
 Reference ramping
Acceleration and deceleration ramping times can be set individually for speed, torque
and frequency reference (Menu - Primary settings - Ramps).
With a speed or frequency reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for
the drive to accelerate or decelerate between zero speed or frequency and the value
defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling. The user can
switch between two preset ramp sets using a binary source such as a digital input.
For speed reference, also the shape of the ramp can be controlled.
With a torque reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the reference
to change between zero and nominal motor torque (parameter 01.30 Nominal torque
scale).
Variable slope
Variable slope controls the slope of the speed ramp during a reference change. With
this feature a constantly variable ramp can be used.
Variable slope is only supported in remote control.
Settings
Parameters 23.28 Variable slope enable (page 202) and 23.29 Variable slope rate
(page 202).
Special acceleration/deceleration ramps
The acceleration/deceleration times for the jogging function can be defined
separately; see section Jogging (page 99).
The change rate of the motor potentiometer function (page 102) is adjustable. The
same rate applies in both directions.
A deceleration ramp can be defined for emergency stop (“Off3” mode).
Program features 97
Settings
•
Speed reference ramping: Parameters 23.11…23.15 and 46.01
(pages 200 and 279).
•
Torque reference ramping: Parameters 01.30, 26.18 and 26.19
(pages 140 and 212).
•
Frequency reference ramping: Parameters 28.71…28.75 and 46.02
(pages 220 and 280).
•
Jogging: Parameters 23.20 and 23.21 (page 201).
•
Motor potentiometer: Parameter 22.75 (page 199).
•
Emergency stop (“Off3” mode): Parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time
(page 201).
 Constant speeds/frequencies
Constant speeds and frequencies are predefined references that can be quickly
activated, for example, through digital inputs. It is possible to define up to 7 speeds
for speed control and 7 constant frequencies for frequency control.
WARNING: Speeds and frequencies override the normal reference
irrespective of where the reference is coming from.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant frequencies,
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds
•
Parameter groups 22 Speed reference selection (page 192) and 28 Frequency
reference chain (page 213).
 Critical speeds/frequencies
Critical speeds (sometimes called “skip speeds”) can be predefined for applications
where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of, for
example, mechanical resonance problems.
The critical speeds function prevents the reference from dwelling within a critical band
for extended times. When a changing reference (22.87 Speed reference act 7) enters
a critical range, the output of the function (22.01 Speed ref unlimited) freezes until the
reference exits the range. Any instant change in the output is smoothed out by the
ramping function further in the reference chain.
When the drive is limiting the allowed output speeds/frequencies, it limits to the
absolutely lowest critical speed (critical speed low or critical frequency low) when
accelerating from standstill, unless the speed reference is over the upper critical
speed/ frequency limit.
98 Program features
The function is also available for scalar motor control with a frequency reference. The
input of the function is shown by 28.96 Frequency ref act 7.
Example
A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To make
the drive avoid these speed ranges,
•
enable the critical speeds function by turning on bit 0 of parameter 22.51 Critical
speed function, and
•
set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
22.01 Speed ref unlimited (rpm)
(output of function)
1560
1380
690
1
Par. 22.52 = 540 rpm
2
Par. 22.53 = 690 rpm
3
Par. 22.54 = 1380 rpm
4
Par. 22.55 = 1560 rpm
540
1
2
3
4
22.87 Speed reference act 7 (rpm)
(input of function)
Settings
•
Critical speeds: parameters 22.51…22.57 (page 197)
•
Critical frequencies: parameters 28.51…28.57 (page 219).
 Rush control
In torque control, the motor could potentially rush if the load were suddenly lost. The
control program has a rush control function that decreases the torque reference
Program features 99
whenever the motor speed exceeds 30.11 Minimum speed or 30.12 Maximum speed.
Motor speed
Overspeed trip level
31.30 Overspeed trip margin
30.12
0
Rush control active
Time
30.11
31.30 Overspeed trip margin
Overspeed trip level
The function is based on a PI controller. The program sets the proportional gain to
10.0 and integration time to 2.0 s.
 Jogging
The jogging function enables the use of a momentary switch to briefly rotate the
motor. The jogging function is typically used during servicing or commissioning to
control the machinery locally.
Two jogging functions (1 and 2) are available, each with their own activation sources
and references. The signal sources are selected by parameters 20.26 Jogging 1 start
source and 20.27 Jogging 2 start source (Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop,
reference - Jogging). When jogging is activated, the drive starts and accelerates to
the defined jogging speed (22.42 Jogging 1 ref or 22.43 Jogging 2 ref) along the
defined jogging acceleration ramp (23.20 Acc time jogging). After the activation signal
switches off, the drive decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration
ramp (23.21 Dec time jogging).
The figure and table below provide an example of how the drive operates during
jogging. In the example, the ramp stop mode is used (see parameter 21.03 Stop
mode).
100 Program features
Jog cmd = State of source set by 20.26 Jogging 1 start source or 20.27 Jogging 2
start source
Jog enable = State of source set by 20.25 Jogging enable
Start cmd = State of drive start command.
Jog cmd
Jog enable
Start cmd
Speed
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9
10 11
12 13
1415 16
17 18
t
Phase
Jog
cmd
Jog
enable
Start
cmd
1-2
1
1
0
2-3
1
1
0
Drive follows the jog reference.
3-4
0
1
0
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
4-5
0
1
0
Drive is stopped.
5-6
1
1
0
Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
6-7
1
1
0
Drive follows the jog reference.
7-8
0
1
0
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
8-9
0
1->0
0
Drive is stopped. As long as the jog enable signal is on, start
commands are ignored. After jog enable switches off, a fresh
start command is required.
9-10
x
0
1
Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected
acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15).
10-11
x
0
1
Drive follows the speed reference.
11-12
x
0
0
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected
deceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15).
12-13
x
0
0
Drive is stopped.
13-14
x
0
1
Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected
acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15).
Description
Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
Program features 101
Phase
Jog
cmd
Jog
enable
Start
cmd
14-15
x
0->1
1
Drive follows the speed reference. As long as the start
command is on, the jog enable signal is ignored. If the jog
enable signal is on when the start command switches off,
jogging is enabled immediately.
15-16
0->1
1
0
Start command switches off. The drive starts to decelerate
along the selected deceleration ramp (parameters
23.11…23.15).
Description
When the jog command switches on, the decelerating drive
adopts the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
16-17
17-18
1
1
0
Drive follows the jog reference.
0
1->0
0
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
See also the block diagram on page 424.
Notes:
•
Jogging is not available when the drive is in local control.
•
Jogging cannot be enabled when the drive start command is on, or the drive
started when jogging is enabled. Starting the drive after the jog enable switches
off requires a fresh start command.
WARNING! If jogging is enabled and activated while the start command is on,
jogging will activate as soon as the start command switches off.
•
If both jogging functions are activated, the one that was activated first has priority.
•
Jogging uses vector control.
•
The inching functions activated through fieldbus (see 06.01 Main control word,
bits 8…9) use the references and ramp times defined for jogging, but do not
require the jog enable signal.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Jogging
•
Parameters 20.25 Jogging enable (page 182), 20.26 Jogging 1 start source (page
183), 20.27 Jogging 2 start source (page 183), 22.42 Jogging 1 ref (page 197),
22.43 Jogging 2 ref (page 197), 23.20 Acc time jogging (page 201) and 23.21 Dec
time jogging (page 201).
102 Program features
 Speed control performance figures
The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control.
T (%)
TN
Speed control
Static accuracy
Dynamic accuracy
Tload
100
Performance
20% of motor
nominal slip
< 10% s with 100%
torque step
t (s)
nact-nref
nN
TN
nN
nact
nref
Area < 10% s
= rated motor torque
= rated motor speed
= actual speed
= speed reference
 Torque control performance figures
The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the
motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control.
Torque control
Non-linearity
Performance
± 5% with nominal
torque
T (%)
TN
100
Tref
Tact
90
(± 20% at the most
demanding operating
point)
Torque step rise time < 10 ms with nominal
torque
10
t (s)
< 5 ms
TN = rated motor torque
Tref = torque reference
Tact = actual torque
Program features 103
 Scalar motor control
Scalar motor control is the default motor control method. In scalar control mode, the
drive is controlled with a frequency reference. However, the excellent performance of
vector control is not achieved in scalar control.
It is recommended to activate scalar motor control mode in the following situations:
•
If the exact nominal motor values are not available or the drive needs to run
different motor after the commissioning phase
•
If a short commissioning time is needed or no ID run is wanted
•
In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
motor identification (ID run)
•
If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
•
If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example, for test purposes)
•
If the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up transformer.
In scalar control, some standard features are not available.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 89).
IR compensation for scalar motor control
IR compensation (also known as
voltage boost) is available only when
the motor control mode is scalar. When
IR compensation is activated, the drive
gives an extra voltage boost to the
motor at low speeds. IR compensation
is useful in applications that require a
high break-away torque.
Motor voltage
IR compensation
No compensation
In vector control, no IR compensation is
possible or needed as it is applied
automatically.
f (Hz)
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - IR compensation
•
Parameters 97.13 IR compensation (page 314) and 99.04 Motor control mode
(page 317)
•
Parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain (page 213).
104 Program features
 User load curve
The User load curve provides a supervisory function that monitors an input signal as
a function of frequency or speed, and load. It shows the status of the monitored signal
and can give a warning or fault based on the violation of a user defined profile.
The user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve, or just one of
them. Each curve is formed by five points that represent the monitored signal as a
function of frequency or speed.
In the example below, the user load curve is constructed from the motor nominal
torque to which a 10% margin is added and subtracted. The margin curves define a
working envelope for the motor so that excursions outside the envelope can be
supervised, timed and detected.
Motor torque / Nominal torque
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
1
2
0.0
-0.2
3
0
10
20
1 = Overload curve (five points)
2 = Nominal process load curve
3 = Underload curve (five points)
30
40
50
Output frequency (Hz)
An overload warning and/or fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays
continuously over the overload curve for a defined time. An underload warning and/or
fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays continuously under the
underload for a defined time.
Overload can be for example used to monitor for a saw blade hitting a knot or fan
load profiles becoming too high.
Underload can be for example used to monitor for load dropping and breaking of
conveyer belts or fan belts.
Program features 105
Settings
Parameter group 37 User load curve (page 258).
 U/f ratio
The U/f function is only available in scalar motor control mode, which uses frequency
control.
The function has two modes: linear and squared.
In linear mode, the ratio of voltage to frequency is constant below the field weakening
point. This is used in constant torque applications where it may be necessary to
produce torque at or near the rated torque of the motor throughout the frequency
range
In squared mode (default), the ratio of the voltage to frequency increases as the
square of the frequency below the field weakening point. This is typically used in
centrifugal pump or fan applications. For these applications, the torque required
follows the square relationship with frequency. Therefore, if the voltage is varied
using the square relationship, the motor operates at improved efficiency and lower
noise levels in these applications.
The U/f function cannot be used with energy optimization; if parameter 45.11 Energy
optimizer is set to Enable, parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is ignored.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - U/f ratio
•
Parameter 97.20 U/F ratio (page 314).
 Flux braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the
motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy.
TBr
Motor
speed
No flux braking
(%)
TBr = Braking torque
= 100 Nm
60
40
Flux braking
20
Flux braking
No flux braking
t (s)
f (Hz)
106 Program features
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during flux braking. Therefore,
flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The
other benefits of flux braking are:
•
The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
•
The cooling of the induction motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor
increases during flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
•
Flux braking can be used with induction motors and permanent magnet
synchronous motors.
Two braking power levels are available:
•
Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux
braking is disabled. The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive
heating of the motor.
•
Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking
energy to motor thermal energy. Braking time is shorter compared to moderate
braking. In cyclic use, motor heating may be significant.
WARNING: The motor needs to be rated to absorb the thermal energy
generated by flux braking.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Flux braking
•
Parameter 97.05 Flux braking (page 313).
 DC magnetization
The drive has different magnetization functions for different phases of motor
start/rotation/stop: pre-magnetization, DC hold, post-magnetization and pre-heating
(motor heating).
Pre-magnetization
Pre-magnetization refers to DC magnetization of the motor before start. Depending
on the selected start mode (21.01 Vector start mode or 21.19 Scalar start mode), premagnetization can be applied to guarantee the highest possible breakaway torque,
up to 200% of the nominal torque of the motor. By adjusting the pre-magnetization
time (21.02 Magnetization time), it is possible to synchronize the motor start and, for
example, the release of a mechanical brake.
Settings
Parameters 21.01 Vector start mode, 21.19 Scalar start mode, 21.02 Magnetization
time
Program features 107
DC hold
The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of
normal operation. DC hold is activated by parameter 21.08 DC current control. When
both the reference and motor speed drop below a certain level (parameter 21.09 DC
hold speed), the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC
into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.10 DC current reference. When the
reference exceeds parameter 21.09 DC hold speed, normal drive operation
continues.
Motor speed
DC hold
Reference
t
21.09 DC hold speed
t
Settings
Parameters 21.08 DC current control and 21.09 DC hold speed
Post-magnetization
The function keeps the motor magnetized for a certain period (parameter 21.11 Post
magnetization time) after stopping. This is to prevent the machinery from moving
under load, for example before a mechanical brake can be applied. Postmagnetization is activated by parameter 21.08 DC current control. The magnetization
current is set by parameter 21.10 DC current reference.
Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramp stop is selected (see
parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
Settings
Parameters 21.01 Vector start mode, 21.02 Magnetization time and 21.08…21.11
(page 188).
Pre-heating (Motor heating)
The pre-heating function keeps the motor warm and prevents condensation inside the
motor by feeding it with DC current when the drive has been stopped. The heating
108 Program features
can only be activated when the drive is in the stopped state, and starting the drive
stops the heating.
The heating is started 60 seconds after zero speed has been reached or modulation
has been stopped to prevent excessive current if coast stop is used.
The function can be defined to be always active when the drive is stopped or it can be
activated by a digital input, fieldbus, timed function or supervision function. For
example, with the help of signal supervision function, the heating can be activated by
a thermal measurement signal from the motor.
The pre-heating current fed to the motor can be defined as 0…30% of the nominal
motor current.
Notes:
•
In applications where the motor keeps rotating for a long time after the modulation
is stopped, it is recommended to use ramp stop with pre-heating to prevent a
sudden pull at the rotor when the pre-heating is activated.
•
The heating function requires that the STO circuit is closed or not triggered open.
•
The heating function requires that the drive is not faulted.
•
Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Pre-heating
•
Parameters 21.14 Pre-heating input source and 21.16 Pre-heating current (page
188)
 Energy optimization
The function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy consumption and motor
noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total
efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1…20% depending on load torque
and speed.
Note: With a permanent magnet motor, energy optimization is always enabled.
Settings
•
Menu - Energy efficiency
•
Parameter 45.11 Energy optimizer (page 278)
 Switching frequency
The drive has two switching frequencies: reference switching frequency and
minimum switching frequency. The drive tries to keep the highest allowed switching
frequency (= reference switching frequency) if thermally possible, and then adjusts
dynamically between the reference and minimum switching frequencies depending
on the drive temperature. When the drive reaches the minimum switching frequency
Program features 109
(= lowest allowed switching frequency), it starts to limit output current as the heating
up continues.
For derating, see chapter Technical data, section Switching frequency derating in the
Hardware manual of the drive.
Example 1: If you need to fix the switching frequency to a certain value as with some
external filters, set both the reference and the minimum switching frequency to this
value and the drive will retain this switching frequency.
Example 2: If the reference switching frequency is set to 12 kHz and the minimum
switching frequency is set to 1.5 kHz, the drive maintains the highest possible
switching frequency to reduce motor noise and only when the drive heats it will
decrease the switching frequency. This is useful, for example, in applications where
low noise is necessary but higher noise can be tolerated when the full output current
is needed.
Settings
Parameter 97.01 Switching frequency reference and 97.02 Minimum switching
frequency (page 305).
 Speed compensated stop
Speed compensation stop is available for example for applications where a conveyer
needs to travel a certain distance after receiving the stop command. At maximum
speed, the motor is stopped normally along the defined deceleration ramp, after the
application of a user defined delay to adjust the distance traveled. Below maximum
speed, stop is delayed still more by running the drive at current speed before the
motor is ramped to a stop. As shown in the figure, the distance traveled after the stop
command is the same in both cases, that is, area A + area B equals area C.
Motor speed
Max.
speed
D1 = Delay defined by parameter
21.31
D2 = Additional delay calculated by
speed compensated stop
Stop
command
D1
A
B
Area A + Area B = Area C
Used
speed
D2
C
t (s)
110 Program features
Speed compensation does not take into account shape times (parameters 23.32
Shape time 1 and 23.33 Shape time 2). Positive shape times lengthen the distance
traveled.
Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction.
Speed compensation is supported in both vector and scalar motor control.
Settings
Parameters 21.30 Speed compensated stop mode (page 191), 21.31 Speed
compensated stop delay (page 191) and 21.32 Speed comp stop threshold (page
191).
Program features 111
Application control
 Control macros
Control macros are predefined parameter edits and I/O configurations. See chapter
Control macros (page 59).
 Process PID control
There is a built-in process PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to
control process such as pressure or flow in the pipe or fluid level in the container.
In process PID control, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive
instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought
back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep
the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (setpoint). This
means that user does not need to set a frequency/speed/torque reference to the drive
but the drive adjust its operation according to the process PID.
The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control. For more
detailed block diagrams, see pages 430 and 431.
Setpoint
Limitation
Filter
AI1
AI2
•••
Process
PID
Speed, torque or
frequency
reference chain
Process
actual
values
FBA
The drive contains two complete sets of process PID controller settings that can be
alternated whenever necessary; see parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection.
Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local
control vs. external control (page 86).
112 Program features
Quick configuration of the process PID controller
1. Activate the process PID controller: Menu - Primary settings - PID - PID
controls
2. Select a feedback source: Menu - Primary settings - PID - Feedback
3. Select a setpoint source: Menu - Primary settings - PID - Setpoint
4. Set the gain, integration time, derivation time: Menu - Primary settings - PID Tuning
5. Set the PID output limits: Menu - Primary settings - PID - PID output
6. Select the PID controller output as the source of, for example, 22.11 Ext1 speed
ref1: Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Reference from
Sleep and boost functions for process PID control
The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption
varies, such as clean water pumping systems. When used, it stops the pump
completely during low demand, instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient
operating range. The following example visualizes the operation of the function.
Example: The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption falls at
night. As a consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor speed.
However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal
pump at low speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep function detects
the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has
passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping
resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wakeup delay has passed.
The user can extend the PID sleep time by the boost functionality. The boost
functionality increases the process setpoint for a predetermined time before the drive
enters the sleep mode.
Program features 113
Setpoint
Sleep boost time (40.45)
Sleep boost step (40.46)
Time
Wake-up delay
(40.48)
Actual value
Non-inverted
(40.31 = Not inverted (Ref - Fbk))
Wake-up level
(Setpoint - Wake-up deviation [40.47])
Time
Actual value
Wake-up level
(Setpoint + Wake-up deviation [40.47])
Inverted (40.31 = Inverted (Fbk - Ref))
Time
Motor speed
tsd = Sleep delay (40.44)
t < tsd
Sleep mode
tsd
Sleep level
(40.43)
STOP
START
Time
Tracking
In tracking mode, the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter 40.50
(or 41.50) Set 1 tracking ref selection. The internal I term of the PID controller is set
so that no transient is allowed to pass on to the output, so when the tracking mode is
left, normal process control operation can be resumed without a significant bump.
114 Program features
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - PID
•
Parameter 96.04 Macro select (macro selection)
•
Parameter groups 40 Process PID set 1 (page 261) and 41 Process PID set 2
(page 272).
 Pump and fan control (PFC)
The Pump and fan control (PFC) is used in pump or fan systems consisting of one
drive and multiple pumps or fans. The drive controls the speed of one of the
pumps/fans and in addition connects (and disconnects) the other pumps/fans directly
to the supply network through contactors.
The PFC control logic switches auxiliary motors on and off as required by the
capacity changes of the process. In a pump application for example, the drive
controls the motor of the first pump, varying the motor speed to control the output of
the pump. This pump is the speed regulated pump. When the demand (represented
by the process PID reference) exceeds the capacity of the first pump (a user defined
speed/frequency limit), the PFC logic automatically starts an auxiliary pump. The
logic also reduces the speed of the first pump, controlled by the drive, to account for
the addition to the total system output by the auxiliary pump. Then, as before, the PID
controller adjusts the speed/frequency of the first pump in such a way that the system
output meets the process needs. If the demand continues to increase, the PFC logic
adds further auxiliary pumps, in a similar manner as just described.
As the demand drops, making the speed of the first pump fall below a minimum limit
(user defined as a speed/frequency limit), the PFC logic automatically stops an
auxiliary pump. The PFC logic also increases the speed of the drive controlled pump
to account for the missing output of the stopped auxiliary pump.
Autochange
Automatic rotation of the start order, or Autochange functionality, serves two main
purposes in many PFC type setups. One is to keep the run times of the pumps/fans
equal over time to even their wear. The other is to prevent any pump/fan from
standing still for too long, which would clog up the unit. In some cases it is desirable
to rotate the start order only when all units are stopped, for example to minimize the
impact on the process.
The Autochange can also be triggered by the Timed function (see page 118).
Interlock
There is an option to define interlock signals for each motor in the PFC system. When
the interlock signal of a motor is Available, the motor participates in the PFC starting
sequence. If the signal is Interlocked, the motor is excluded. This feature can be used
for informing the PFC logic that a motor is not available (for example due to
maintenance or manual direct-on-line starting).
Program features 115
Settings
•
Parameter 96.04 Macro select (macro selection)
•
Parameter group 10 Standard DI, RO (page 150)
•
Parameter group 40 Process PID set 1 (page 261)
•
Parameter groups 76 PFC configuration (page 299) and 77 PFC maintenance
and monitoring (page 305).
 Mechanical brake control
A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered. The brake control logic observes
the settings of parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control as well as several
external signals, and moves between the states presented in the diagram on page
116. The tables below the state diagram detail the states and transitions. The timing
diagram on page 117 shows an example of a close-open-close sequence.
Inputs of the brake control logic
The start command of the drive (bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1) is the main control
source of the brake control logic.
Outputs of the brake control logic
The mechanical brake is to be controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control
status. This bit should be selected as the source of a relay output (or a digital
input/output in output mode) which is then wired to the brake actuator through a relay.
See the wiring example on page 118.
The brake control logic, in various states, will request the drive control logic to hold
the motor or ramp down the speed. These requests are visible in parameter 44.01
Brake control status.
Settings
Parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control (page 275).
116 Program features
Brake state diagram
(from any state)
(from any state)
1
2
BRAKE DISABLED
BRAKE CLOSED
3
BRAKE OPENING
6
9
7
4
3
5
BRAKE CLOSING
BRAKE OPEN
BRAKE CLOSING
DELAY
6
BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
5
8
State descriptions
State name
BRAKE DISABLED
BRAKE OPENING:
BRAKE OPEN
BRAKE CLOSING:
BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
BRAKE CLOSED
Description
Brake control is disabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable = 0, and 44.01
Brake control status b4 = 0). The open signal is active (44.01 Brake control
status b0 = 1).
Brake has been requested to open. (44.01 Brake control status b2 = 1). Open
signal has been activated (44.01 Brake control status b0 is set). The load is
held in place by the speed control of the drive until 44.08 Brake open delay
elapses.
The brake is open (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). Hold request is removed
(44.01 Brake control status b2 = 0), and the drive is allowed to follow the
reference.
Brake has been requested to close. The drive logic is requested to ramp down
the speed to a stop (44.01 Brake control status b3 = 1). The open signal is kept
active (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this
state until the motor speed is below 44.14 Brake close level.
Closing conditions have been met. The open signal is deactivated (44.01 Brake
control status b0 → 0). The ramp-down request is maintained (44.01 Brake
control status b3 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this state until 44.13 Brake
close delay has elapsed.
At this point, the logic proceeds to BRAKE CLOSED state.
The brake is closed (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 0). The drive is not
necessarily modulating.
Program features 117
State change conditions ( n )
Brake control disabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable → 0).
06.11 Main status word, bit 2 = 0.
Brake has been requested to open.
44.08 Brake open delay has elapsed.
Brake has been requested to close.
Motor speed is below closing speed 44.14 Brake close level.
44.13 Brake close delay has elapsed.
Brake has been requested to open.
Brake control enabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable → 1).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Timing diagram
The simplified timing diagram below illustrates the operation of the brake control
function. Refer to the state diagram above.
Start command
(06.16 b5)
Modulating (06.16 b6)
tmd
Ready ref (06.11 b2)
Speed reference
n cs
Brake control signal
(44.01 b0)
tod
Hold stopped request
(44.01 b2)
Ramp to stopped
request (44.01 b3)
BRAKE
CLOSED
State
1
tmd
tod
ncs
tcd
BCW
BCD
2
BRAKE OPENING
BCW
BRAKE OPEN
BCD
BRAKE
CLOSED
BRAKE CLOSING
3
4
Motor magnetization delay
Brake open delay (parameter 44.08 Brake open delay)
Brake close speed (parameter 44.14 Brake close level)
Brake close delay (parameter 44.13 Brake close delay)
BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
5
6
7
8
118 Program features
Wiring example
The figure below shows a brake control wiring example. The brake control hardware
and wiring is to be sourced and installed by the customer.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake
control function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that
the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as
defined in IEC/EN 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the
European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus, the
personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific
frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be
implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.
The brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. In this
example, parameter 10.24 RO1 source is set to Brake command (ie. bit 0 of 44.01
Brake control status.
Brake control
hardware
115/230 VAC
Drive control unit
X8
20 RO1A
19 RO1C
21 RO1B
Emergency
brake
M
Motor
Mechanical brake
 Timed functions
TBA
Settings
Parameter group 34 Timed functions (page 240).
Program features 119
DC voltage control
 Overvoltage control
Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the motor is
in generating mode. The motor can generate when it decelerates or when the load
overhauls the motor shaft, causing the shaft to turn faster than the applied speed or
frequency. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit,
the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the
limit is reached. The overvoltage controller also increases any programmed
deceleration times if the limit is reached; to achieve shorter deceleration times, a
brake chopper and resistor may be required.
 Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue
operation after the break if the main contactor (if present) remained closed.
Note: Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit (e.g.
UPS) to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
Uinput power
fout UDC
TM
(N·m) (Hz) (Vdc)
160
80
520
120
60
390
80
40
260
40
20
130
UDC
fout
TM
1.6
5.8
8
11.2
15.4
t (s)
UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = Output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage
drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input
power is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but
the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
120 Program features
Implementing the undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)
Implement the undervoltage control function as follows:
•
Check that the undervoltage control function of the drive is enabled with
parameter 30.31 Undervoltage control.
•
Parameter 21.01 Vector start mode must be set to Automatic (in vector mode) or
parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode to Automatic (in scalar mode) to make flying
start (starting into a rotating motor) possible.
If the installation is equipped with a main contactor, prevent its tripping at the input
power break. For example, use a time delay relay (hold) in the contactor control
circuit.
WARNING! Make sure that the flying restart of the motor will not cause any
danger. If you are in doubt, do not implement the undervoltage control function.
Automatic restart
It is possible to restart the drive automatically after a short (max. 5 seconds) power
supply failure by using the Automatic restart function, provided that the drive is
allowed to run for 5 seconds without the cooling fans operating.
When enabled, the function takes the following actions upon a supply failure to
enable a successful restart:
•
The undervoltage fault is suppressed (but a warning is generated).
•
Modulation and cooling is stopped to conserve any remaining energy.
•
DC circuit pre-charging is enabled.
If the DC voltage is restored before the expiration of the period defined by parameter
21.18 Auto restart time and the start signal is still on, normal operation will continue.
However, if the DC voltage remains too low at that point, the drive trips on a fault,
3220 DC link undervoltage.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous
situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and
continues operation after a supply break.
 Voltage control and trip limits
The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative to the
supply voltage as well as drive/inverter type. The DC voltage (UDC) is approximately
1.35 times the line-to-line supply voltage, and is displayed by parameter 01.11 DC
voltage.
Program features 121
The following table shows the values of selected DC bus voltage levels in volts. All
voltages are relative to the supply voltage range selected in parameter 95.01 Supply
voltage.
Supply voltage range [V]
(see 95.01 Supply voltage)
Level
200…240
380…415
440…480
575…600
Overvoltage fault limit
421
842
842
1053
Overvoltage control limit
390
780
780
974
Internal brake chopper at 100% pulse width
390
780
780
974
Internal brake chopper at 0% pulse width
378
760
760
949
Overvoltage warning limit
373
745
745
932
DC voltage at upper bound of supply voltage range
(UDCmax)
324
560
648
810
DC voltage at lower bound of supply voltage range
(UDCmin)
230
513
594
709
Undervoltage warning limit
239
436
505
60
Undervoltage control limit
211
385
446
532
Charging activation/standby limit
183
334
386
461
Undervoltage fault limit
126
231
267
319
Settings
Parameters 01.11 DC voltage (page 139), 30.30 Overvoltage control (page 228),
30.31 Undervoltage control (page 228), 95.01 Supply voltage (page 305) and 95.02
Adaptive voltage limits (page 306).
 Brake chopper
A brake chopper can be used to handle the energy generated by a decelerating
motor. When the DC voltage rises high enough, the chopper connects the DC circuit
to an external brake resistor. The chopper operates on the pulse width modulation
principle.
The internal brake choppers in the drive (in frames R0…R3) start conducting when
the DC link voltage reaches approximately 1.15 × UDCmax. 100% maximum pulse
width is reached at approximately 1.2 × UDCmax. (UDCmax is the DC voltage
corresponding to the maximum of the AC supply voltage range.) For information on
external brake choppers, refer to their documentation.
Note: Overvoltage control needs to be disabled for the chopper to operate.
Settings
Parameter 01.11 DC voltage (page 139); parameter group 43 Brake chopper (page
273).
122 Program features
Safety and protections
 Fixed/Standard protections
Overcurrent
If the output current exceeds the internal overcurrent limit, the IGBTs are shut down
immediately to protect the drive.
DC overvoltage
See section Overvoltage control on page 119.
DC undervoltage
See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 119.
Drive temperature
If the temperature rises high enough, the drive first starts to limit the switching
frequency and then the current to protect itself. If it is still keeps heating up, for
example because of a fan failure, an overtemperature fault is generated.
Short circuit
In case of a short circuit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive.
 Emergency stop
The emergency stop signal is connected to the input selected by parameter 21.05
Emergency stop source. An emergency stop can also be generated through fieldbus
(parameter 06.01 Main control word, bits 0…2).
The mode of the emergency stop is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop
mode. The following modes are available:
•
•
•
•
Off1: Stop along the standard deceleration ramp defined for the particular
reference type in use
Off2: Stop by coasting
Off3: Stop by the emergency stop ramp defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency
stop time.
Stop torque.
With Off1 or Off3 emergency stop modes, the ramp-down of the motor speed can be
supervised by parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency
ramp supervision delay.
Notes:
•
The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the emergency stop
devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop function to fulfill
Program features 123
the required emergency stop categories. For more information, contact your local
ABB representative.
•
After an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function cannot
be canceled even though the signal is canceled.
•
If the minimum (or maximum) torque limit is set to 0%, the emergency stop
function may not be able to stop the drive.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Run permissions
•
Parameters 21.04 Emergency stop mode (page 185), 21.05 Emergency stop
source (page 185), 23.23 Emergency stop time (page 201), 31.32 Emergency
ramp supervision (page 233) and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay (page
234).
 Motor thermal protection
The control program features two separate motor temperature monitoring functions.
The temperature data sources and warning/trip limits can be set up independently for
each function.
The motor temperature can be monitored using
•
the motor thermal protection model (estimated temperature derived internally
inside the drive), or
•
sensors installed in the windings. This will result in a more accurate motor model.
Motor thermal protection model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1. When power is applied to the drive for the first time, the motor is assumed to be at
ambient temperature (defined by parameter 35.50 Motor ambient temperature).
After this, when power is applied to the drive, the motor is assumed to be at the
estimated temperature.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using the user-adjustable motor thermal time and
motor load curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient
temperature exceeds 30 °C.
Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to
the inverter.
Temperature monitoring using PTC sensors
PTC sensors are connected through a CMOD-02 multifunction module (see chapter
Optional I/O extension modules, section CMOD-02 multifunction extension module
124 Program features
(external 24 V AC/DC and isolated PTC interface) in the Hardware manual of the
drive).
1)
60
PTC IN
61
PTC IN
CMOD-02
1)
One or 3…6 PTC thermistors connected in series.
The resistance of the PTC sensor increases when its temperature rises. The
increasing resistance of the sensor decreases the voltage at the input, and eventually
its state switches from 1 to 0, indicating overtemperature.
The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of
temperature.
Ohm
4000
1330
550
100
T
Temperature monitoring using Pt100 sensors
1…3 Pt100 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog
output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the
drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
Program features 125
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, section AI1 and AI2 as
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware
manual of the drive.
Temperature monitoring using Pt1000 sensors
1…3 Pt1000 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog
output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 0.1 mA through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100,
Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Temperature monitoring using Ni1000 sensors
One Ni1000 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the
control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100,
Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Temperature monitoring using KTY84 sensors
One KTY84 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the
control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 2.0 mA through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
The figure and table on page 126 show typical KTY84 sensor resistance values as a
function of the motor operating temperature.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100,
Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
126 Program features
Temperature monitoring using KTY83 sensors
One KTY83 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the
control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 1.0 mA through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
The figure and table below show typical KTY83 sensor resistance values as a
function of the motor operating temperature.
Ohm
3000
°C
90
110
130
150
Scaling
KTY84
KTY83
ohm
ohm
936
1569
1063
1774
1197
1993
1340
2225
KTY83
KTY84
2000
1000
T oC
0
-100
0
100
200
300
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the
drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100,
Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Thermal protection estimated,
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Thermal protection measured
•
Parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection (page 247).
Program features 127
 Programmable protection functions
External events (parameters 31.01…31.10)
Five different event signals from the process can be connected to selectable inputs to
generate trips and warnings for the driven equipment. When the signal is lost, an
external event (fault, warning, or a mere log entry) is generated. The contents of the
messages can be edited on the control panel by selecting Menu - Primary settings Advanced functions - External events.
Motor phase loss detection (parameter 31.19)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected.
Earth (Ground) fault detection (parameter 31.20)
Note that
•
•
•
•
•
an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection
in a grounded supply, the protection activates within 2 milliseconds
in an ungrounded supply, the supply capacitance must be 1 microfarad or more
the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 meters will not
activate the protection
the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.
Supply phase loss detection (parameter 31.21)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is
detected.
Safe torque off detection (parameter 31.22)
The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input, and this parameter selects
which indications are given when the signals are lost. (The parameter does not affect
the operation of the Safe torque off function itself). For more information on the Safe
torque off function, see chapter Planning the electrical installation, section
Implementing the Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Swapped supply and motor cabling (parameter 31.23)
The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been swapped
(for example, if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive). The
parameter selects if a fault is generated or not.
Stall protection (parameters 31.24…31.28)
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (current, frequency and time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall
condition.
128 Program features
Overspeed protection (parameter 31.30)
The user can set overspeed limits by specifying a margin that is added to the
currently-used maximum and minimum speed limits.
Local control loss detection (parameter 49.05)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool
communication break.
AI supervision (parameters 12.03…12.04)
The parameters select how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of
the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input. This can be due to broken
I/O wiring or sensor.
 Automatic fault resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage
and external faults. The user can also specify a fault that is automatically reset.
By default, automatic resets are off and must be specifically activated by the user.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - Autoreset faults
•
Parameters 31.12…31.16 (page 230).
Program features 129
Diagnostics
 Signal supervision
Six signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever a supervised
signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits, a bit in 32.01 Supervision status is
activated, and a warning or fault generated.
The supervised signal is low-pass filtered.
Settings
Parameter group 32 Supervision (page 234).
 Energy saving calculators
This feature consists of the following functionalities:
•
An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total system
efficiency is maximized
•
A counter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in
kWh, currency or volume of CO2 emissions, and
•
A load analyzer showing the load profile of the drive (see separate section on
page 129).
In addition, there are counters that show energy consumption in kWh of the current
and previous hour as well as the current and previous day.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the
accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.19 Comparison power.
Settings
•
Menu - Energy efficiency
•
Parameter group 45 Energy efficiency (page 276).
•
Parameters 01.50 Current hour kWh, 01.51 Previous hour kWh, 01.52 Current
day kWh and 01.53 Previous day kWh on page 140.
 Load analyzer
Peak value logger
The user can select a signal to be monitored by a peak value logger. The logger
records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as well as
motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak. The peak value is
sampled at 2 ms intervals.
Amplitude loggers
The control program has two amplitude loggers.
130 Program features
For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms
intervals, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are
sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their amplitude. Each parameter
represents an amplitude range 10 age points wide, and displays the age of the
collected samples that have fallen within that range.
>90%
80…90%
70…80%
60…70%
50…60%
40…50%
30…40%
20…30%
10…20%
0…10%
age of samples
You can view this graphically with the assistant panel or the Drive composer PC tool.
Amplitude ranges
(parameters 36.40…36.49)
Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With
amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive
(Imax). The measured current is logged continuously. The distribution of samples is
shown by parameters 36.20…36.29.
Settings
•
Menu - Diagnostics - Load profile
•
Parameter group 36 Load analyzer (page 255).
Program features 131
 Diagnostics menu
The Diagnostics menu provides quick information about active faults, warnings and
inhibits in the drive and how to fix and reset them. It also helps you to find out why the
drive is not starting, stopping or running at the desired speed.
•
Start/stop/reference summary: Use this view to find out where the control
comes from if the drive is not starting or stopping as expected, or runs at an
undesired speed.
•
Limit status: Use this view to find out whether any limitations are active if the
drive is running at undesired speed.
•
Active faults: Use this view to see currently active faults and how to fix and reset
them.
•
Active warnings: Use this view to see currently active warnings and how to fix
them.
•
Active inhibits: Use this view to see the active inhibits and how to fix them. In
addition, in the Clock, region, display menu you can disable (enabled by default)
and enable pop-up views showing information on inhibits when you try to start the
drive but it is prevented.
Settings
•
Menu - Diagnostics
•
Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display - Show inhibit pop-up
132 Program features
Miscellaneous
 Backup and restore
You can make backups of the settings manually to the assistant panel. The assistant
panel also keeps one automatic backup. You can restore a backup to another drive,
or a new drive replacing a faulty one. You can make backups and restore on the
panel or with the Drive composer PC tool.
Backup
Manual backup
Make a backup when necessary, for example, after you have started up the drive or
when you want to copy the settings to another drive.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced
parameter saving with parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually.
Automatic backup
The assistant panel has a dedicated space for one automatic backup. An automatic
backup is created two hours after the last parameter change. After completing the
backup, the panel waits for 24 hours before checking if there are additional parameter
changes. If there are, it creates a new backup overwriting the previous one when two
hours have passed after the latest change.
You cannot adjust the delay time or disable the automatic backup function.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced
parameter saving with parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually.
Restore
The backups are shown on the panel. Automatic backups are marked with icon
and manual backups with . To restore a backup, select it and press
. In the
following display you can view backup contents and restore all parameters or select a
subset to be restored.
Note: To restore a backup, the drive has to be in Local control.
Program features 133
Settings
•
Menu - Backups
•
Parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually (page 309).
 User parameter sets
The drive supports four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent
memory and recalled using drive parameters. It is also possible to use digital inputs to
switch between user parameter sets. To change a user parameter set, the drive has
to be stopped.
A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 10…99 except
•
•
•
I/O extension module settings (group 15)
data storage parameters (group 47)
fieldbus communication settings (groups 50…53 and 58).
As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets, make sure the settings
correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set. In an
application where different motors are used with the drive, the motor ID run needs to
be performed with each motor and the results saved to different user sets. The
appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched.
Settings
•
Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - User sets
•
Parameters 96.10…96.13 (page 310).
 Data storage parameters
Twelve (eight 32-bit, four 16-bit) parameters are reserved for data storage. These
parameters are unconnected by default and can be used for linking, testing and
commissioning purposes. They can be written to and read from using other
parameters’ source or target selections.
Settings
Parameter group 47 Data storage (page 282).
134 Program features
Parameters 135
7
Parameters
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes the parameters, including actual signals, of the control
program. At the end of the chapter, on page 322, there is a separate list of the
parameters whose default values are different between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply
frequency settings.
136 Parameters
Terms and abbreviations
Term
Definition
Actual signal
Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by
the drive, or contains status information. Most actual signals are readonly, but some (especially counter-type actual signals) can be reset.
Def
(In the following table, shown on the same row as the parameter name)
The default value of a parameter when used in the Factory macro. For
information on other macro-specific parameter values, see chapter
Control macros (page 59).
FbEq16
(In the following table, shown on the same row as the parameter range,
or for each selection)
16-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the
panel and the integer used in communication when a 16-bit value is
selected for transmission to an external system.
A dash (-) indicates that the parameter is not accessible in 16-bit format.
The corresponding 32-bit scalings are listed in chapter Additional
parameter data (page 325).
Other
The value is taken from another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can specify
the source parameter.
Other [bit]
The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can specify
the source parameter and bit.
Parameter
Either a user-adjustable operating instruction for the drive, or an actual
signal.
p.u.
Per unit
[parameter number]
Value of the parameter
Parameters 137
Summary of parameter groups
Group
Contents
01 Actual values
Basic signals for monitoring the drive.
Page
139
03 Input references
Values of references received from various sources.
141
04 Warnings and faults
Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
142
05 Diagnostics
Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to drive
maintenance.
143
06 Control and status words
Drive control and status words.
144
07 System info
Drive hardware and firmware information.
150
10 Standard DI, RO
Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
150
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
Configuration of the frequency input.
154
12 Standard AI
Configuration of standard analog inputs.
156
13 Standard AO
Configuration of standard analog outputs.
160
15 I/O extension module
Configuration of the I/O extension module installed in slot 2.
166
19 Operation mode
Selection of local and external control location sources and
operating modes.
173
20 Start/stop/direction
Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source
selection.
174
21 Start/stop mode
Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal source
selection; DC magnetization settings.
184
22 Speed reference selection
Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings.
192
23 Speed reference ramp
Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the acceleration
and deceleration rates for the drive).
200
24 Speed reference
conditioning
Speed error calculation; speed error window control configuration;
speed error step.
204
25 Speed control
Speed controller settings.
204
26 Torque reference chain
Settings for the torque reference chain.
209
28 Frequency reference chain Settings for the frequency reference chain.
213
30 Limits
Drive operation limits.
223
31 Fault functions
Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the drive
upon fault situations.
228
32 Supervision
Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…6.
234
34 Timed functions
Configuration of the timed functions.
240
35 Motor thermal protection
Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature
measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor fan
control configuration.
247
36 Load analyzer
Peak value and amplitude logger settings.
255
37 User load curve
Settings for user load curve.
258
40 Process PID set 1
Parameter values for process PID control.
261
41 Process PID set 2
A second set of parameter values for process PID control.
272
43 Brake chopper
Settings for the internal brake chopper.
273
44 Mechanical brake control
Configuration of mechanical brake control.
275
45 Energy efficiency
Settings for the energy saving calculators.
276
138 Parameters
Group
Contents
46 Monitoring/scaling settings
Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling
settings.
Page
279
47 Data storage
Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from
using other parameters’ source and target settings.
282
49 Panel port communication
Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
283
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA)
Fieldbus communication configuration.
284
51 FBA A settings
Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
288
52 FBA A data in
Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus controller
through fieldbus adapter A.
290
53 FBA A data out
Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive
through fieldbus adapter A.
290
58 Embedded fieldbus
Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface.
291
71 External PID1
Configuration of external PID.
297
76 PFC configuration
PFC (Pump and fan control) and Autochange configuration
parameters. See also section Pump and fan control (PFC) on
page 114.
299
77 PFC maintenance and
monitoring
PFC (Pump and fan control) and Autochange configuration
parameters. See also section Pump and fan control (PFC) on
page 114.
305
95 HW configuration
Various hardware-related settings.
305
96 System
Language selection; access levels; macro selection; parameter
save and restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit
selection.
307
97 Motor control
Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking; anticogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
312
98 User motor parameters
Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor
model.
315
99 Motor data
Motor configuration settings.
316
Parameters 139
Parameter listing
No.
Name/Value
01
Description
Def/FbEq16
01 Actual values
Basic signals for monitoring the drive.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise
noted.
Note: Values of these actual signals are filtered with the filter
time defined in group 46 Monitoring/scaling settings. The
selection lists for parameters in other groups mean the raw
value of the actual signal instead. For example, if a selection
is “Output frequency” it does not point to the value of
parameter 01.06 Output frequency but to the raw value.
01.01
Motor speed used
Estimated motor speed. A filter time constant for this signal
can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Estimated motor speed.
See par.
46.01
Motor speed
estimated
Estimated motor speed in rpm. A filter time constant for this
signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor
speed.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Estimated motor speed.
See par.
46.01
Motor speed %
Motor speed in percent of the synchronous motor speed.
-
-1000.00…
1000.00%
Motor speed.
See par.
46.01
Output frequency
Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. A filter time constant
for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.12 Filter time
output frequency.
-
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Estimated output frequency.
See par.
46.02
01.02
01.03
01.06
01.07
Motor current
Measured (absolute) motor current in A.
-
0.00…30000.00 A
Motor current.
1=1A
01.08
Motor current % of
motor nom
Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the nominal
motor current.
-
0.0…1000.0%
Motor current.
1 = 1%
01.09
Motor current % of
drive nom
Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the nominal
drive current.
-
0.0…1000.0%
Motor current.
1 = 1%
01.10
Motor torque
Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See also
parameter 01.30 Nominal torque scale.
A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by
parameter 46.13 Filter time motor torque.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Motor torque.
See par.
46.03
01.11
01.13
DC voltage
Measured DC link voltage.
-
0.00…2000.00 V
DC link voltage.
10 = 1 V
Output voltage
Calculated motor voltage in V AC.
-
0…2000 V
Motor voltage.
1=1V
140 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
01.14
Output power
Drive output power. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16
Unit selection. A filter time constant for this signal can be
defined by parameter 46.14 Filter time power.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00 kW or hp
Output power.
1 = 1 unit
01.15
Output power % of
motor nom
Output power in percent of the nominal motor power.
-
-300.00… 300.00%
Output power.
1 = 1%
01.16
Output power % of
drive nom
Output power in percent of the nominal drive power.
-
-300.00… 300.00%
Output power.
1 = 1%
01.17
Motor shaft power
Estimated mechanical power at motor shaft.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00 kW or hp
Motor shaft power.
1 = 1 unit
01.18
Inverter GWh
counter
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either
direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value is zero.
-
0…65535 GWh
Energy in GWh.
1 = 1 GWh
01.19
Inverter MWh
counter
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either
direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls
over, 01.18 Inverter GWh counter is incremented. The
minimum value is zero.
-
0…1000 MWh
Energy in MWh.
1 = 1 MWh
01.20
Inverter kWh
counter
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either
direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls
over, 01.19 Inverter MWh counter is incremented. The
minimum value is zero.
-
0…1000 kWh
Energy in kWh.
10 = 1 kWh
Flux actual %
Used flux reference in percent of nominal flux of motor.
-
0…200%
Flux reference.
1 = 1%
Nominal torque
scale
Torque that corresponds to 100% of nominal motor torque.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: This value is copied from parameter 99.12 Motor
nominal torque if entered. Otherwise the value is calculated
from other motor data.
-
0.000…4000000
N·m or lb·ft
Nominal torque.
1 = 100 unit
Current hour kWh
Current hour energy consumption. This is the energy of the
last 60 minutes (not necessarily continuous) the drive has
been running, not the energy of a calendar hour. The value is
set to the value before the power cycle when the drive is
again up and running.
-
0.00… 1000000.00
kWh
Energy.
1 = 1 kWh
Previous hour kWh
Previous hour energy consumption. The value 01.50 Current
hour kWh is stored here when its values has been cumulated
for 60 minutes. The value is set to the value before the power
cycle when the drive is again up and running.
-
0.00… 1000000.00
kWh
Energy.
1 = 1 kWh
01.24
01.30
01.50
01.51
Parameters 141
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
01.52
Current day kWh
Current day energy consumption. This is the energy of the
last 24 hours (not necessarily continuous) the drive has been
running, not the energy of a calendar day. The value is set to
the value before the power cycle when the drive is again up
and running.
-
0.00… 1000000.00
kWh
Energy.
1 = 1 kWh
Previous day kWh
Previous day energy consumption. The value 01.52 Current
day kWh is stored here when its value has been cumulated
for 24 hours. The value is set to the value before the power
cycle when the drive is again up and running.
-
0.00… 1000000.00
kWh
Energy.
1 = 1 kWh
Abs motor speed
used
Absolute value of parameter 01.01 Motor speed used.
-
01.53
01.61
0.00… 30000.00
rpm
01.62
Abs motor speed %
1 = 1 rpm
Absolute value of parameter 01.03 Motor speed %.
0.00… 1000.00%
01.63
Abs output
frequency
01.64
Abs motor torque
Absolute value of parameter 01.06 Output frequency.
0.00…500.00 Hz
Abs output power
Abs output power %
mot nom
Absolute value of parameter 01.14 Output power.
Abs output power %
drive nom
Absolute value of parameter 01.15 Output power % of motor
nom.
Abs motor shaft
power
1 = 1%
Absolute value of parameter 01.17 Motor shaft power.
0.00… 30000.00
kW or hp
03
1 = 1%
Absolute value of parameter 01.16 Output power % of drive
nom.
0.00… 300.00%
01.68
1 = 1 kW
0.00… 300.00%
01.67
1 = 1%
0.00… 32767.00
kW or hp
01.66
1 = 1 Hz
Absolute value of parameter 01.10 Motor torque.
0.0…1600.0%
01.65
1 = 1%
1 = 1 kW
03 Input references
Values of references received from various sources.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise
noted.
03.01
Panel reference
Reference 1 given from the control panel or PC tool.
-
-100000.00…
100000.00 rpm, Hz
or %
Control panel or PC tool reference.
1 = 10 unit
142 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
03.02
Panel reference
remote
Reference 2 given from the control panel or PC tool.
-
-100000.00…
100000.00 rpm, Hz
or %
Control panel or PC tool reference.
1 = 10 unit
FB A reference 1
Reference 1 received through fieldbus adapter A.
See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
(page 405).
-
-100000.00…
100000.00
Reference 1 from fieldbus adapter A.
1 = 10
FB A reference 2
Reference 2 received through fieldbus adapter A.
-
-100000.00…
100000.00
Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter A.
1 = 10
EFB reference 1
Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
1 = 10
-30000.00…
30000.00
Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
1 = 10
EFB reference 2
Scaled reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
1 = 10
-30000.00…
30000.00
Scaled reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
1 = 10
03.05
03.06
03.09
03.10
04
04 Warnings and faults
Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
For explanations of individual warning and fault codes, see
chapter Fault tracing.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise
noted.
04.01
Code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the current
trip).
-
0000h…FFFFh
1st active fault.
1=1
Active fault 2
Code of the 2nd active fault.
-
0000h…FFFFh
2nd active fault.
1=1
04.02
04.03
04.06
04.07
04.08
04.11
04.12
04.13
Tripping fault
Active fault 3
Code of the 3rd active fault.
-
0000h…FFFFh
3rd active fault.
1=1
Active warning 1
Code of the 1st active warning.
-
0000h…FFFFh
1st active warning.
1=1
Active warning 2
Code of the 2nd active warning.
-
0000h…FFFFh
2nd active warning.
1=1
Active warning 3
Code of the 3rd active warning.
-
0000h…FFFFh
3rd active warning.
1=1
Latest fault
Code of the 1st stored (non-active) fault.
-
0000h…FFFFh
1st stored fault.
1=1
2nd latest fault
Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) fault.
-
0000h…FFFFh
2nd stored fault.
1=1
3rd latest fault
Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) fault.
-
0000h…FFFFh
3rd stored fault.
1=1
Parameters 143
No.
Name/Value
Description
04.16
Latest warning
Code of the 1st stored (non-active) warning.
-
0000h…FFFFh
1st stored warning.
1=1
04.17
04.18
Def/FbEq16
2nd latest warning
Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) warning.
-
0000h…FFFFh
2nd stored warning.
1=1
3rd latest warning
Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) warning.
-
0000h…FFFFh
3rd stored warning.
1=1
05
05 Diagnostics
Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to
drive maintenance.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise
noted.
05.01
On-time counter
On-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is
powered.
0…65535 d
On-time counter.
1=1d
05.02
Run-time counter
Motor run-time counter. The counter runs when the inverter
modulates.
-
0…65535 d
Motor run-time counter.
1=1d
05.04
Fan on-time
counter
Running time of the drive cooling fan. Can be reset from the
control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
-
0…65535 d
Cooling fan run-time counter.
1=1d
05.10
Control board
temperature
Measured temperature of the control board
-
-100… 300 °C or °F Control board temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
1 = unit
05.11
Inverter
temperature
Estimated drive temperature in percent of fault limit. The fault
limit varies according to the type of the drive.
0.0% = 0 °C (32 °F)
100.0% = Fault limit
-
-40.0…160.0%
Drive temperature in percent.
1 = 1%
05.22
Diagnostic word 3
Diagnostic word 3. For possible causes and remedies, see
chapter Fault tracing.
-
Bit
0…8
9
10
11
12…15
Name
Reserved
kWh pulse
Reserved
Fan command
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
-
Value
1 = kWh pulse is active.
1 = Drive fan is rotating above idle speed.
Diagnostic word 3.
1=1
144 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
06
Description
06 Control and status
words
Drive control and status words.
06.01
The main control word of the drive. This parameter shows the
control signals as received from the selected sources (such
as digital inputs, the fieldbus interfaces and the application
program).
For the bit descriptions see page 411. The related status word
and state diagram are presented on pages 413 and 414
respectively.
This parameter is read-only.
Main control word
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000h…FFFFh
Def/FbEq16
-
Name
Off1 control
Off2 control
Off3 control
Run
Ramp out zero
Ramp hold
Ramp in zero
Reset
Inching 1
Inching 2
Remote cmd
Ext ctrl loc
User bit 0
User bit 1
User bit 2
User bit 3
Main control word.
1=1
Parameters 145
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
06.11
Main status word
Main status word of the drive.
For the bit descriptions see page 413. The related control
word and state diagram are presented on pages 411 and 414
respectively.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000h…FFFFh
Name
Ready to switch ON
Ready run
Ready ref
Tripped
Off 2 inactive
Off 3 inactive
Switch-on inhibited
Warning
At setpoint
Remote
Above limit
User bit 0
User bit 1
User bit 2
User bit 3
Reserved
Main status word.
1=1
146 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
06.16
Drive status word 1
Drive status word 1.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
Name
Enabled
1
Inhibited
2
3
4
DC charged
Ready to start
Following
reference
Started
Modulating
Limiting
Local control
Network control
Ext1 active
Ext2 active
Reserved
Start request
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
1 = Both run enable (see par. 20.12) and start enable (20.19) signals
are present. Note: This bit is not affected by the presence of a fault.
1 = Start inhibited. To start the drive, the inhibiting signal (see par.
06.18) must be removed and the start signal cycled.
1 = DC circuit has been charged
1 = Drive is ready to receive a start command
1 = Drive is ready to follow given reference
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
= Drive has been started
= Drive is modulating (output stage is being controlled)
= Any operating limit (speed, torque, etc.) is active
= Drive is in local control
= Drive is in network control (see page 11).
= Control location EXT1 active
= Control location EXT2 active
1 = Start requested. 0 = When parameter 20.22 Enable to rotate is 0
(rotating of the motor is disabled).
14…15 Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Drive status word 1.
1=1
Parameters 147
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
06.17
Drive status word 2
Drive status word 2.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Identification run done
Magnetized
Torque control
Speed control
Reserved
Safe reference active
Description
1 = Motor identification (ID) run has been performed
1 = The motor has been magnetized
1 = Torque control mode active
1 = Speed control mode active
1 = A “safe” reference is applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05 and 50.02
6
Last speed active
1 = A “last speed” reference is applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05 and 50.02
7
Loss of reference
1 = Reference signal lost
8
Emergency stop failed 1 = Emergency stop failed (see parameters 31.32 and 31.33)
9
Jogging active
1 = Jogging enable signal is on
10
Above limit
1 = Actual speed, frequency or torque equals or exceeds limit
(defined by parameters 46.31…46.33). Valid in both directions of
rotation.
11…12 Reserved
13
Start delay active
1 = Start delay (par. 21.22) active.
14…15 Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Drive status word 2.
1=1
148 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
06.18
Start inhibit status
word
Start inhibit status word. This word specifies the source of the
inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from starting.
The conditions marked with an asterisk (*) only require that
the start command is cycled. In all other instances, the
inhibiting condition must be removed first.
See also parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
Name
Not ready run
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ctrl location changed
SSW inhibit
Fault reset
Lost start enable
Lost run enable
Reserved
STO
Current calibration
ended
ID run ended
Reserved
Em Off1
Em Off2
Em Off3
Auto reset inhibit
Jogging active
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
06.19
Description
1 = DC voltage is missing or drive has not been parametrized
correctly. Check the parameters in groups 95 and 99.
* 1 = Control location has changed
1 = Control program is keeping itself in inhibited state
* 1 = A fault has been reset
1 = Start enable signal missing
1 = Run enable signal missing
1 = Safe torque off function active
* 1 = Current calibration routine has finished
* 1 = Motor identification run has finished
1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off1)
1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off2)
1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off3)
1 = The autoreset function is inhibiting operation
1 = The jogging enable signal is inhibiting operation
0000h…FFFFh
Start inhibit status word.
1=1
Speed control
status word
Speed control status word.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
Name
Zero speed
1
Forward
Description
1 = Drive is running at zero speed
1 = Drive is running in forward direction above zero speed limit
(par. 21.06)
1 = Drive is running in reverse direction above zero speed limit
(par. 21.06)
2
Reverse
3…6
Reserved
Any constant speed
request
Reserved
7
8…15
0000h…FFFFh
1 = A constant speed or frequency has been selected; see par.
06.20.
Speed control status word.
1=1
Parameters 149
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
06.20
Constant speed
status word
Constant speed/frequency status word. Indicates which
constant speed or frequency is active (if any). See also
parameter 06.19 Speed control status word, bit 7, and section
Constant speeds/frequencies (page 97).
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7…15
06.21
Constant speed/frequency status word.
1=1
Drive status word 3.
This parameter is read-only.
-
3…15
06.32
or frequency 1 selected
or frequency 2 selected
or frequency 3 selected
or frequency 4 selected
or frequency 5 selected
or frequency 6 selected
or frequency 7 selected
0000h…FFFFh
2
06.31
Description
1 = Constant speed
1 = Constant speed
1 = Constant speed
1 = Constant speed
1 = Constant speed
1 = Constant speed
1 = Constant speed
Drive status word 3
Bit
0
1
06.30
Name
Constant speed 1
Constant speed 2
Constant speed 3
Constant speed 4
Constant speed 5
Constant speed 6
Constant speed 7
Reserved
Name
DC hold active
Post-magnetizing
active
Motor pre-heating
active
Reserved
Description
1 = DC hold is active
1 = Post-magnetizing is active
1 = Motor pre-heating is active
0000h…FFFFh
Drive status word 1.
1=1
MSW bit 11
selection
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 11
(User bit 0) of 06.11 Main status word.
Ext ctrl loc
False
0.
0
True
1.
1
Ext ctrl loc
Bit 11 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 145).
2
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
MSW bit 12
selection
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 12
(User bit 1) of 06.11 Main status word.
Ext run
enable
False
0.
0
True
1.
1
Ext run enable
Status of the external run enable signal (see parameter 20.12
Run enable 1 source).
2
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
MSW bit 13
selection
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 13
(User bit 2) of 06.11 Main status word.
False
False
0.
0
True
1.
1
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
150 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
06.33
MSW bit 14
selection
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 14
(User bit 3) of 06.11 Main status word.
False
False
0.
0
True
1.
1
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
07
07 System info
Drive hardware and firmware information.
All parameters in this group are read-only.
07.03
Drive rating id
Type of the drive/inverter unit.
-
07.04
Firmware name
Firmware identification.
-
07.05
Firmware version
Version number of the firmware.
-
07.06
Loading package
name
Name of the firmware loading package.
-
07.07
Loading package
version
Version number of the firmware loading package.
-
07.11
Cpu usage
Microprocessor load in percent.
-
0…100%
Microprocessor load.
1 = 1%
10
10 Standard DI, RO
Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
10.02
DI delayed status
Displays the status of digital inputs DI1…DI6. Bits 0…5 reflect
the delayed status of DI1…DI6.
This word is updated only after a 2 ms activation/deactivation
delay. When the value of a digital input changes, it must
remain the same in two consecutive samples, that is for 2 ms,
for the new value to be accepted.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0000h…FFFFh
Delayed status of digital inputs.
1=1
10.03
DI force selection
The electrical statuses of the digital inputs can be overridden
for eg. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 10.04 DI forced
data is provided for each digital input, and its value is applied
whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 10.03 and 10.04).
0000h
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6…15
Value
1 = Force DI1 to
1 = Force DI2 to
1 = Force DI3 to
1 = Force DI4 to
1 = Force DI5 to
1 = Force DI6 to
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
bit 0
bit 1
bit 2
bit 3
bit 4
bit 5
of parameter 10.04
of parameter 10.04
of parameter 10.04
of parameter 10.04
of parameter 10.04
of parameter 10.04
Override selection for digital inputs.
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
forced
forced
forced
forced
forced
forced
data.
data.
data.
data.
data.
data.
1=1
Parameters 151
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
10.04
DI forced data
Allows the data value of a forced digital input to be changed
from 0 to 1. It is only possible to force an input that has been
selected in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
Bit 0 is the forced value for DI1; bit 5 is the forced value for
the DI6.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh
Forced values of digital inputs.
1=1
10.21
RO status
Status of relay outputs RO3…RO1. Example: 00000001b =
RO1 is energized, RO2…RO3 are de-energized.
-
0000h…FFFFh
Status of relay outputs.
1=1
10.22
RO force selection
The signals connected to the relay outputs can be overridden
for eg. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 10.23 RO forced
data is provided for each relay output, and its value is applied
whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 10.22 and 10.23).
Bit
0
1
2
3…7
Value
1 = Force RO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data.
1 = Force RO2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data.
1 = Force RO3 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data.
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Override selection for relay outputs.
10.23
RO forced data
Contains the values of relay outputs that are used instead of
the connected signals if selected in parameter 10.22 RO
force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for RO1.
1=1
0000h…FFFFh
Forced RO values.
1=1
10.24
RO1 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1.
Ready run
Not energized
Output is not energized.
0
Energized
Output is energized.
1
Ready run
Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
2
Enabled
Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
4
Started
Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
5
Magnetized
Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
6
Running
Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
7
Ready ref
Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
8
At setpoint
Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
9
Reverse
Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 148).
10
Zero speed
Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 148).
11
Above limit
Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
12
Warning
Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
13
Fault
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
14
Fault (-1)
Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
15
Fault/Warning
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status
word (see page 145).
16
Overcurrent
Fault 2310 Overcurrent has occurred.
17
152 Parameters
No.
10.25
Name/Value
Description
Overvoltage
Fault 3210 DC link overvoltage has occurred.
Def/FbEq16
18
Drive temp
Fault 2381 IGBT overload or 4110 Control board temperature
or 4210 IGBT overtemperature or 4290 Cooling or 42F1 IGBT
temperature or 4310 Excess temperature or 4380 Excess
temperature difference has occurred.
19
Undervoltage
Fault 3220 DC link undervoltage has occurred.
20
Motor temp
Fault 4981 External temperature 1 or 4982 External
temperature 2 has occurred.
21
Brake command
Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status (see page 275).
22
Ext2 active
Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
23
Remote control
Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
24
MCB
Reserved
25
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
27
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
28
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
29
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
33
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
34
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
35
Start delay
Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
39
RO/DIO control
word bit0
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 154).
40
RO/DIO control
word bit1
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 154).
41
RO/DIO control
word bit2
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 154).
42
PFC1
Bit 0 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
43
PFC2
Bit 1 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
44
PFC3
Bit 2 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
45
PFC4
Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
46
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
RO1 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1.
0.0 s
1
Status of selected
source
0
1
RO status
0
Time
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.25 RO1 ON delay
tOff = 10.26 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO1.
10 = 1 s
Parameters 153
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
10.26
RO1 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1. See
parameter 10.25 RO1 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO1.
10 = 1 s
10.27
RO2 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2.
For the available selections, see parameter 10.24 RO1
source.
Running
10.28
RO2 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 s
1
Status of selected
source
0
1
RO status
0
Time
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.28 RO2 ON delay
tOff = 10.29 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO2.
10 = 1 s
10.29
RO2 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO2. See
parameter 10.28 RO2 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO2.
10 = 1 s
10.30
RO3 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO3.
For the available selections, see parameter 10.24 RO1
source.
Fault (-1)
10.31
RO3 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO3.
0.0 s
1
Status of selected
source
0
1
RO status
0
Time
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.31 RO3 ON delay
tOff = 10.32 RO3 OFF delay
10.32
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO3.
10 = 1 s
RO3 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO3. See
parameter 10.31 RO3 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO3.
10 = 1 s
154 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
10.99
RO/DIO control
word
Storage parameter for controlling the relay outputs eg.
through the embedded fieldbus interface. To control the relay
outputs (RO) of the drive, send a control word with the bit
assignments shown below as Modbus I/O data. Set the target
selection parameter of that particular data (58.101…58.114)
to RO/DIO control word. In the source selection parameter of
the desired output, select the appropriate bit of this word.
0000h
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5…15
Name
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO5
Reserved
Description
Source bits for relay outputs RO1…RO3 (see parameters 10.24, 10.27
and 10.30) and RO4…RO5 (with an extension module).
0000h…FFFFh
RO control word.
1=1
10.101
RO1 toggle counter
Displays the number of times relay output RO1 has changed
states.
-
0…4294967000
State change count.
1=1
10.102
RO2 toggle counter
Displays the number of times relay output RO2 has changed
states.
-
0…4294967000
State change count.
1=1
10.103
RO3 toggle counter
Displays the number of times relay output RO3 has changed
states.
-
0…4294967000
State change count.
1=1
11
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
Configuration of the frequency input.
11.25
DI6 configuration
Selects how digital input 6 is used.
Digital input
Digital input
DI6 is used as a digital input.
0
Frequency input
DI6 is used as a frequency input.
1
11.38
Freq in 1 actual
value
Displays the value of frequency input 1 (via DI6 when it is
used as a frequency input) before scaling. See parameter
11.42 Freq in 1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0 … 16000 Hz
Unscaled value of frequency input 1.
1 = 1 Hz
11.39
Freq in 1 scaled
value
Displays the value of frequency input 1 (via DI6 when it is
used as a frequency input) after scaling. See parameter 11.42
Freq in 1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.000…
32767.000
Scaled value of frequency input 1.
1=1
Parameters 155
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
11.42
Freq in 1 min
Defines the minimum for the frequency actually arriving at
frequency input 1 (DI6 when it is used as a frequency input).
The incoming frequency signal (11.38 Freq in 1 actual value)
is scaled into an internal signal (11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value)
by parameters 11.42…11.45 as follows:
0 Hz
11.39
11.45
11.44
11.42
11.43
fin (11.38)
0 … 16000 Hz
Minimum frequency of frequency input 1 (DI6).
1 = 1 Hz
11.43
Freq in 1 max
Defines the maximum for the frequency actually arriving at
frequency input 1 (DI6 when it is used as a frequency input).
See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
16000 Hz
0 … 16000 Hz
Maximum frequency for frequency input 1 (DI6).
1 = 1 Hz
11.44
Freq in 1 at scaled
min
0.000
Defines the value that is required to correspond internally to
the minimum input frequency defined by parameter 11.42
Freq in 1 min. See diagram at parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
-32768.000…
32767.000
Value corresponding to minimum of frequency input 1.
Freq in 1 at scaled
max
1500.000
Defines the value that is required to correspond internally to
the maximum input frequency defined by parameter 11.43
Freq in 1 max. See diagram at parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
-32768.000…
32767.000
Value corresponding to maximum of frequency input 1.
11.45
1=1
1=1
156 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
12
Description
12 Standard AI
Configuration of standard analog inputs.
12.02
The true readings of the analog inputs can be overridden for
eg. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is provided for
each analog input, and its value is applied whenever the
corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: AI filter times (parameters 12.16 AI1 filter time and
12.26 AI2 filter time) have no effect on forced AI values
(parameters 12.13 AI1 forced value and 12.23 AI2 forced
value).
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 12.02 and 12.03).
AI force selection
Bit
0
1
2…7
12.03
12.04
Def/FbEq16
0000h
Value
1 = Force AI1 to value of parameter 12.13 AI1 forced value.
1 = Force AI2 to value of parameter 12.23 AI2 forced value.
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Forced values selector for analog inputs AI1 and AI2.
1=1
AI supervision
function
Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal
moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified
for the input.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by
parameter 12.04 AI supervision selection.
No action
No action
No action taken.
0
Fault
Drive trips on 80A0 AI supervision.
1
Warning
Drive generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning.
2
Last speed
Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and freezes
the speed (or frequency) to the level the drive was operating
at. The speed/frequency is determined on the basis of actual
speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
3
Speed ref safe
Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and sets the
speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref
safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference
is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
4
AI supervision
selection
Specifies the analog input limits to be supervised. See
parameter 12.03 AI supervision function.
0000h
Bit
0
1
2
3
4…15
Name
AI1 < MIN
AI1 > MAX
AI2 < MIN
AI2 > MAX
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Description
1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active.
1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active.
1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI2 active.
1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI2 active.
Activation of analog input supervision.
1=1
Parameters 157
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
12.11
AI1 actual value
Displays the value of analog input AI1 in mA or V (depending
on whether the input is set to current or voltage by a hardware
setting).
This parameter is read-only.
-
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Value of analog input AI1.
1000 = 1 unit
AI1 scaled value
Displays the value of analog input AI1 after scaling. See
parameters 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min and 12.20 AI1 scaled
at AI1 max.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.000…
32767.000
Scaled value of analog input AI1.
1=1
AI1 forced value
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of
the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selection.
-
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Forced value of analog input AI1.
1000 = 1 unit
AI1 unit selection
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog
input AI1.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding hardware
setting on the drive control unit. See chapter Electrical
installation, section Switches in the Hardware manual of the
drive and the default control connections for the macro in use
in chapter Control macros (page 59). Control board reboot
(either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08
Control board boot) is required to validate any changes in the
hardware settings.
V
V
Volts.
2
mA
Milliamperes.
10
AI1 filter time
Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1.
0.100 s
12.12
12.13
12.15
12.16
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63
Filtered signal
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T )
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface
hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This cannot
be changed by any parameter.
0.000…30.000 s
Filter time constant.
1000 = 1 s
158 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
12.17
AI1 min
Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI1.
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal
from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
4.000 mA or
0.000 V
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Minimum value of AI1.
1000 = 1 unit
AI1 max
Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI1.
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal
from plant is wound to its maximum setting.
20.000 mA or
10.000 V
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Maximum value of AI1.
1000 = 1 unit
AI1 scaled at AI1
min
Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the
minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.17
AI1 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.19 and 12.20
can effectively invert the analog input.)
0.000
12.18
12.19
AIscaled (12.12)
12.20
AIin (12.11)
12.17
12.18
12.19
12.20
12.21
12.22
12.23
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value.
1=1
AI1 scaled at AI1
max
Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the
maximum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.18
AI1 max. See the drawing at parameter 12.19 AI1 scaled at
AI1 min.
50.000
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value.
1=1
AI2 actual value
Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V (depending
on whether the input is set to current or voltage by a hardware
setting).
This parameter is read-only.
-
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Value of analog input AI2.
1000 = 1 unit
AI2 scaled value
Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling. See
parameters 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12.101 AI1
percent value.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.000…
32767.000
Scaled value of analog input AI2.
1=1
AI2 forced value
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of
the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selection.
-
Parameters 159
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Forced value of analog input AI2.
1000 = 1 unit
AI2 unit selection
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog
input AI2.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding hardware
setting on the drive control unit. chapter Electrical installation,
section Switches in the Hardware manual of the drive and the
default control connections for the macro in use in chapter
Control macros (page 59). Control board reboot (either by
cycling the power or through parameter 96.08 Control board
boot) is required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
mA
V
Volts.
2
mA
Milliamperes.
10
12.26
AI2 filter time
Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See
parameter 12.16 AI1 filter time.
0.100 s
0.000…30.000 s
Filter time constant.
1000 = 1 s
12.27
AI2 min
Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI2.
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal
from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
4.000 mA or
0.000 V
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Minimum value of AI2.
1000 = 1 unit
AI2 max
Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI2.
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal
from plant is wound to its maximum setting.
20.000 mA or
10.000 V
0.000…20.000 mA
or 0.000…10.000 V
Maximum value of AI2.
1000 = 1 unit
AI2 scaled at AI2
min
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.27 AI2 min.
(Changing the polarity settings of 12.29 and 12.101 can
effectively invert the analog input.)
0.000
12.25
12.28
12.29
AIscaled (12.22)
12.101
AI in (12.21)
12.27
12.28
12.29
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value.
1=1
160 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
12.30
AI2 scaled at AI2
max
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
50.000
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.28 AI2 max.
See the drawing at parameter of 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min.
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value.
1=1
12.101
AI1 percent value
Value of analog input AI1 in percent of AI1 scaling (12.18 AI1
max - 12.17 AI1 min).
-
0.00… 100.00%
AI1 value
100 = 1%
12.102
AI2 percent value
Value of analog input AI2 in percent of AI2 scaling (12.28 AI2
max - 12.27 AI2 min).
-
0.00… 100.00%
AI2 value
100 = 1%
13
13 Standard AO
Configuration of standard analog outputs.
13.02
The source signals of the analog outputs can be overridden
for eg. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is provided
for each analog output, and its value is applied whenever the
corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 13.02 and 13.11).
AO force selection
Bit
0
1
2…7
Def/FbEq16
0000h
Value
1 = Force AO1 to value of parameter 13.13 AO1 forced value.
1 = Force AO2 to value of parameter 13.23 AO2 forced value.
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Forced values selector for analog outputs AO1 and AO2.
1=1
13.11
AO1 actual value
Displays the value of AO1 in mA.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0.000…22.000 mA
Value of AO1.
1 = 1 mA
13.12
AO1 source
Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO1.
Output
frequency
Zero
None.
0
Motor speed used
01.01 Motor speed used (page 139).
1
Output frequency
01.06 Output frequency (page 139).
3
Motor current
01.07 Motor current (page 139).
4
Motor current % of
motor nominal
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom (page 139).
5
Motor torque
01.10 Motor torque (page 139).
6
DC voltage
01.11 DC voltage (page 139).
7
Output power
01.14 Output power (page 140).
8
Speed ref ramp in
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 200).
10
Speed ref ramp out
23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 200).
11
Speed ref used
24.01 Used speed reference (page 204).
12
Freq ref used
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 213).
14
Process PID out
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 261).
16
Parameters 161
No.
13.13
13.15
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Temp sensor 1
excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the
temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature 1
source. See also section Motor thermal protection (page
123).
20
Temp sensor 2
excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the
temperature sensor 2, see parameter 35.21 Temperature 2
source. See also section Motor thermal protection (page
123).
21
Abs motor speed
used
01.61 Abs motor speed used (page 141).
26
Abs motor speed %
01.62 Abs motor speed % (page 141).
27
Abs output
frequency
01.63 Abs output frequency (page 141).
28
Abs motor torque
01.64 Abs motor torque (page 141).
30
Abs output power
01.65 Abs output power (page 141).
31
Abs motor shaft
power
01.68 Abs motor shaft power (page 141).
32
External PID1 out
71.01 External PID act value ((page 297).
33
AO1 data storage
13.91 AO1 data storage (page 166).
37
AO2 data storage
13.92 AO2 data storage (page 166).
38
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
AO1 forced value
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output
signal. See parameter 13.02 AO force selection.
0.000 mA
0.000…22.000
mA or V
Forced value for AO1.
1 = 1 unit
AO1 unit selection
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog
input AO1.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding hardware
setting on the drive control unit. See chapter Electrical
installation, section Switches in the Hardware manual of the
drive and the default control connections for the macro in use
in chapter Control macros (page 59). Control board reboot
(either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08
Control board boot) is required to validate any changes in the
hardware settings.
mA
V
Volts.
2
mA
Milliamperes.
10
162 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
13.16
AO1 filter time
Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1.
0.100 s
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63
Filtered signal
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant
0.000 … 30.000 s
Filter time constant.
1000 = 1 s
Parameters 163
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
13.17
AO1 source min
Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by
parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
minimum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min).
0.0
IAO1 (mA)
13.20
13.19
13.17
13.18
Signal (real)
selected by
13.12
Programming 13.17 as the maximum value and 13.18 as the
minimum value inverts the output.
IAO1 (mA)
13.20
13.19
13.18
13.17
Signal (real)
selected by
13.12
164 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
AO has automatic scaling. Every time the source for the AO is changed, the scaling range is
changed accordingly. User given minimum and maximum values override the automatic values.
6
7
13.12 AO1 source,
13.22 AO2 source
Zero
Motor speed used
Output frequency
Motor current
Motor current % of motor
nominal
Motor torque
DC voltage
8
10
11
12
14
16
Output power
Speed ref ramp in
Speed ref ramp out
Speed ref used
Freq ref used
Process PID out
20
21
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
Temp sensor 1 excitation
Temp sensor 2 excitation
Abs motor speed used
Abs motor speed %
Abs output frequency
Abs motor torque
Abs output power
Abs motor shaft power
External PID1 out
0
1
3
4
5
Other
13.17 AO1 source min,
13.27 AO2 source min
N/A (Output is constant zero.)
0
0
0
0%
13.18 AO1 source max,
13.28 AO2 source max
46.01 Speed scaling
46.02 Frequency scaling
30.17 Maximum current
100%
0
46.03 Torque scaling
Min. value of 01.11 DC
Max. value of 01.11 DC
voltage
voltage
0
46.04 Power scaling
0
46.01 Speed scaling
0
46.01 Speed scaling
0
46.01 Speed scaling
0
46.02 Frequency scaling
Min. value of 40.01 Process Max. value of 40.01 Process
PID output actual
PID output actual
N/A (Analog output is not scaled; it is determined by the
sensor’s triggering voltage.)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min. value of 71.01 External
PID act value
Min. value of the selected
parameter
46.01 Speed scaling
46.01 Speed scaling
46.02 Frequency scaling
46.03 Torque scaling
46.04 Power scaling
46.04 Power scaling
Max. value of 71.01 External
PID act value
Max. value of the selected
parameter
-32768.0…32767.0
Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output
value.
1=1
AO1 source max
Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by
parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
maximum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max). See parameter 13.17 AO1
source min.
50.0
-32768.0…32767.0
Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output
value.
1=1
13.19
AO1 out at AO1 src
min
Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1.
See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000 mA
0.000 … 22.000 mA Minimum AO1 output value.
1000 = 1 mA
13.20
AO1 out at AO1 src
max
20.000 mA
13.18
Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1.
See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Maximum AO1 output value.
1000 = 1 mA
Parameters 165
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
13.21
AO2 actual value
Displays the value of AO2 in mA.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0.000 … 22.000 mA Value of AO2.
1000 = 1 mA
13.22
AO2 source
Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO2.
Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a
constant current to a temperature sensor.
For the selections, see parameter 13.12 AO1 source.
Motor current
13.23
AO2 forced value
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output
signal. See parameter 13.02 AO force selection.
0.000 mA
0.000 … 22.000 mA Forced value for AO2.
1000 = 1 mA
13.26
AO2 filter time
Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2. See
parameter 13.16 AO1 filter time.
0.100 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Filter time constant.
1000 = 1 s
13.27
AO2 source min
Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by
parameter 13.22 AO2 source) that corresponds to the
minimum required AO2 output value (defined by parameter
13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src min). See parameter 13.17 AO1
source min about the AO automatic scaling.
0.0
IAO2 (mA)
13.30
13.29
13.27
13.28
Signal (real)
selected by
13.22
Programming 13.27 as the maximum value and 13.28 as the
minimum value inverts the output.
IAO2 (mA)
13.30
13.29
13.28
-32768.0…32767.0
13.27
Signal (real)
selected by
13.22
Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output
value.
1=1
166 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
13.28
AO2 source max
Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by
parameter 13.22 AO2 source) that corresponds to the
maximum required AO2 output value (defined by parameter
13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src max). See parameter 13.27 AO2
source min. See parameter 13.17 AO1 source min about the
AO automatic scaling.
-32768.0…32767.0
Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output
value.
1=1
13.29
AO2 out at AO2 src
min
Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO2.
See also drawing at parameter 13.27 AO2 source min.
0.000 mA
0.000 … 22.000 mA Minimum AO2 output value.
1000 = 1 mA
13.30
AO2 out at AO2 src
max
20.000 mA
Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO2.
See also drawing at parameter 13.27 AO2 source min.
Def/FbEq16
0.000 … 22.000 mA Maximum AO2 output value.
1000 = 1 mA
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO8 output
value.
1000 = 1
13.91
AO1 data storage
Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO1 eg.
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
In parameter 13.12 AO1 source, select AO1 data storage.
Then set this parameter as the target of the incoming value
data. With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the
target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114) to AO1 data storage.
0.00
-327.68…327.67
Storage parameter for AO1.
100 = 1
13.92
AO2 data storage
Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO2 eg.
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
In parameter 13.22 AO2 source, select AO2 data storage.
Then set this parameter as the target of the incoming value
data. With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the
target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114) to AO2 data storage.
0.00
-327.68…327.67
Storage parameter for AO2.
100 = 1
15
15 I/O extension
module
Configuration of the I/O extension module installed in slot 2.
See also section Programmable I/O extensions (page 94).
Note: The contents of the parameter group vary according to
the selected I/O extension module type.
15.01
Activates (and specifies the type of) I/O extension module. If
the value is None, when an extension module has been
installed and the dive is powered, the drive automatically sets
the value to the type it has detected (= value of parameter
15.02 Detected extension module); otherwise warning A7AB
Extension I/O configuration failure is generated and you have
to set the value of this parameter manually.
None
None
Inactive.
0
CMOD-01
CMOD-01.
1
CMOD-02
CMOD-02.
2
CHDI-01
CHDI-01.
3
Detected extension
module
I/O extension module detected on the drive.
None
None
Inactive.
0
15.02
Extension module
type
Parameters 167
No.
15.03
15.04
15.05
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
CMOD-01
CMOD-01.
1
CMOD-02
CMOD-02.
2
CHDI-01
CHDI-01.
3
DI status
Displays the status of the digital inputs DI7…DI12 on the
extension module
Bit 0 indicates the status of DI7.
Example: 001001b = DI7 and DI10 are on, remainder are off.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh
Status of digital input/outputs.
1=1
RO/DO status
Displays the status of the relay outputs RO4 and RO5 and
digital output DO1 on the extension module.
Bits 0…1 indicates the status of RO4…RO5; bit 5 indicates
the status of DO1.
Example: 100101b = RO4 is on, RO5 is off. and DO1 is on.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0000h…FFFFh
Status of relay/digital outputs.
1=1
RO/DO force
selection
The electrical statuses of the relay/digital outputs can be
overridden for eg. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 15.06
RO/DO forced data is provided for each digital input, and its
value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this
parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 15.05 and 15.06).
0000h
Bit
0
1
2…4
5
6…15
Value
1 = Force RO4 to value of bit 0 of parameter 15.06 RO/DO forced data.
1 = Force RO5 to value of bit 1 of parameter 15.06 RO/DO forced data.
Reserved
1 = Force DO1 to value of bit 5 of parameter 15.06 RO/DO forced data.
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Override selection for relay/digital outputs.
15.06
RO/DO forced data
0000h
Allows the data value of a forced relay or digital output to be
changed from 0 to 1. It is only possible to force an output that
has been selected in parameter 15.05 RO/DO force selection.
Bits 0…1 are the forced values for RO4…RO5; bit 5 is the
forced value for DO1.
1=1
0000h…FFFFh
Forced values of relay/digital outputs.
1=1
15.07
RO4 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO4.
Not
energized
Not energized
Output is not energized.
0
Energized
Output is energized.
1
Ready run
Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
2
Enabled
Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
4
Started
Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
5
Magnetized
Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
6
Running
Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
7
Ready ref
Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
8
168 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
At setpoint
Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
9
Reverse
Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 148).
10
Zero speed
Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 148).
11
Above limit
Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
12
Warning
Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
13
Fault
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
14
Fault (-1)
Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
15
Fault/Warning
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status
word (see page 145).
16
Overcurrent
Fault 2310 Overcurrent has occurred.
17
Overvoltage
Fault 3210 DC link overvoltage has occurred.
18
Drive temp
Fault 2381 IGBT overload or 4110 Control board temperature
or 4210 IGBT overtemperature or 4290 Cooling or 42F1 IGBT
temperature or 4310 Excess temperature or 4380 Excess
temperature difference has occurred.
19
Undervoltage
Fault 3220 DC link undervoltage has occurred.
20
Motor temp
Fault 4981 External temperature 1 or 4982 External
temperature 2 has occurred.
21
Brake command
Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status (see page 275).
22
Ext2 active
Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
23
Remote control
Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
24
MCB
Reserved
25
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
27
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
28
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
29
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
33
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
34
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
35
Start delay
Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
39
RO/DIO control
word bit0
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 154).
40
RO/DIO control
word bit1
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 154).
41
RO/DIO control
word bit2
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 154).
42
PFC1
Bit 0 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
43
PFC2
Bit 1 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
44
PFC3
Bit 2 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
45
PFC4
Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 299).
46
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Parameters 169
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
15.08
RO4 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO4.
0.0 s
1
Status of selected
source
0
1
RO status
0
Time
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.08 RO4 ON delay
tOff = 15.09 RO4 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO4.
10 = 1 s
15.09
RO4 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO4. See
parameter 15.08 RO4 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO4.
10 = 1 s
15.10
RO5 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO4.
For the available selections, see parameter 15.07 RO4
source.
Not
energized
15.11
RO5 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO5.
0.0 s
1
Status of selected
source
0
1
RO status
0
Time
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.11 RO5 ON delay
tOff = 15.12 RO5 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO5.
10 = 1 s
15.12
RO5 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO5. See
parameter 15.11 RO5 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO5.
10 = 1 s
15.22
DO1 configuration
Selects how DO1 is used.
Digital output
Digital output
DO1 is used as a digital output.
0
15.23
Frequency output
DO1 is used as a frequency output.
1
DO1 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DO1
when 15.22 DO1 configuration is set to Digital output.
Not
energized
Not energized
Output is not energized.
0
Energized
Output is energized.
1
Ready run
Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
2
Enabled
Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
4
Started
Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
5
Magnetized
Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
6
170 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Running
Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
7
Ready ref
Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
8
At setpoint
Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
9
Reverse
Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 148).
10
Zero speed
Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 148).
11
Above limit
Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
12
Warning
Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
13
Fault
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
14
Fault (-1)
Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
15
Fault/Warning
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status
word (see page 145).
16
Overcurrent
Fault 2310 Overcurrent has occurred.
17
Overvoltage
Fault 3210 DC link overvoltage has occurred.
18
Drive temp
Fault 2381 IGBT overload or 4110 Control board temperature
or 4210 IGBT overtemperature or 4290 Cooling or 42F1 IGBT
temperature or 4310 Excess temperature or 4380 Excess
temperature difference has occurred.
19
Undervoltage
Fault 3220 DC link undervoltage has occurred.
20
Motor temp
Fault 4981 External temperature 1 or 4982 External
temperature 2 has occurred.
21
Brake command
Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status (see page 275).
22
Ext2 active
Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 146).
23
Remote control
Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 145).
24
MCB
Reserved
25
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
27
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
28
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
29
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
33
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
34
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
35
Start delay
Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 147).
39
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Parameters 171
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
15.24
DO1 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output DO1 when 15.22
DO1 configuration is set to Digital output.
0.0 s
1
Status of selected
source
0
1
RO status
0
Time
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.24 DO1 ON delay
tOff = 15.25 DO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Activation delay for DO1.
10 = 1 s
15.25
DO1 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output DO1 when
15.22 DO1 configuration is set to Digital output. See
parameter 15.24 DO1 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 … 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for DO1.
10 = 1 s
15.32
Freq out 1 actual
value
Displays the value of frequency output 1 at digital output DO1
when 15.22 DO1 configuration is set to Frequency output.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0 … 16000 Hz
Value of frequency output 1.
1 = 1 Hz
15.33
Freq out 1 source
Selects a signal to be connected to digital output DO1 when
15.22 DO1 configuration is set to Frequency output.
Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a
constant current to a temperature sensor.
Not selected
Not selected
None.
0
Motor speed used
01.01 Motor speed used (page 139).
1
Output frequency
01.06 Output frequency (page 139).
3
Motor current
01.07 Motor current (page 139).
4
Motor torque
01.10 Motor torque (page 139).
6
DC voltage
01.11 DC voltage (page 139).
7
Output power
01.14 Output power (page 140).
8
Speed ref ramp in
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 200).
10
Speed ref ramp out
23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 200).
11
Speed ref used
24.01 Used speed reference (page 204).
12
Torque ref used
26.02 Torque reference used (page 209).
13
Freq ref used
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 213).
14
Process PID out
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 261).
16
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
172 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
15.34
Freq out 1 src min
Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
15.33 Freq out 1 source) that corresponds to the minimum
value of frequency output 1 (defined by parameter 15.36 Freq
out 1 at src min). This applies when 15.22 DO1 configuration
is set to Frequency output.
0.000
IAO1 (mA)
15.37
15.36
15.34
15.35
IAO1 (mA)
Signal (real)
selected by par.
15.33
15.37
15.36
15.35
15.34
Signal (real)
selected by par.
15.33
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to minimum value of
frequency output 1.
1=1
Freq out 1 src max
Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
15.33 Freq out 1 source) that corresponds to the maximum
value of frequency output 1 (defined by parameter 15.37 Freq
out 1 at src max). This applies when 15.22 DO1 configuration
is set to Frequency output.
See parameter 15.34 Freq out 1 src min.
1500.000
-32768.000…
32767.000
Real signal value corresponding to maximum value of
frequency output 1.
1=1
15.36
Freq out 1 at src
min
Defines the minimum output value of frequency output 1
when 15.22 DO1 configuration is set to Frequency output.
See also drawing at parameter 15.34 Freq out 1 src min.
0 Hz
0 … 16000 Hz
Minimum frequency output 1 value.
1 = 1 Hz
15.37
Freq out 1 at src
max
Defines the maximum value of frequency output 1 when
15.22 DO1 configuration is set to Frequency output.
See also drawing at parameter 15.34 Freq out 1 src min.
16000 Hz
0 … 16000 Hz
Maximum value of frequency output 1.
1 = 1 Hz
15.35
Parameters 173
No.
Name/Value
19
Description
Def/FbEq16
19 Operation mode
Selection of local and external control location sources and
operating modes.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 89).
19.01
Actual operation
mode
Displays the operating mode currently used.
See parameters 19.11…19.14.
This parameter is read-only.
Zero
None.
1
Speed
Speed control (in vector motor control mode).
2
Torque
Torque control (in vector motor control mode).
3
Min
The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed
controller (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and torque
reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and the smaller of the
two is used (in vector motor control mode).
4
Max
The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed
controller (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and torque
reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and the greater of the
two is used (in vector motor control mode).
5
Add
The speed controller output is added to the torque reference
(in vector motor control mode).
6
Scalar (Hz)
Frequency control in scalar motor control mode (in scalar
motor control mode).
10
19.11
-
Forced magn.
Motor is in magnetizing mode.
20
Ext1/Ext2 selection
Selects the source for external control location EXT1/EXT2
selection.
0 = EXT1
1 = EXT2
EXT1
EXT1
EXT1 (permanently selected).
0
EXT2
EXT2 (permanently selected).
1
FBA A MCW bit 11
Control word bit 11 received through fieldbus interface A.
2
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
6
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
21
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
27
EFB MCW bit 11
Control word bit 11 received through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
32
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
174 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
19.12
Ext1 control mode
Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT1
in vector motor control mode.
Speed
Zero
None.
1
Speed
Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque
reference speed control (output of the speed reference
chain).
2
Torque
Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref
ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
3
Minimum
Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01 Torque
reference speed control) and the torque reference (26.74
Torque ref ramp out) and selects the smaller of the two.
If speed error becomes negative, the drive follows the speed
controller output until speed error becomes positive again.
This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the
load is lost in torque control.
4
Maximum
Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01 Torque
reference speed control) and the torque reference (26.74
Torque ref ramp out) and selects the greater of the two.
If speed error becomes positive, the drive follows the speed
controller output until speed error becomes negative again.
This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the
load is lost in torque control.
5
19.14
Ext2 control mode
Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT2
in vector motor control mode.
For the selections, see parameter 19.12 Ext1 control mode.
Speed
19.16
Local control mode
Selects the operating mode for local control in vector motor
control mode.
Speed
Speed
Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque
reference speed control (output of the speed reference
chain).
0
Torque
Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref
ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
1
Local control
disable
Enables/disables local control (start and stop buttons on the
control panel, and the local controls on the PC tool).
WARNING! Before disabling local control, ensure that
the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive.
No
No
Local control enabled.
0
Yes
Local control disabled.
1
19.17
20
20 Start/stop/direction
Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source
selection.
For information on control locations, see section Local control
vs. external control (page 86).
20.01
Ext1 commands
Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands for
external control location 1 (EXT1).
See also parameters 20.02…20.05. See parameter 20.21 for
the determination of the actual direction.
In1 Start; In2
Dir
Not selected
No start or stop command sources selected.
0
Parameters 175
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
In1 Start
The source of the start and stop commands is selected by
parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:
1
State of source 1 (20.03)
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
1 (20.02 = Level)
0
In1 Start; In2 Dir
Stop
State of source 2
(20.04)
Any
0
1
0
1
State of source 2
(20.04)
0
0
Stop
Start forward
Start reverse
3
Command
Stop
Start forward
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
Start reverse
1 (20.02 = Level)
1
Stop
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by
parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2 source.
The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as
follows:
State of source 1
(20.03)
0 -> 1
Any
2
Command
The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the forward
start signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source is
the reverse start signal. The state transitions of the source
bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1
(20.03)
0
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
1 (20.02 = Level)
In1P Start; In2 Stop
Start
The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the start
signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the source
bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1
(20.03)
0
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
1 (20.02 = Level)
In1 Start fwd; In2
Start rev
Command
State of source 2
(20.04)
1
0
Command
Start
Stop
Notes:
• Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect with
this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
4
176 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
In1P Start; In2 Stop;
In3 Dir
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by
parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2 source.
The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source determines the
direction. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:
5
State of
source 1
(20.03)
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Any
State of
source 2
(20.04)
1
1
0
State of
source 3
(20.05)
0
1
Any
Command
Start forward
Start reverse
Stop
Notes:
• Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect with
this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
In1P Start fwd; In2P
Start rev; In3 Stop
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by
parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source, 20.04 Ext1 in2 source and
20.05 Ext1 in3 source. The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3
source determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:
State of
source 1
(20.03)
0 -> 1
Any
Any
State of
source 2
(20.04)
Any
0 -> 1
Any
State of
source 3
(20.05)
1
1
0
6
Command
Start forward
Start reverse
Stop
Note: Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect
with this setting.
20.02
20.03
Control panel
The start and stop commands are taken from the control
panel (or PC connected to the panel connector).
11
Fieldbus A
The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter
A.
Note: Set also 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type to Level.
12
Embedded fieldbus
The start and stop commands are taken from the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Note: Set also 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type to Level.
14
Ext1 start trigger
type
Defines whether the start signal for external control location
EXT1 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse-type start
signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of
parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
Level
Edge
The start signal is edge-triggered.
0
Level
The start signal is level-triggered.
1
Ext1 in1 source
Selects source 1 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
DI1
Not selected
0 (always off).
0
Selected
1 (always on).
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Parameters 177
No.
Name/Value
Description
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Def/FbEq16
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
20.04
Ext1 in2 source
Selects source 2 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
DI2
20.05
Ext1 in3 source
Selects source 3 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
Not selected
20.06
Ext2 commands
Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands for
external control location 2 (EXT2).
See also parameters 20.07…20.10. See parameter 20.21 for
the determination of the actual direction.
Not selected
Not selected
No start or stop command sources selected.
0
In1 Start
The source of the start and stop commands is selected by
parameter 20.08 Ext2 in1 source. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:
1
State of source 1 (20.08)
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
1 (20.07 = Level)
0
In1 Start; In2 Dir
Command
Start
Stop
The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the start
signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the source
bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1
(20.08)
0
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
1 (20.07 = Level)
State of source 2
(20.09)
Any
0
1
Command
Stop
Start forward
Start reverse
2
178 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
In1 Start fwd; In2
Start rev
The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the forward
start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source is
the reverse start signal. The state transitions of the source
bits are interpreted as follows:
3
State of source 1
(20.08)
0
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
1 (20.07 = Level)
0
Command
Stop
Start forward
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
Start reverse
1 (20.07 = Level)
1
Stop
0
1
In1P Start; In2 Stop
State of source 2
(20.09)
0
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by
parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext2 in2 source.
The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as
follows:
State of source 1
(20.08)
0 -> 1
Any
State of source 2
(20.09)
1
0
4
Command
Start
Stop
Notes:
• Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect with
this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
In1P Start; In2 Stop;
In3 Dir
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by
parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext2 in2 source.
The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source determines the
direction. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:
State of
source 1
(20.08)
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Any
State of
source 2
(20.09)
1
1
0
State of
source 3
(20.10)
0
1
Any
Command
Start forward
Start reverse
Stop
Notes:
• Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect with
this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
5
Parameters 179
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
In1P Start fwd; In2P
Start rev; In3 Stop
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by
parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source, 20.09 Ext2 in2 source and
20.10 Ext2 in3 source. The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3
source determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:
6
State of
source 1
(20.08)
0 -> 1
Any
Any
State of
source 2
(20.09)
Any
0 -> 1
Any
State of
source 3
(20.10)
1
1
0
Command
Start forward
Start reverse
Stop
Note: Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect
with this setting.
Control panel
The start and stop commands are taken from the control
panel (or PC connected to the panel connector).
11
Fieldbus A
The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter
A.
Note: Set also 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type to Level.
12
Embedded fieldbus
The start and stop commands are taken from the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Note: Set also 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type to Level.
14
Ext2 start trigger
type
Defines whether the start signal for external control location
EXT2 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse-type start
signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of
parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
Level
Edge
The start signal is edge-triggered.
0
Level
The start signal is level-triggered.
1
20.08
Ext2 in1 source
Selects source 1 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
Not selected
20.09
Ext2 in2 source
Selects source 2 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
Not selected
20.10
Ext2 in3 source
Selects source 3 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
Not selected
20.11
Run enable stop
mode
Selects the way the motor is stopped when the run enable
signal switches off.
The source of the run enable signal is selected by parameter
20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Coast
Coast
Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive.
The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure it is
safe to stop the drive by coasting.
0
Ramp
Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 200.
1
Torque limit
Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 30.20). 2
20.07
180 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
20.12
Run enable 1
source
Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the run
enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start. If already
running, the drive will stop according to the setting of
parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode.
1 = Run enable signal on.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also parameter 20.19 Enable start command.
Selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
FBA A MCW bit 3
Control word bit 3 received through fieldbus interface A.
30
EFB MCW bit 3
Control word bit 3 received through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
31
20.19
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Enable start
command
Selects the source for the start enable signal.
1 = Start enable.
With the signal switched off, any drive start command is
inhibited. (Switching the signal off while the drive is running
will not stop the drive.)
See also parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Parameters 181
No.
20.21
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Direction
Reference direction lock. Defines the direction of the drive
rather than the sign of the reference, except in some cases.
In the table the actual drive rotation is shown as a function of
parameter 20.21 Direction and Direction command (from
parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands or 20.06 Ext2 commands).
Par. 20.21
Direction =
Forward
Par. 20.21
Direction =
Reverse
Par. 20.21
Direction =
Request
20.22
Request
Direction command =
Forward
Direction command =
Reverse
Direction command not
defined
Forward
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse, but
Forward, but
• If reference from
• If reference from
Constant, Motor
Constant, Motor
potentiometer, PID, Fail,
potentiometer, PID, Fail,
Last, Jogging or Panel
Last, Jogging or Panel
Forward
reference, reference
reference, reference
used as is.
used as is.
• If reference from the
• If reference from the
network, reference
network, reference used
multiplied by -1.
as is.
Request
In external control the direction is selected by a direction
command (parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands or 20.06 Ext2
commands).
If the reference comes from Constant (constant
speeds/frequencies), Motor potentiometer, PID, Speed ref
safe, Last speed reference, Jogging speed or Panel
reference, the reference is used as is.
If the reference comes from a fieldbus:
• if the direction command is forward, the reference is used
as is
• if the direction command is reverse, the reference is
multiplied by -1.
0
Forward
Motor rotates forward regardless of the sign of the external
reference. (Negative reference values are replaced by zero.
Positive reference values are used as is.)
1
Reverse
Motor rotates reverse regardless of the sign of the external
reference. (Negative reference values are replaced by zero.
Positive reference values are multiplied by -1.)
2
Enable to rotate
Setting this parameter to 0 stops motor rotating but does not
affect any other conditions for rotating. Setting the parameter
back to 1 starts motor rotating again.
This parameter can be used for example with a signal from
some external equipment to prevent the motor rotating before
the equipment is ready.
When this parameter is 0 (rotating of the motor is disabled),
bit 13 of parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1 is set to 0.
Selected
Not selected
0 (always off).
0
182 Parameters
No.
20.25
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Selected
1 (always on).
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Jogging enable
Selects the source for a jog enable signal.
(The sources for jogging activation signals are selected by
parameters 20.26 Jogging 1 start source and 20.27 Jogging 2
start source.)
1 = Jogging is enabled.
0 = Jogging is disabled.
Notes:
• Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
• Jogging can be enabled only when no start command from
an external control location is active. On the other hand, if
jogging is already enabled, the drive cannot be started
from an external control location (apart from inching
commands through fieldbus).
See section Rush control (page 98).
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Parameters 183
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
20.26
Jogging 1 start
source
If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the
source for the activation of jogging function 1. (Jogging
function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless
of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 1 active.
Notes:
• Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
• If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that was
activated first has priority.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
2
20.27
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Jogging 2 start
source
If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the
source for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging
function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless
of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 2 active.
For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jogging 1 start
source.
Notes:
• Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
• If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that was
activated first has priority.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Not selected
184 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
21
Description
Def/FbEq16
21 Start/stop mode
Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal
source selection; DC magnetization settings.
21.01
Vector start mode
Selects the motor start function for the vector motor control
mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Vector.
Notes:
• The start function for the scalar motor control mode is
selected by parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode.
• Starting into a rotating motor is not possible when DC
magnetizing is selected (Fast or Const time).
• With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode
must be used.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also section DC magnetization (page 106).
Automatic
Fast
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The premagnetizing time is determined automatically, being typically
200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size. This mode should be
selected if a high break-away torque is required.
0
Const time
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The premagnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if constant
pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must
be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake).
This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away
torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where
a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant
magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetization and torque.
1
Automatic
Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases.
It includes the flying start function (starting into a rotating
motor) and the automatic restart function (a stopped motor
can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to
die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux
as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the
motor instantly under all conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar,
no flying start or automatic restart is possible unless
parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Automatic.
2
Parameters 185
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
21.02
Magnetization time
Defines the pre-magnetization time when
• parameter 21.01 Vector start mode is set to Const time (in
vector motor control mode), or
• parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Const time (in
scalar motor control mode).
After the start command, the drive automatically
premagnetizes the motor for the set time. To ensure full
magnetizing, set this parameter to the same value as, or
higher than, the rotor time constant. If not known, use the
rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:
500 ms
Motor rated power
Constant magnetizing time
< 1 kW
> 50 to 100 ms
1 to 10 kW
> 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW
> 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW
> 1000 to 2000 ms
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
21.03
21.04
0…10000 ms
Constant DC magnetizing time.
1 = 1 ms
Stop mode
Selects the way the motor is stopped when a stop command
is received.
Additional braking is possible by selecting flux braking (see
parameter 97.05 Flux braking).
Coast
Coast
Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive.
The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure it is
safe to stop the drive by coasting.
0
Ramp
Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 200 or 28
Frequency reference chain on page 213.
1
Torque limit
Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 30.20).
This mode is only possible in vector motor control mode.
2
Emergency stop
mode
Selects the way the motor is stopped when an emergency
stop command is received.
The source of the emergency stop signal is selected by
parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source.
Ramp stop
(Off1)
Ramp stop (Off1)
With the drive running:
• 1 = Normal operation.
• 0 = Normal stop along the standard deceleration ramp
defined for the particular reference type (see section
Reference ramping [page 96]). After the drive has stopped,
it can be restarted by removing the emergency stop signal
and switching the start signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed.
• 0 = Starting not allowed.
0
186 Parameters
No.
21.05
21.06
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Coast stop (Off2)
With the drive running:
• 1 = Normal operation.
• 0 = Stop by coasting. The drive can be restarted by
restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start
signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed.
• 0 = Starting not allowed.
1
Eme ramp stop
(Off3)
With the drive running:
• 1 = Normal operation
• 0 = Stop by ramping along emergency stop ramp defined
by parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time. After the drive
has stopped, it can be restarted by removing the
emergency stop signal and switching the start signal from
0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed
• 0 = Starting not allowed
2
Stop torque
With the drive running:
• 1 = Normal operation
• 0 = Stop against the maximum torque limit (parameter
30.20 Maximum torque 1 or 30.24 Maximum torque 2).
The drive can be restarted by switching the start signal
from 0 to 1.
• With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed
• 0 = Starting not allowed
3
Emergency stop
source
Inactive
Selects the source of the emergency stop signal. The stop
mode is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode. (true)
0 = Emergency stop active
1 = Normal operation
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Active (false)
0.
Inactive (true)
1.
0
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Zero speed limit
Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along a
speed ramp (when ramped stop is selected or emergency
stop time is used) until the defined zero speed limit is
reached. After the zero speed delay, the motor coasts to a
stop.
30.00 rpm
0.00…30000.00
rpm
Zero speed limit.
See par.
46.01
Parameters 187
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
21.07
Zero speed delay
Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The
function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick
restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive knows the
rotor position accurately.
0 ms
Without zero speed delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of
parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, inverter modulation is
stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill.
Speed
Speed controller switched off:
Motor coasts to a stop.
21.06 Zero speed limit
Time
With zero speed delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a
ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of
parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, the zero speed delay
function activates. During the delay the function keeps the
speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is
magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart. Zero
speed delay can be used e.g. with the jogging function.
Speed
Speed controller remains
active. Motor is decelerated to
true zero speed.
21.06 Zero speed limit
Delay
0…30000 ms
Zero speed delay.
Time
1 = 1 ms
188 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
21.08
DC current control
Activates/deactivates the DC hold and post-magnetization
functions. See section DC magnetization (page 106).
Note: DC magnetization causes the motor to heat up. In
applications where long DC magnetization times are required,
externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC
magnetization period is long, DC magnetization cannot
prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is
applied to the motor.
0000b
Bit
0
1
2…15
Value
1 = DC hold. See section DC hold (page 107).
Note: The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched off.
1 = Post-magnetization. See section Settings (page 107).
Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode (see
parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
Reserved
0000b…0011b
DC magnetization selection.
1=1
DC hold speed
Defines the DC hold speed in speed control mode. See
parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC hold
(page 107).
5.00 rpm
0.00…1000.00 rpm
DC hold speed.
See par.
46.01
21.10
DC current
reference
Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal
current. See parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section
DC magnetization (page 106).
30.0%
0.0…100.0%
DC hold current.
1 = 1%
21.11
Post magnetization
time
Defines the length of time for which post-magnetization is
active after stopping the motor. The magnetization current is
defined by parameter 21.10 DC current reference.
See parameter 21.08 DC current control.
0s
0…3000 s
Post-magnetization time.
1=1s
21.14
Pre-heating input
source
Selects the source for triggering pre-heating for the motor.
The status of the pre-heating is shown as bit 2 of 06.20 Drive
status word 3.
Notes:
• The heating function requires that STO is not triggered.
• The heating function requires that the drive is not faulted.
• Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.
Off
21.09
Off
0. Pre-heating is always deactivated.
0
On
1. Pre-heating is always activated when the drive is stopped.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
8
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
9
Parameters 189
No.
21.16
21.18
21.19
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
10
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
11
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
12
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
13
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Pre-heating current
Defines the DC current used to heat motor findings.
0.0%
0.0…30.0%
Pre-heating current.
1 = 1%
Auto restart time
10.0 s
The motor can be automatically started after a short supply
power failure using the automatic restart function. See section
Automatic restart (page 120).
When this parameter is set to 0.0 seconds, automatic
restarting is disabled. Otherwise, the parameter defines the
maximum duration of the power failure after which restarting
is attempted. Note that this time also includes the DC
precharging delay.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make
sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The
function restarts the drive automatically and continues
operation after a supply break.
0.0 s
Automatic restarting disabled.
0
0.1…10.0 s
Maximum power failure duration.
1=1s
Scalar start mode
Selects the motor start function for the scalar motor control
mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar.
Notes:
• The start function for the vector motor control mode is
selected by parameter 21.01 Vector start mode.
• With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode
must be used.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also section DC magnetization (page 106).
Normal
Normal
Immediate start from zero speed.
0
Const time
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre1
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if constant
pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must
be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake).
This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away
torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set premagnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where
a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant
magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetization and torque.
Automatic
The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency
to start a rotating motor. This is useful for flying starts: if the
motor is already rotating, the drive will start smoothly at the
current frequency.
Note: Cannot be used in multimotor systems.
2
190 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Torque boost
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before the start. The pre- 3
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time.
Torque boost is applied at start. Torque boost is stopped
when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to
the reference value. See parameter 21.26 Torque boost
current.
This mode should selected if a high break-away torque is
required.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set premagnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where
a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant
magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetization and torque.
Automatic + boost
Automatic start with torque boost.
Automatic start is performed first and the motor is
magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, torque boost is
applied.
4
21.21
DC hold frequency
Defines the DC hold frequency, which is used instead of
parameter 21.09 DC hold speed when the motor is in scalar
frequency mode. See parameter 21.08 DC current control,
and section DC hold (page 107).
5.00 Hz
0.00…1000.00 Hz
DC hold frequency.
1 = 1 Hz
21.22
Start delay
Defines the start delay. After the conditions for start have
been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and
then starts the motor. During the delay, warning AFE9 Start
delay is shown.
Start delay can be used with all start modes.
0.00 s
0.00…60.00 s
Start delay
1=1s
21.23
Smooth start
Selects the forced current vector rotation mode at low
speeds. When the smooth start mode is selected, the rate of
acceleration is limited by the acceleration and deceleration
ramp times. If the process driven by the permanent magnet
synchronous motor has high inertia, slow ramp times are
recommended.
Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors
only.
Disabled
21.24
Def/FbEq16
Disabled
Disabled.
0
Enabled always
Enabled always.
1
Start only
Enabled when starting the motor.
2
Smooth start
current
Current used in the current vector rotation at low speeds.
Increase the smooth start current if the application requires
motor shaft swinging needs to be minimized. Note that
accurate torque control is not possible in the current vector
rotation mode.
Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors
only.
50.0%
10.0…100.0%
Value in percent of the nominal motor current.
1 = 1%
Parameters 191
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
21.25
Smooth start speed
Output frequency up to which the current vector rotation is
used. See parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode.
Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors
only.
10.0%
2.0…100.0%
Value as a percentage of the nominal motor frequency.
1 = 1%
21.26
Torque boost
current
Maximum current supplied during torque boost.
Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors
only.
100.0%
15.0…300.0%
Value in percent of the nominal motor current.
1 = 1%
21.30
Speed
compensated stop
mode
Selects the method used to stop the drive. See also section.
Speed compensated stop (page 109).
Speed compensated stop is active only if
• the operation mode is not torque, and
• parameter 21.03 Stop mode is Ramp, or
• parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode is Ramp (in
case Run enable is missing).
Off
Off
Stop according parameter 21.03 Stop mode, no speed
compensated stop.
0
Speed comp FWD
If the direction of rotation is forward, speed compensation is
used for constant distance braking. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated
by running the drive with current speed before the motor is
stopped along a ramp.
If the direction of rotation is reverse, the drive is stopped
along a ramp.
1
Speed comp REV
If the direction of rotation is reverse, speed compensation is
used for constant distance braking. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated
by running the drive with current speed before the motor is
stopped along a ramp.
If the direction of rotation is forward, the drive is stopped
along a ramp.
2
Speed comp bipolar Regardless of the direction of rotation, speed compensation
is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated
by running the drive with current speed before the motor is
stopped along a ramp.
3
21.31
Speed
compensated stop
delay
This delay adds distance to the total distance traveled during
a stop from maximum speed. It is used to adjust the distance
to match requirements so that the distance traveled is not
solely determined by the deceleration rate.
0.00 s
0.00…1000.00 s
Speed delay.
1=1s
21.32
Speed comp stop
threshold
This parameter sets a speed threshold below which the
Speed compensated stop feature is disabled. In this speed
region, the speed compensated stop is not attempted and the
drive stops as it would, using the ramp option.
10%
0…100%
Speed threshold as a percent of the motor nominal speed.
1 = 1%
192 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
22
Def/FbEq16
22 Speed reference
selection
Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 420…424.
22.01
Speed ref unlimited
Displays the output of the speed reference selection block.
See the control chain diagram on page 423.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Value of the selected speed reference.
See par.
46.01
Ext1 speed ref1
Selects Ext1 speed reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.13 Ext1
speed function) applied to the two signals creates an Ext1
reference (A in the figure below).
A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can be
used to switch between Ext1 reference and the
corresponding Ext2 reference defined by parameters 22.18
Ext2 speed ref1, 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 and 22.20 Ext2
speed function (B in the figure below).
AI1 scaled
22.11
22.11
0
AI
FB
… …
22.13
Ref1
ADD
Other
SUB
22.12
MUL
A
MIN
Ext1
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
19.11
Other
0
22.86
1
22.18
0
AI
FB
… …
22.20
Ref1
ADD
Other
SUB
MUL
22.19
Ext2
B
MIN
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
Other
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
4
Parameters 193
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
5
EFB ref1
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 142).
8
EFB ref2
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 142).
9
Motor
potentiometer
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor
potentiometer).
15
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
16
Frequency input
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI6 is used as a frequency
input).
17
Control panel (ref
saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141)
saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
18
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Control panel (ref
copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141) for
the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
19
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
22.12
Ext1 speed ref2
Selects Ext1 speed reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
22.13
Ext1 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference
Ref1
sources selected by parameters 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 and
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
Zero
Ref1
Signal selected by 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 is used as speed
reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference
1.
1
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] - [22.12 Ext1 speed
ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 × ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2)
The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2)
The greater of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
5
194 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
22.18
Ext2 speed ref1
Selects Ext2 speed reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.20 Ext2
speed function) applied to the two signals creates an Ext2
reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
4
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
5
EFB ref1
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 142).
8
EFB ref2
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 142).
9
Motor
potentiometer
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor
potentiometer).
15
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
16
Frequency input
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI6 is used as a frequency
input).
17
Control panel (ref
saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141)
saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
18
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Control panel (ref
copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141) for
the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
19
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
22.19
Ext2 speed ref2
Selects Ext2 speed reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1.
22.20
Ext2 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference
sources selected by parameters 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 and
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.18 Ext2 speed
ref1.
Ref1
Ref1
0
Signal selected by Ext2 speed ref1 is used as speed
reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Zero
Parameters 195
No.
22.21
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference
1.
1
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] - [22.12 Ext1 speed
ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 × ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2)
The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2)
The greater of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
5
Constant speed
function
Determines how constant speeds are selected, and whether
the rotation direction signal is considered or not when
applying a constant speed.
0001b
Bit
0
1…15
22.22
Name
Information
Constant speed 1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources
mode
defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24.
0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by
the sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24 respectively.
In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller number takes
priority.
Reserved
0000b…0001b
Constant speed configuration word.
1=1
Constant speed
sel1
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0
(Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 1.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1
(Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.23 Constant
speed sel2 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three
sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows:
DI3
Source defined Source defined Source defined
by par. 22.22
by par. 22.23
by par. 22.24
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Constant speed active
None
Constant speed 1
Constant speed 2
Constant speed 3
Constant speed 4
Constant speed 5
Constant speed 6
Constant speed 7
Not selected
0 (always off).
0
Selected
1 (always on).
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
196 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
22.23
Constant speed
sel2
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0
DI4
(Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1
(Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant
speed sel1 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three
sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table
at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
22.24
Constant speed
sel3
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0
Not selected
(Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1
(Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant
speed sel1 and 22.23 Constant speed sel2 select three
sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table
at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
22.26
Constant speed 1
Defines constant speed 1 (the speed the motor will turn when
constant speed 1 is selected).
300.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 1.
See par.
46.01
Constant speed 2
Defines constant speed 2.
600.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 2.
See par.
46.01
Constant speed 3
Defines constant speed 3.
900.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 3.
See par.
46.01
Constant speed 4
Defines constant speed 4.
1200.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 4.
See par.
46.01
Constant speed 5
Defines constant speed 5.
1500.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 5.
See par.
46.01
Constant speed 6
Defines constant speed 6.
2400.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 6.
See par.
46.01
Constant speed 7
Defines constant speed 7.
3000.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 7.
See par.
46.01
22.27
22.28
22.29
22.30
22.31
22.32
Def/FbEq16
Parameters 197
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
22.41
Speed ref safe
Defines a safe speed reference value that is used with
supervision functions such as
• 12.03 AI supervision function
• 49.05 Communication loss action
• 50.02 FBA A comm loss func.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Safe speed reference.
See par.
46.01
Jogging 1 ref
Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1. For more
information on jogging, see page 98.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference for jogging function 1.
See par.
46.01
Jogging 2 ref
Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2. For more
information on jogging, see page 98.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference for jogging function 2.
See par.
46.01
Critical speed
function
Enables/disables the critical speeds function. Also
determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both
rotating directions or not.
See also section Critical speeds/frequencies (page 97).
0000b
22.42
22.43
22.51
22.52
22.53
22.54
22.55
Bit
0
Name
Enable
1
Sign mode
2…15
Reserved
Information
1 = Enable: Critical speeds enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical speeds disabled.
1 = Signed: The signs of parameters 22.52…22.57 are taken into
account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 22.52…22.57 are handled as absolute values.
Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
0000b…0011b
Critical speeds configuration word.
1=1
Critical speed 1 low
Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
22.53 Critical speed 1 high.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Low limit for critical speed 1.
See par.
46.01
Critical speed 1
high
Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
22.52 Critical speed 1 low.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
High limit for critical speed 1.
See par.
46.01
Critical speed 2 low
Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
22.55 Critical speed 2 high.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Low limit for critical speed 2.
See par.
46.01
Critical speed 2
high
Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
22.54 Critical speed 2 low.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
High limit for critical speed 2.
See par.
46.01
198 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
22.56
Critical speed 3 low
Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
22.57 Critical speed 3 high.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Low limit for critical speed 3.
See par.
46.01
Critical speed 3
high
Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
22.56 Critical speed 3 low.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
High limit for critical speed 3.
See par.
46.01
Motor
potentiometer
function
Activates and selects the mode of the motor potentiometer.
See section Speed control performance figures (page 102).
Disabled
22.57
22.71
22.72
22.73
Disabled
Motor potentiometer is disabled and its value set to 0.
0
Enabled (init at
power-up)
When enabled, the motor potentiometer first adopts the value
defined by parameter 22.72 Motor potentiometer initial value.
The value can then be adjusted from the up and down
sources defined by parameters 22.73 Motor potentiometer up
source and 22.74 Motor potentiometer down source.
A power cycle will reset the motor potentiometer to the
predefined initial value (22.72).
1
Enabled (resume at
power-up)
As Enabled (init at power-up), but the motor potentiometer
value is retained over a power cycle.
2
Enabled (init to
actual)
Whenever another reference source is selected, the value of
the motor potentiometer follows that reference. After the
source of reference returns to the motor potentiometer, its
value can again be changed by the up and down sources
(defined by 22.73 and 22.74).
3
Motor
potentiometer initial
value
Defines an initial value (starting point) for the motor
potentiometer. See the selections of parameter 22.71 Motor
potentiometer function.
0.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Initial value for motor potentiometer.
1=1
Motor
potentiometer up
source
Selects the source of motor potentiometer up signal.
0 = No change
1 = Increase motor potentiometer value. (If both the up and
down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not
change.)
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Parameters 199
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
22.74
Motor
potentiometer down
source
Selects the source of motor potentiometer down signal.
0 = No change
1 = Decrease motor potentiometer value. (If both the up and
down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not
change.)
For the selections, see parameter 22.73 Motor potentiometer
up source.
Not selected
22.75
Motor
potentiometer ramp
time
Defines the change rate of the motor potentiometer. This
parameter specifies the time required for the motor
potentiometer to change from minimum (22.76) to maximum
(22.77). The same change rate applies in both directions.
40.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s
Motor potentiometer change time.
10 = 1 s
22.76
Motor
potentiometer min
value
Defines the minimum value of the motor potentiometer.
Note: If vector control mode is used, value of this parameter
must be changed.
0.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Motor potentiometer minimum.
1=1
Motor
potentiometer max
value
Defines the maximum value of the motor potentiometer.
Note: If vector control mode is used, value of this parameter
must be changed.
50.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Motor potentiometer maximum.
1=1
Motor
potentiometer ref
act
The output of the motor potentiometer function. (The motor
potentiometer is configured using parameters 22.71…22.74.)
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00
Value of motor potentiometer.
1=1
Speed reference
act 6
Displays the value of the speed reference (Ext1 or Ext2) that
has been selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection. See diagram
at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 or the control chain diagram on page
420.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference after additive 2.
See par.
46.01
Speed reference
act 7
Displays the value of speed reference before application of
critical speeds. See the control chain diagram on page 423.
The value is received from 22.86 Speed reference act 6
unless overridden by
• any constant speed
• a jogging reference
• network control reference
• control panel reference
• safe speed reference.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference before application of critical speeds.
See par.
46.01
22.77
22.80
22.86
22.87
200 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
23
Description
Def/FbEq16
23 Speed reference
ramp
Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the
acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
See the control chain diagram on page 424.
23.01
Speed ref ramp
input
Displays the used speed reference (in rpm) before it enters
the ramping and shaping functions. See the control chain
diagram on page 424.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference before ramping and shaping.
See par.
46.01
Speed ref ramp
output
Displays the ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm.
See the control chain diagram on page 424.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference after ramping and shaping.
See par.
46.01
Ramp set selection
Selects the source that switches between the two sets of
acceleration/deceleration ramp times defined by parameters
23.12…23.15.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are active
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are active
DI5
Acc/Dec time 1
0.
0
Acc/Dec time 2
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
FBA A
Reserved.
18
EFB
Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
20
23.02
23.11
23.12
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Acceleration time 1
Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed
to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 46.01
Speed scaling (not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed).
If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration
rate.
If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed
the drive torque limits.
20.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Acceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
Parameters 201
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
23.13
Deceleration time 1
Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed
to change from the speed defined by parameter 46.01 Speed
scaling (not from parameter 30.12 Maximum speed) to zero.
If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference.
If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate,
the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.
If the deceleration rate is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed
drive torque limits (or not to exceed a safe DC link voltage). If
there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too
short, ensure that DC overvoltage control is on (parameter
30.30 Overvoltage control).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, the drive should be equipped with braking
equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor.
20.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Deceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
Acceleration time 2
Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 23.12
Acceleration time 1.
60.000 s
23.14
0.000…1800.000 s
Acceleration time 2.
10 = 1 s
23.15
Deceleration time 2
Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 23.13
Deceleration time 1.
60.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Deceleration time 2.
10 = 1 s
23.20
Acc time jogging
Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function ie. the
time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed
value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
See section Rush control (page 98).
60.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Acceleration time for jogging.
10 = 1 s
23.21
Dec time jogging
Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function ie. the
time required for the speed to change from the speed value
defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling to zero.
See section Rush control (page 98).
60.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Deceleration time for jogging.
10 = 1 s
23.23
Emergency stop
time
Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an
emergency stop Off3 is activated (ie. the time required for the
speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter
46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling to zero).
Emergency stop mode and activation source are selected by
parameters 21.04 Emergency stop mode and 21.05
Emergency stop source respectively. Emergency stop can
also be activated through fieldbus.
Note:
• Emergency stop Off1 uses the standard deceleration ramp
as defined by parameters 23.11…23.15.
• The same parameter value is also used in frequency
control mode (ramp parameters 28.71…28.75).
3.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Emergency stop Off3 deceleration time.
10 = 1 s
202 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
23.28
Variable slope
enable
Activates the variable slope function, which controls the slope
of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. This
allows for a constantly variable ramp rate to be generated,
instead of just the standard two ramps normally available.
If the update interval of the signal from an external control
system and the variable slope rate (23.29 Variable slope rate)
are equal, speed reference (23.02 Speed ref ramp output) is
a straight line.
Off
Speed reference
Speed
reference
t
A
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Time
t = update interval of signal from external control system
A = speed reference change during t
This function is only active in remote control.
23.29
Off
Variable slope disabled.
0
On
Variable slope enabled (not available in local control).
1
Variable slope rate
Defines the rate of the speed reference change when variable
slope is enabled by parameter 23.28 Variable slope enable.
For the best result, enter the reference update interval into
this parameter.
50 ms
2…30000 ms
Variable slope rate.
1 = 1 ms
Parameters 203
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
23.32
Shape time 1
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps
used with the set 1.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal
for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical
curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
Acceleration:
0.100 s
Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s
Speed
Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s
S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s
Time
Deceleration:
Speed
S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s
Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s
Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s
Time
23.33
0.100…1800.000 s
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and
deceleration.
10 = 1 s
Shape time 2
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps
used with the set 2. See parameter 23.32 Shape time 1.
0.100 s
0.100…1800.000 s
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and
deceleration.
10 = 1 s
204 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
24
Description
Def/FbEq16
24 Speed reference
conditioning
Speed error calculation; speed error window control
configuration; speed error step.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 425 and 426.
24.01
Used speed
reference
Displays the ramped and corrected speed reference (before
speed error calculation). See the control chain diagram on
page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed reference used for speed error calculation.
See par.
46.01
Used speed
feedback
Displays the speed feedback used for speed error calculation.
See the control chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Speed feedback used for speed error calculation.
See par.
46.01
Speed error filtered
Displays the filtered speed error. See the control chain
diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.0…
30000.0 rpm
Filtered speed error.
See par.
46.01
Speed error
inverted
Displays the inverted (unfiltered) speed error. See the control
chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.0…
30000.0 rpm
Inverted speed error.
See par.
46.01
Speed correction
Defines a speed reference correction, ie. a value added to the
existing reference between ramping and limitation. This is
useful to trim the speed if necessary, for example to adjust
draw between sections of a paper machine.
See the control chain diagram on page 425.
0.00 rpm
-10000.00…
10000.00 rpm
Speed reference correction.
See par.
46.01
Speed error filter
time
Defines the time constant of the speed error low-pass filter.
If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible
interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with
the speed error filter. Reducing the ripple with this filter may
cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time
constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another. A
very long filter time results in unstable control.
0 ms
0…10000 ms
Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled.
1 = 1 ms
24.02
24.03
24.04
24.11
24.12
25
25 Speed control
Speed controller settings.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 425 and 426.
25.01
Torque reference
speed control
Displays the speed controller output that is transferred to the torque controller. See the control chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0%
Limited speed controller output torque.
See par.
46.03
Parameters 205
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
25.02
Speed proportional
gain
Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. Too
high a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below
shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
10.00
%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Error value
Controller output
Controller
output = Kp × e
e = Error value
Time
If gain is set to 1, a 10% change in error value (reference actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by
10%, ie. the output value is input × gain.
0.00…250.00
Proportional gain for speed controller.
100 = 1
206 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
25.03
Speed integration
time
Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The
integration time defines the rate at which the controller output
changes when the error value is constant and the
proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter the
integration time, the faster the continuous error value is
corrected. This time constant must be set to the same order
of magnitude as the time constant (time to respond) of the
actual mechanical system being controlled, otherwise
instability will result.
Setting the integration time to zero disables the I-part of the
controller. This is useful to do when tuning the proportional
gain; adjust the proportional gain first, then return the
integration time.
Anti-windup (the integrator just integrates up to 100%) stops
the integrator if the controller output is limited.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an
error step when the error remains constant.
2.50 s
%
Controller output
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp × e
Kp × e
e = Error value
Time
TI
0.00…1000.00 s
Integration time for speed controller.
10 = 1 s
Parameters 207
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
25.04
Speed derivation
time
Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. Derivative
action boosts the controller output if the error value changes.
The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller
output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is
set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise
as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more
responsive for disturbances. For simple applications
(especially those without a pulse encoder), derivative time is
not normally required and should be left at zero.
The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass
filter to eliminate disturbances.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an
error step when the error remains constant.
0.000 s
%
Controller output
K p × TD ×
Δe
Ts
Kp × e
Error value
Kp × e
e = Error value
TI
Time
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 250 µs
Δe = Error value change between two samples
0.000…10.000 s
25.05
Derivation time for speed controller.
1000 = 1 s
Derivation filter time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See parameter
25.04 Speed derivation time.
8 ms
0…10000 ms
1 = 1 ms
Derivation filter time constant.
208 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
25.06
Acc comp
derivation time
Defines the derivation time for acceleration(/deceleration)
compensation. In order to compensate for a high inertia load
during acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to
the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative
action is described under parameter 25.04 Speed derivation
time.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value
between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time
constants of the motor and the driven machine.
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high
inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration compensation:
0.00 s
Speed reference
Actual speed
Time
Acceleration compensation:
Speed reference
Actual speed
Time
0.00…1000.00 s
Acceleration compensation derivation time.
10 = 1 s
25.07
Acc comp filter time Defines the acceleration (or deceleration) compensation filter
time constant. See parameters 25.04 Speed derivation time
and 25.06 Acc comp derivation time.
8.0 ms
0.0…1000.0 ms
Acceleration/deceleration compensation filter time.
1 = 1 ms
25.15
Proportional gain
em stop
Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller when an
emergency stop is active. See parameter 25.02 Speed
proportional gain.
10.00
1.00…250.00
Proportional gain upon an emergency stop.
100 = 1
Parameters 209
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
25.53
Torque prop
reference
Displays the output of the proportional (P) part of the speed
controller. See the control chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.0…
30000.0%
P-part output of speed controller.
See par.
46.03
Torque integral
reference
Displays the output of the integral (I) part of the speed
controller. See the control chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.0…
30000.0%
I-part output of speed controller.
See par.
46.03
Torque deriv
reference
Displays the output of the derivative (D) part of the speed
controller. See the control chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.0…
30000.0%
D-part output of speed controller.
See par.
46.03
Torque acc
compensation
Displays the output of the acceleration compensation
function. See the control chain diagram on page 425.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-30000.0…
30000.0%
Output of acceleration compensation function.
See par.
46.03
25.54
25.55
25.56
26
26 Torque reference
chain
Settings for the torque reference chain.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 427 and 428.
26.01
Torque reference to
TC
Displays the final torque reference given to the torque
controller in percent. This reference is then acted upon by
various final limiters, like power, torque, load etc.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 428 and 429.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Torque reference for torque control.
See par.
46.03
Torque reference
used
Displays the final torque reference (in percent of motor
nominal torque) given to the torque controller, and comes
after frequency, voltage and torque limitation.
See the control chain diagram on page 429.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Torque reference for torque control.
See par.
46.03
Minimum torque ref
Defines the minimum torque reference. Allows for local
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to the
torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting, refer to
parameter 30.19 Minimum torque 1.
-300.0%
-1000.0…0.0%
Minimum torque reference.
See par.
46.03
26.02
26.08
26.09
Maximum torque ref Defines the maximum torque reference. Allows for local
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to the
torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting, refer to
parameter 30.20 Maximum torque 1.
300.0%
0.0…1000.0%
See par.
46.03
Maximum torque reference.
210 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
26.11
Torque ref1 source
Selects torque reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
26.12 Torque ref2 source. A digital source selected by 26.14
Torque ref1/2 selection can be used to switch between the
two sources, or a mathematical function (26.13 Torque ref1
function) applied to the two signals to create the reference.
Zero
26.13
26.11
0
AI
FB
… …
Ref1
ADD
26.70
SUB
26.14
MUL
Other
0
MIN
26.72
MAX
1
26.12
0
AI
FB
… …
26.71
Other
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
4
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
5
EFB ref1
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 142).
8
EFB ref2
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 142).
9
Motor
potentiometer
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor
potentiometer).
15
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
16
Frequency input
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI6 is used as a frequency
input).
17
Control panel (ref
saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141)
saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
18
Reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Parameters 211
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Control panel (ref
copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141) for
the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
19
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
26.12
Torque ref2 source
Selects torque reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
26.13
Torque ref1 function Selects a mathematical function between the reference
sources selected by parameters 26.11 Torque ref1 source
and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. See diagram at 26.11 Torque
ref1 source.
Ref1
Ref1
Signal selected by 26.11 Torque ref1 source is used as torque
reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as torque reference
1.
1
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([26.11 Torque ref1 source] - [26.12 Torque
ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used as torque
reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 × ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as torque
reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2)
The smaller of the reference sources is used as torque
reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2)
The greater of the reference sources is used as torque
reference 1.
5
Torque ref1/2
selection
Configures the selection between torque references 1 and 2.
See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
0 = Torque reference 1
1 = Torque reference 2
Torque
reference 1
Torque reference 1
0.
0
Torque reference 2
1.
1
Follow Ext1/Ext2
selection
Torque reference 1 is used when external control location
EXT1 is active. Torque reference 2 is used when external
control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
2
26.14
Zero
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
212 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Def/FbEq16
26.17
Torque ref filter time Defines a low-pass filter time constant for the torque
reference.
0.000 s
0.000…30.000 s
Filter time constant for torque reference.
1000 = 1 s
26.18
Torque ramp up
time
Defines the torque reference ramp-up time, ie. the time for the
reference to increase from zero to nominal motor torque.
0.000 s
0.000…60.000 s
Torque reference ramp-up time.
100 = 1 s
26.19
Torque ramp down
time
Defines the torque reference ramp-down time, ie. the time for 0.000 s
the reference to decrease from nominal motor torque to zero.
0.000…60.000 s
Torque reference ramp-down time.
26.21
Torque sel torque in Selects the source for 26.74 Torque ref ramp out.
Torque ref
torq ctrl
Not selected
None.
0
Torque ref torq ctrl
Torque reference from the torque chain.
1
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Torque sel speed in
Selects the source for 25.01 Torque reference speed control.
Torque ref
speed ctrl
Not selected
None.
0
Torque ref speed
ctrl
Torque reference from the speed chain.
1
26.22
26.70
26.71
26.72
26.73
100 = 1 s
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Torque reference
act 1
Displays the value of torque reference source 1 (selected by
parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source). See the control chain
diagram on page 427.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Value of torque reference source 1.
See par.
46.03
Torque reference
act 2
Displays the value of torque reference source 2 (selected by
parameter 26.12 Torque ref2 source). See the control chain
diagram on page 427.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Value of torque reference source 2.
See par.
46.03
Torque reference
act 3
Displays the torque reference after the function applied by
parameter 26.13 Torque ref1 function (if any), and after
selection (26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection). See the control
chain diagram on page 427.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Torque reference after selection.
See par.
46.03
Torque reference
act 4
Displays the torque reference after application of reference
additive 1. See the control chain diagram on page 427.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Torque reference after application of reference additive 1.
See par.
46.03
Parameters 213
No.
Name/Value
26.74
Torque ref ramp out Displays the torque reference after limiting and ramping. See
the control chain diagram on page 427.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Torque reference after limiting and ramping.
See par.
46.03
Torque reference
act 5
Displays the torque reference after control mode selection.
See the control chain diagram on page 429.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-1600.0…1600.0%
Torque reference after control mode selection.
See par.
46.03
26.75
Description
Def/FbEq16
28
28 Frequency reference Settings for the frequency reference chain.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 430 and 421.
chain
28.01
28.02
Frequency ref ramp
input
Displays the used frequency reference before ramping. See
the control chain diagram on page 430.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Frequency reference before ramping.
See par.
46.02
Frequency ref ramp
output
Displays the final frequency reference (after selection,
limitation and ramping). See the control chain diagram on
page 430.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Final frequency reference.
See par.
46.02
214 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
28.11
Ext1 frequency ref1
Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.13
Ext1 frequency function) applied to the two signals creates an
Ext1 reference (A in the figure below).
A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can be
used to switch between Ext1 reference and the
corresponding Ext2 reference defined by parameters 28.15
Ext2 frequency ref1, 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 and 28.17
Ext2 frequency function (B in the figure below).
AI1 scaled
28.11
0
AI
FB
… …
28.13
Ref1
ADD
Other
SUB
28.12
MUL
A
MIN
Ext1
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
19.11
Other
0
28.92
1
28.15
0
AI
FB
… …
28.17
Ref1
ADD
Other
SUB
MUL
28.16
Ext2
B
MIN
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
Other
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
4
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
5
EFB ref1
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 142).
8
EFB ref2
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 142).
9
Motor
potentiometer
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor
potentiometer).
15
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
16
Parameters 215
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Frequency input
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI6 is used as a frequency
input).
17
Control panel (ref
saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141)
saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
18
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Control panel (ref
copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141) for
the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
19
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
28.12
Ext1 frequency ref2
Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero
28.13
Ext1 frequency
function
Selects a mathematical function between the reference
sources selected by parameters 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
and 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1
frequency ref1.
Ref1
Ref1
Signal selected by 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 is used as
frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency
reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1] - [28.12 Ext1
frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as
frequency reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 × ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as
frequency reference 1.
3
Min (ref1, ref2)
The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency
reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2)
The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency
reference 1.
5
Ext2 frequency ref1
Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.17
Ext2 frequency function) applied to the two signals creates an
Ext2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
28.15
216 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
4
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
5
EFB ref1
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 142).
8
EFB ref2
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 142).
9
Motor
potentiometer
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor
potentiometer).
15
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
16
Frequency input
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI6 is used as a frequency
input).
17
Control panel (ref
saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141)
saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
18
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Control panel (ref
copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141) for
the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
19
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
28.16
Ext2 frequency ref2
Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1.
Zero
28.17
Ext2 frequency
function
Selects a mathematical function between the reference
sources selected by parameters 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1
and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.15 Ext2
frequency ref1.
Ref1
Ref1
Signal selected by 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 is used as
frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
0
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency
reference 1.
1
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1] - [28.16 Ext2
frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as
frequency reference 1.
2
Mul (ref1 × ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as
frequency reference 1.
3
Parameters 217
No.
28.21
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Min (ref1, ref2)
The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency
reference 1.
4
Max (ref1, ref2)
The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency
reference 1.
5
Constant frequency
function
Determines how constant frequencies are selected, and
whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not
when applying a constant frequency.
0001b
Bit
0
28.22
Name
Const freq
mode
Information
1 = Packed: 7 constant frequencies are selectable using the three
sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24.
0 = Separate: Constant frequencies 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated
by the sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24
respectively. In case of conflict, the constant frequency with the smaller
number takes priority.
0000b…0001b
Constant frequency configuration word.
1=1
Constant frequency
sel1
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
frequency 1.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.23 Constant
frequency sel2 and 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 select
three sources whose states activate constant frequencies as
follows:
DI3
Source defined Source defined Source defined
by par. 28.22
by par. 28.23
by par. 28.24
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Constant frequency
active
None
Constant frequency 1
Constant frequency 2
Constant frequency 3
Constant frequency 4
Constant frequency 5
Constant frequency 6
Constant frequency 7
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
218 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
28.23
Constant frequency
sel2
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
frequency 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.22 Constant
frequency sel1 and 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 select
three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies.
See table at parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant frequency
sel1.
DI4
28.24
Constant frequency
sel3
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
frequency 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.22 Constant
frequency sel1 and 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 select
three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies.
See table at parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant frequency
sel1.
Not selected
28.26
Constant frequency
1
Defines constant frequency 1 (the frequency the motor will
turn when constant frequency 1 is selected).
5.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 1.
See par.
46.02
Constant frequency
2
Defines constant frequency 2.
10.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 2.
See par.
46.02
Constant frequency
3
Defines constant frequency 3.
15.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 3.
See par.
46.02
Constant frequency
4
Defines constant frequency 4.
20.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 4.
See par.
46.02
Constant frequency
5
Defines constant frequency 5.
25.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 5.
See par.
46.02
Constant frequency
6
Defines constant frequency 6.
40.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 6.
See par.
46.02
28.27
28.28
28.29
28.30
28.31
Parameters 219
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
28.32
Constant frequency
7
Defines constant frequency 7.
50.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Constant frequency 7.
See par.
46.02
Frequency ref safe
Defines a safe frequency reference value that is used with
supervision functions such as
• 12.03 AI supervision function
• 49.05 Communication loss action
• 50.02 FBA A comm loss func.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Safe frequency reference.
See par.
46.02
Critical frequency
function
Enables/disables the critical frequencies function. Also
determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both
rotating directions or not.
See also section Critical speeds/frequencies (page 97).
0000b
28.41
28.51
28.52
28.53
28.54
28.55
28.56
Bit
0
Name
Crit freq
1
Sign mode
Information
1 = Enable: Critical frequencies enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical frequencies disabled.
1 = According to par: The signs of parameters 28.52…28.57 are taken
into account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 28.52…28.57 are handled as absolute values.
Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
0000b…0011b
Critical frequencies configuration word.
1=1
Critical frequency 1
low
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 1.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Low limit for critical frequency 1.
See par.
46.02
Critical frequency 1
high
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 1.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
High limit for critical frequency 1.
See par.
46.02
Critical frequency 2
low
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 2.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Low limit for critical frequency 2.
See par.
46.02
Critical frequency 2
high
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 2.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
28.54 Critical frequency 2 low.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
High limit for critical frequency 2.
See par.
46.02
Critical frequency 3
low
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 3.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Low limit for critical frequency 3.
See par.
46.02
220 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
28.57
Critical frequency 3
high
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low.
0.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
High limit for critical frequency 3.
See par.
46.02
Freq ramp set
selection
Selects a source that switches between the two sets of
acceleration/deceleration times defined by parameters
28.72…28.75.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in force
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force
DI5
Acc/Dec time 1
0.
0
Acc/Dec time 2
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
FBA A
Reserved.
18
EFB
Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
20
28.71
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
28.72
Freq acceleration
time 1
Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the
frequency to change from zero to the frequency defined by
parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. After this frequency has
been reached, the acceleration continues with the same rate
to the value defined by parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency.
If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration
rate, the motor will follow the acceleration rate.
If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration
rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed
the drive torque limits.
20.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Acceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
28.73
Freq deceleration
time 1
Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the
frequency to change from the frequency defined by
parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling (not from parameter
30.14 Maximum frequency) to zero.
If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too
short, ensure that DC overvoltage control (30.30 Overvoltage
control) is on.
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, the drive should be equipped with braking
equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor.
20.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Deceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
28.74
Freq acceleration
time 2
Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 28.72 Freq
acceleration time 1.
60.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Acceleration time 2.
10 = 1 s
Parameters 221
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
28.75
Freq deceleration
time 2
Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 28.73 Freq
deceleration time 1.
60.000 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Deceleration time 2.
10 = 1 s
28.76
Freq ramp in zero
source
Selects a source that forces the frequency reference to zero.
0 = Force frequency reference to zero
1 = Normal operation
Inactive
Active
0.
0
Inactive
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
222 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
28.82
Shape time 1
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps
used with the set 1.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal
for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical
curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
Acceleration:
0.100 s
Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s
Speed
Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s
S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s
Time
Deceleration:
Speed
S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s
Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s
Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s
Time
28.83
0.000…1800.000 s
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and
deceleration.
10 = 1 s
Shape time 2
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps
used with the set 2. See parameter 28.82 Shape time 1.
0.100 s
0.000…1800.000 s
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and
deceleration.
10 = 1 s
Parameters 223
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
28.92
Frequency ref act 3
Displays the frequency reference after the function applied by
parameter 28.13 Ext1 frequency function (if any), and after
selection (19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection). See the control chain
diagram on page 430.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Frequency reference after selection.
See par.
46.02
Frequency ref act 7
Displays the frequency reference after application of constant
frequencies, control panel reference, etc. See the control
chain diagram on page 430.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Frequency reference 7.
See par.
46.02
Frequency ref
unlimited
Displays the frequency reference after application of critical
frequencies, but before ramping and limiting. See the control
chain diagram on page 421.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Frequency reference before ramping and limiting.
See par.
46.02
28.96
28.97
30
30 Limits
Drive operation limits.
30.01
Displays limit word 1.
This parameter is read-only.
Limit word 1
Bit
0
Name
Torq lim
1…2
3
Reserved
Torq ref max
-
Description
1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control (undervoltage
control, current control, load angle control or pull-out control), or by the
torque limits defined by parameters.
1 = Torque reference is being limited by 26.09 Maximum torque ref or
30.20 Maximum torque 1
4
Torq ref min
1 = Torque reference is being limited by 26.08 Minimum torque ref or
30.19 Minimum torque 1
5
Tlim max speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of
maximum speed limit (30.12 Maximum speed)
6
Tlim min speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of
minimum speed limit (30.11 Minimum speed)
7
Max speed ref lim 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.12 Maximum speed
8
Min speed ref lim 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.11 Minimum speed
9
Max freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.14 Maximum frequency
10
Min freq ref lim
1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.13 Minimum frequency
11…15 Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Limit word 1.
1=1
224 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
30.02
Torque limit status
Displays the torque controller limitation status word.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
1
2
Description
*1 = Intermediate DC circuit undervoltage
*1 = Intermediate DC circuit overvoltage
*1 = Torque is being limited by 30.19 Minimum torque 1, 30.26 Power
motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
3
Maximum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.20 Maximum torque 1, 30.26 Power
motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
4
Internal current 1 = An inverter current limit (identified by bits 8…11) is active
5
Load angle
(With permanent magnet motors and reluctance motors only)
1 = Load angle limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more
torque
6
Motor pullout
(With asynchronous motors only)
Motor pull-out limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more
torque
7
Reserved
8
Thermal
1 = Input current is being limited by the main circuit thermal limit
9
Max current
*1 = Maximum output current (IMAX) is being limited
10
User current
*1 = Output current is being limited by 30.17 Maximum current
11
Thermal IGBT
*1 = Output current is being limited by a calculated thermal current
value
12…15 Reserved
*Only one out of bits 0…3, and one out of bits 9…11 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically
indicates the limit that is exceeded first.
30.11
30.12
30.13
Name
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Minimum torque
0000h…FFFFh
Torque limitation status word.
1=1
Minimum speed
Defines the minimum allowed speed.
WARNING! This value must not be higher than 30.12
Maximum speed.
WARNING! In speed control mode only. In frequency
control mode, use frequency limits (30.13 and 30.14).
-1500.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Minimum allowed speed.
See par.
46.01
Maximum speed
Defines the maximum allowed speed.
WARNING! This value must not be lower than 30.11
Minimum speed.
WARNING! In speed control mode only. In frequency
control mode, use frequency limits (30.13 and 30.14).
1500.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Maximum speed.
See par.
46.01
Minimum frequency Defines the minimum allowed frequency.
WARNING! This value must not be higher than 30.14
Maximum frequency.
WARNING! in frequency control mode only.
-50.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
See par.
46.02
Minimum frequency.
Parameters 225
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
30.14
Maximum
frequency
Defines the maximum allowed frequency.
WARNING! This value must not be lower than 30.13
Minimum frequency.
WARNING! in frequency control mode only.
50.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00
Hz
Maximum frequency.
See par.
46.02
30.17
30.18
Maximum current
Defines the maximum allowed motor current.
0.00 A
0.00…30000.00 A
Maximum motor current.
1=1A
Torq lim sel
Selects a source that switches between two different
predefined minimum torque limit sets.
0 = minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum
torque limit defined by 30.20 are active
1 = minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum
torque limit defined by 30.22 are active
The user can define two sets of torque limits, and switch
between the sets using a binary source such as a digital
input.
The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.19 and
30.20. The second set has selector parameters for both the
minimum (30.21) and maximum (30.22) limits that allows the
use of a selectable analog source (such as an analog input).
Torque limit
set 1
30.21
0
AI1
AI2
PID
30.23
Other
30.18
1
0
User-defined
minimum torque
limit
30.19
30.22
0
AI1
AI2
PID
30.24
Other
30.18
1
0
User-defined
maximum torque
limit
30.20
Note: In addition to the user-defined limits, torque may be
limited for other reasons (such as power limitation). Refer to
the block diagram on page 429.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
Torque limit set 1
0 (minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum
torque limit defined by 30.20 are active).
0
Torque limit set 2
1 (minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum
torque limit defined by 30.22 are active).
1
2
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
226 Parameters
No.
30.19
30.20
30.21
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
FBA A
Reserved.
10
EFB
Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 15 received
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
11
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Minimum torque 1
Defines a minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of
nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18 Torq
lim sel.
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
-300.0%
-1600.0…0.0%
Minimum torque limit 1.
See par.
46.03
Maximum torque 1
Defines a maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of
nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18 Torq
lim sel.
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
300.0%
0.0…1600.0%
Maximum torque 1.
See par.
46.03
Min torque 2 source Defines the source of the minimum torque limit for the drive
(in percent of nominal motor torque) when
• the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1,
or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Note: Any positive values received from the selected source
are inverted.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
Minimum
torque 2
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
15
Minimum torque 2
30.23 Minimum torque 2.
16
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Parameters 227
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
30.22
Max torque 2
source
Defines the source of the maximum torque limit for the drive
(in percent of nominal motor torque) when
• the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1,
or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Note: Any negative values received from the selected source
are inverted.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
Maximum
torque 2
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID
controller).
15
16
Maximum torque 2
30.24 Maximum torque 2.
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Minimum torque 2
Defines the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of
nominal motor torque) when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2
and
• 30.21 Min torque 2 source is set to Minimum torque 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
-300.0%
-1600.0…0.0%
Minimum torque limit 2.
See par.
46.03
Maximum torque 2
Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of
nominal motor torque) when
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2
and
• 30.22 Max torque 2 source is set to Maximum torque 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
WARNING! In torque control mode (vector motor
control) only.
300.0%
0.0…1600.0%
Maximum torque limit 2.
See par.
46.03
30.26
Power motoring
limit
Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the
motor in percent of nominal motor power.
300.00%
0.00…600.00%
Maximum motoring power.
1 = 1%
30.27
Power generating
limit
Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to the
inverter in percent of nominal motor power.
-300.00%
-600.00…0.00%
Maximum generating power.
1 = 1%
30.23
30.24
228 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
30.30
Overvoltage control
Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise
to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage
from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper and
resistor, or a regenerative supply unit, the controller must be
disabled.
Enable
Disable
Overvoltage control disabled.
0
Enable
Overvoltage control enabled.
1
Undervoltage
control
Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the
undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor
torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By
decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the load will cause
regeneration back to the drive, keeping the DC link charged
and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to
a stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality
in systems with high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan.
Enable
Disable
Undervoltage control disabled.
0
Enable
Undervoltage control enabled.
1
30.31
31
31 Fault functions
Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the
drive upon fault situations.
31.01
Defines the source of external event 1.
See also parameter 31.02 External event 1 type.
0 = Trigger event
1 = Normal operation
Inactive
(true)
Active (false)
0.
0
Inactive (true)
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
External event 1
type
Selects the type of external event 1.
31.02
External event 1
source
Fault
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
0
Warning
The external event generates a warning.
1
31.03
External event 2
source
Defines the source of external event 2. See also parameter
31.04 External event 2 type.
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
Inactive
(true)
31.04
External event 2
type
Selects the type of external event 2.
Fault
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
0
Warning
The external event generates a warning.
1
Parameters 229
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
31.05
External event 3
source
Defines the source of external event 3. See also parameter
31.06 External event 3 type.
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
Inactive
(true)
31.06
External event 3
type
Selects the type of external event 3.
Fault
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
0
Warning
The external event generates a warning.
1
31.07
External event 4
source
Defines the source of external event 4. See also parameter
31.08 External event 4 type.
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
Inactive
(true)
31.08
External event 4
type
Selects the type of external event 4.
Fault
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
0
Warning
The external event generates a warning.
1
31.09
External event 5
source
Defines the source of external event 5. See also parameter
31.10 External event 5 type.
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
Inactive
(true)
31.10
External event 5
type
Selects the type of external event 5.
Fault
31.11
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
0
Warning
The external event generates a warning.
1
Fault reset
selection
Selects the source of an external fault reset signal. The signal
resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
0 -> 1 = Reset
Note: A fault reset from the fieldbus interface is always
observed regardless of this parameter.
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
230 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
31.12
Autoreset selection
Selects faults that are automatically reset. The parameter is a
16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type.
Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is
automatically reset.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make
sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The
function restarts the drive automatically and continues
operation after a fault.
The bits of this binary number correspond to the following
faults:
0000h
Bit
0
1
2
3
4…9
10
11
12
13
14
15
31.13
31.14
31.15
Fault
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
AI supervision fault
Reserved
Selectable fault (see parameter 31.13 Selectable fault)
External fault 1 (from source selected by parameter 31.01 External event
External fault 2 (from source selected by parameter 31.03 External event
External fault 3 (from source selected by parameter 31.05 External event
External fault 4 (from source selected by parameter 31.07 External event
External fault 5 (from source selected by parameter 31.09 External event
1 source)
2 source)
3 source)
4 source)
5 source)
0000h…FFFFh
Automatic reset configuration word.
1=1
Selectable fault
Defines the fault that can be automatically reset using
parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection, bit 10.
Faults are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 368).
Note: The fault codes are in hexadecimal. The selected code
must be converted to decimal for this parameter.
0000h
0000h…FFFFh
Fault code.
10 = 1
Number of trials
Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive
performs within the time defined by parameter 31.15 Total
trials time.
0
0…5
Number of automatic resets.
10 = 1
Total trials time
Defines the time the automatic reset function will attempt to
reset the drive. During this time, it will perform the number of
automatic resets defined by 31.14 Number of trials.
30.0 s
1.0…600.0 s
Time for automatic resets.
10 = 1 s
31.16
Delay time
Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.12
Autoreset selection.
0.0 s
0.0…120.0 s
Autoreset delay.
10 = 1 s
31.19
Motor phase loss
Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is
detected.
Fault
No action
No action taken.
0
Fault
The drive trips on fault 3381 Output phase loss.
1
Parameters 231
No.
Name/Value
Description
31.20
Earth fault
Selects how the drive reacts when an earth (ground) fault or
Fault
current unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable.
No action
No action taken.
0
Warning
The drive generates an A2B3 Earth leakage warning.
1
31.21
31.22
Def/FbEq16
Fault
The drive trips on fault 2330 Earth leakage.
2
Supply phase loss
Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is
detected.
Fault
No action
No action taken.
0
Fault
The drive trips on fault 3130 Input phase loss.
1
STO indication
run/stop
Selects which indications are given when one or both Safe
torque off (STO) signals are switched off or lost. The
indications also depend on whether the drive is running or
stopped when this occurs.
The tables at each selection below show the indications
generated with that particular setting.
Notes:
• This parameter does not affect the operation of the STO
function itself. The STO function will operate regardless of
the setting of this parameter: a running drive will stop upon
removal of one or both STO signals, and will not start until
both STO signals are restored and all faults reset.
• The loss of only one STO signal always generates a fault
as it is interpreted as a malfunction.
For more information on the STO, see chapter The Safe
torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Fault/Fault
Fault/Fault
0
Inputs
IN1 IN2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Indication (running or stopped)
Fault 5091 Safe torque off
Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
(Normal operation)
Fault/Warning
1
Inputs
IN1 IN2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Indication
Running
Stopped
Fault 5091 Safe torque Warning A5A0 Safe
off
torque off
Fault FA81 Safe torque Fault FA81 Safe torque
off 1
off 1
Fault FA82 Safe torque Fault FA82 Safe torque
off 2
off 2
(Normal operation)
232 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Fault/Event
2
Inputs
IN1
IN2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Indication
Running
Stopped
Fault 5091 Safe torque
Event B5A0 Safe
off
torque off
Fault FA81 Safe torque Fault FA81 Safe torque
off 1
off 1
Fault FA82 Safe torque Fault FA82 Safe torque
off 2
off 2
(Normal operation)
Warning/Warning
3
Inputs
IN1
IN2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
31.23
Indication (running or stopped)
Warning A5A0 Safe torque off
Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
(Normal operation)
Wiring or earth fault Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and
motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is connected to
drive motor connection).
Fault
No action
No action taken.
0
Fault
The drive trips on fault 3181 Wiring or earth fault.
1
Stall function
Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition.
A stall condition is defined as follows:
• The drive exceeds the stall current limit (31.25 Stall current
limit), and
• the output frequency is below the level set by parameter
31.27 Stall frequency limit or the motor speed is below the
level set by parameter 31.26 Stall speed limit, and
• the conditions above have been true longer than the time
set by parameter 31.28 Stall time.
No action
No action
None (stall supervision disabled).
0
Warning
The drive generates an A780 Motor stall warning.
1
Fault
The drive trips on fault 7121 Motor stall.
2
31.25
Stall current limit
Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the
motor. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
200.0%
0.0…1600.0%
Stall current limit.
-
31.26
Stall speed limit
Stall speed limit in rpm. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
150.00 rpm
0.00…10000.00
rpm
Stall speed limit.
See par.
46.01
Stall frequency limit
Stall frequency limit. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
Note: Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended.
15.00 Hz
0.00…1000.00 Hz
Stall frequency limit.
See par.
46.02
Stall time
Stall time. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
20 s
0…3600 s
Stall time.
-
31.24
31.27
31.28
Parameters 233
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
31.30
Overspeed trip
margin
Defines, together with 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12
Maximum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the motor
(overspeed protection). If the speed (24.02 Used speed
feedback) exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter
30.11 or 30.12 by more than the value of this parameter, the
drive trips on the 7310 Overspeed fault.
WARNING! This function only supervises the speed in
vector motor control mode. The function is not
effective in scalar motor control mode.
Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip
margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.
500.00 rpm
Speed (24.02)
Overspeed trip level
31.30
30.12
0
Time
30.11
31.30
Overspeed trip level
31.32
0.00…10000.00
rpm
Overspeed trip margin.
See par.
46.01
Emergency ramp
supervision
Parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33
Emergency ramp supervision delay, together with the
derivative of 24.02 Used speed feedback, provide a
supervision function for emergency stop modes Off1 and
Off3.
The supervision is based on either
• observing the time within which the motor stops, or
• comparing the actual and expected deceleration rates.
If this parameter is set to 0%, the maximum stop time is
directly set in parameter 31.33. Otherwise, 31.32 defines the
maximum allowed deviation from the expected deceleration
rate, which is calculated from parameters 23.11…23.15 (Off1)
or 23.23 Emergency stop time (Off3). If the actual
deceleration rate (24.02) deviates too much from the
expected rate, the drive trips on 73B0 Emergency ramp
failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word 2, and coasts to a
stop.
If 31.32 is set to 0% and 31.33 is set to 0 s, the emergency
stop ramp supervision is disabled.
See also parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode.
0%
0…300%
Maximum deviation from expected deceleration rate.
1 = 1%
234 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
31.33
Emergency ramp
supervision delay
If parameter 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision is set to 0%,
this parameter defines the maximum time an emergency stop
(mode Off1 or Off3) is allowed to take. If the motor has not
stopped when the time elapses, the drive trips on 73B0
Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word
2, and coasts to a stop.
If 31.32 is set to a value other than 0%, this parameter
defines a delay between the receipt of the emergency stop
command and the activation of the supervision. It is
recommended to specify a short delay to allow the speed
change rate to stabilize.
0s
0…100 s
Maximum ramp-down time, or supervision activation delay.
1=1s
32
32 Supervision
Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…6.
Six values can be chosen to be monitored; a warning or fault
is generated whenever predefined limits are exceeded.
See also section Signal supervision (page 129).
32.01
Signal supervision status word.
Indicates whether the values monitored by the signal
supervision functions are within or outside their respective
limits.
Note: This word is independent of the drive actions defined
by parameters 32.06, 32.16, 32.26, 32.36, 32.46 and 32.56.
Supervision status
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6…15
32.05
Name
Supervision 1 active
Supervision 2 active
Supervision 3 active
Supervision 4 active
Supervision 5 active
Supervision 6 active
Reserved
Description
1 = Signal selected by 32.07 is outside
1 = Signal selected by 32.17 is outside
1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside
1 = Signal selected by 32.37 is outside
1 = Signal selected by 32.47 is outside
1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside
0000b
its limits.
its limits.
its limits.
its limits.
its limits.
its limits.
0000…0111b
Signal supervision status word.
1=1
Supervision 1
function
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 1. Determines
how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.07) is compared
to its lower and upper limits (32.09 and 32.10 respectively).
The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is
selected by 32.06.
Disabled
Disabled
Signal supervision 1 not in use.
0
Low
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
1
High
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper
limit.
2
Abs low
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) lower limit.
3
Abs high
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
4
Both
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or
rises above its high limit.
5
Abs both
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high
limit.
6
Parameters 235
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
32.06
Supervision 1
action
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 1
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by
32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action
No warning or fault generated.
0
Warning
Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated.
1
Fault
Drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision.
2
Supervision 1
signal
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision
function 1.
Frequency
Zero
None.
0
Speed
01.01 Motor speed used (page 139).
1
Frequency
01.06 Output frequency (page 139).
3
Current
01.07 Motor current (page 139).
4
Torque
01.10 Motor torque (page 139).
6
DC voltage
01.11 DC voltage (page 139).
7
32.07
Output power
01.14 Output power (page 140).
8
AI1
12.11 AI1 actual value (page 157).
9
AI2
12.21 AI2 actual value (page 158).
10
Speed ref ramp in
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 200).
18
Speed ref ramp out
23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 200).
19
Speed ref used
24.01 Used speed reference (page 204).
20
Torque ref used
26.02 Torque reference used (page 209).
21
Freq ref used
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 213).
22
Inverter
temperature
05.11 Inverter temperature (page 143).
23
Process PID output
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 261).
24
Process PID
feedback
40.02 Process PID feedback actual (page 262).
25
Process PID
setpoint
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual (page 262).
26
Process PID
deviation
40.04 Process PID deviation actual (page 262).
27
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
32.08
Supervision 1 filter
time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by
signal supervision 1.
0.000 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
32.09
Supervision 1 low
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 1.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Low limit.
-
Supervision 1 high
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 1.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Upper limit.
-
32.10
236 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
32.11
Supervision 1
hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
supervision 1.
0.00
0.00…100000.00
Hysteresis.
-
32.15
Supervision 2
function
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2. Determines
how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.17) is compared
to its lower and upper limits (32.19 and 32.20 respectively).
The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is
selected by 32.16.
Disabled
32.16
Disabled
Signal supervision 2 not in use.
0
Low
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
1
High
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper
limit.
2
Abs low
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) lower limit.
3
Abs high
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
4
Both
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or
rises above its high limit.
5
Abs both
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high
limit.
6
Supervision 2
action
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 2
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by
32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action
No warning or fault generated.
0
Warning
Warning A8B1 Signal supervision is generated.
1
Fault
Drive trips on fault 80B1 Signal supervision.
2
32.17
Supervision 2
signal
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision
function 2.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
Current
32.18
Supervision 2 filter
time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by
signal supervision 2.
0.000 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
32.19
Supervision 2 low
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 2.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Low limit.
-
Supervision 2 high
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 2.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Upper limit.
-
Supervision 2
hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
supervision 2.
0.00
0.00…100000.00
Hysteresis.
-
32.20
32.21
Parameters 237
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
32.25
Supervision 3
function
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3. Determines
how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.27) is compared
to its lower and upper limits (32.29 and 32.30 respectively).
The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is
selected by 32.26.
Disabled
Disabled
Signal supervision 3 not in use.
0
Low
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
1
High
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper
limit.
2
Abs low
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) lower limit.
3
Abs high
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
4
Both
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or
rises above its high limit.
5
Abs both
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high
limit.
6
Supervision 3
action
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 3
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by
32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action
No warning or fault generated.
0
Warning
Warning A8B2 Signal supervision is generated.
1
Fault
Drive trips on fault 80B2 Signal supervision.
2
32.27
Supervision 3
signal
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision
function 3.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
Torque
32.28
Supervision 3 filter
time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by
signal supervision 3.
0.000 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
32.29
Supervision 3 low
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 3.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Low limit.
-
Supervision 3 high
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 3.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Upper limit.
-
32.31
Supervision 3
hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
supervision 3.
0.00
0.00…100000.00
Hysteresis.
-
32.35
Supervision 4
function
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 4. Determines
how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.37) is compared
to its lower and upper limits (32.39 and 32.30 respectively).
The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is
selected by 32.36.
Disabled
Disabled
Signal supervision 4 not in use.
0
Low
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
1
32.26
32.30
238 Parameters
No.
32.36
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
High
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper
limit.
2
Abs low
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) lower limit.
3
Abs high
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
4
Both
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or
rises above its high limit.
5
Abs both
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high
limit.
6
Supervision 4
action
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 4
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by
32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action
No warning or fault generated.
0
Warning
Warning A8B3 Signal supervision is generated.
1
Fault
Drive trips on fault 80B3 Signal supervision.
2
32.37
Supervision 4
signal
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision
function 4.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
Zero
32.38
Supervision 4 filter
time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by
signal supervision 4.
0.000 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
32.39
Supervision 4 low
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 4.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Low limit.
-
Supervision 4 high
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 4.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Upper limit.
-
32.41
Supervision 4
hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
supervision 4.
0.00
0.00…100000.00
Hysteresis.
-
32.45
Supervision 5
function
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 5. Determines
how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.47) is compared
to its lower and upper limits (32.49 and 32.40 respectively).
The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is
selected by 32.46.
Disabled
32.40
Disabled
Signal supervision 5 not in use.
0
Low
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
1
High
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper
limit.
2
Abs low
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) lower limit.
3
Abs high
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
4
Parameters 239
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Both
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or
rises above its high limit.
5
Abs both
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high
limit.
6
Supervision 5
action
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 5
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by
32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action
No warning or fault generated.
0
Warning
Warning A8B4 Signal supervision is generated.
1
Fault
Drive trips on fault 80B4 Signal supervision.
2
32.47
Supervision 5
signal
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision
function 5.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
Zero
32.48
Supervision 5 filter
time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by
signal supervision 5.
0.000 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
32.49
Supervision 5 low
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 5.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Low limit.
-
Supervision 5 high
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 5.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Upper limit.
-
32.51
Supervision 5
hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
supervision 5.
0.00
0.00…100000.00
Hysteresis.
-
32.55
Supervision 6
function
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 6. Determines
how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.57) is compared
to its lower and upper limits (32.59 and 32.50 respectively).
The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is
selected by 32.56.
Disabled
Disabled
Signal supervision 6 not in use.
0
Low
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
1
High
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper
limit.
2
Abs low
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) lower limit.
3
Abs high
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
4
Both
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or
rises above its high limit.
5
Abs both
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls
below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high
limit.
6
32.46
32.50
240 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
32.56
Supervision 6
action
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 6
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by
32.01 Supervision status.
No action
No action
No warning or fault generated.
0
Warning
Warning A8B5 Signal supervision is generated.
1
Fault
Drive trips on fault 80B5 Signal supervision.
2
32.57
Supervision 6
signal
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision
function 6.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
Zero
32.58
Supervision 6 filter
time
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by
signal supervision 6.
0.000 s
0.000 … 30.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
32.59
Supervision 6 low
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 6.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Low limit.
-
Supervision 6 high
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 6.
0.00
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
Upper limit.
-
Supervision 6
hysteresis
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
supervision 6.
0.00
0.00…100000.00
Hysteresis.
-
32.60
32.61
34
34 Timed functions
Configuration of the timed functions.
See also section Timed functions (page 118).
34.01
Status of the combined timers. The status of a combined
timer is the logical OR of all timers connected to it.
This parameter is read-only.
Combined timer
status
Bit
0
1
2
3…15
34.02
Name
Combined timer 1
Combined timer 2
Combined timer 3
Reserved
-
Description
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
0000h…0FFFFh
Status of combined timers 1…3.
1=1
Timer status
Status of timers 1…12.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Parameters 241
No.
Name/Value
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12…15
34.04
Name
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timer 3
Timer 4
Timer 5
Timer 6
Timer 7
Timer 8
Timer 9
Timer 10
Timer 11
Timer 12
Reserved
Def/FbEq16
Description
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
0000h…FFFFh
Timer status.
1=1
Season/exception
day status
Status of seasons 1…3, exception weekday and exception
holiday. Only one season can be active at a time. A day can
be a workday and a holiday at the same time.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
1
2
3
4…9
10
11
12…15
34.10
Description
Name
Season 1
Season 2
Season 3
Season 4
Reserved
Exception weekday
Exception holiday
Reserved
Description
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
1 = Active.
0000h…FFFFh
Status of the seasons and exception weekday and holiday.
1=1
Timed functions
enable
Selects the source for the timed functions enable signal.
0 = Disabled.
1 = Enabled.
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
2
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
242 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
34.11
Timer 1
configuration
Defines when timer 1 is active.
0111 1000
0000b
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Name
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Season 1
Season 2
Season 3
Season 4
Exceptions
12
Holidays
13
Workdays
Description
1 = Monday is an active start day.
1 = Tuesday is an active start day.
1 = Wednesday is an active start day.
1 = Thursday is an active start day.
1 = Friday is an active start day.
1 = Saturday is an active start day.
1 = Sunday is an active start day.
1 = Timer is active in season 1.
1 = Timer is active in season 2.
1 = Timer is active in season 3.
1 = Timer is active in season 4.
0 = Exceptions days are disabled.
1 = Exception days are enabled. Bits 12 and 13 are taken
into account.
0 = Timer is inactive on exception days configured as
“Holiday”.
1 = Timer is active on exception days configured as
“Holiday”.
0 = Timer is inactive on exception days configured as
“Workday”.
1 = Timer is active on exception days configured as
“Workday”.
14…15 Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Configuration of timer 1.
1=1
34.12
Timer 1 start time
Defines the daily start time of timer 1. The time can be
changed in second steps.
The timer can be started at an other time than the start time.
E.g. if the timer's duration is more than one day and the active
session starts during the time, the timer is started at 00:00
and stopped when there is no duration left.
00:00:00
00:00:00…23:59:59 Daily start time of the timer.
1=1
34.13
Timer 1 duration
00 00:00
00 00:00…07 00:00 Timer duration.
1=1
34.14
Timer 2
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.15
Timer 2 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.16
Timer 2 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.17
Timer 3
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
Defines the duration of timer 1. The duration can be changed
in minute steps.
The duration can extend over the change of the day but if an
exception day becomes active, the period is interrupted at
midnight. In the same way the period started on an exception
day stays active only until the end of the day, even if the
duration is longer. The timer will continue after a break if there
is duration left.
Parameters 243
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
34.18
Timer 3 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.19
Timer 3 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.20
Timer 4
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.21
Timer 4 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.22
Timer 4 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.23
Timer 5
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.24
Timer 5 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.25
Timer 5 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.26
Timer 6
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.27
Timer 6 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.28
Timer 6 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.29
Timer 7
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.30
Timer 7 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.31
Timer 7 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.32
Timer 8
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.33
Timer 8 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.34
Timer 8 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.35
Timer 9
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.36
Timer 9 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.37
Timer 9 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.38
Timer 10
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.39
Timer 10 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.40
Timer 10 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.41
Timer 11
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.42
Timer 11 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.43
Timer 11 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
34.44
Timer 12
configuration
See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
0111 1000
0000b
34.45
Timer 12 start time
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time.
00:00:00
34.46
Timer 12 duration
See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
00 00:00
244 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
34.60
Season 1 start date
Defines the start date of season 1 in format dd.mm, where dd 01.01.
is the number of the day and mm is the number of the month.
The season changes at midnight. One season can be active
at a time. Timers are started on exception days even if they
are not inside the active season.
The season start dates (1…4) must be given in increasing
order to use all seasons. The default value is interpreted that
the season is not configured. If the season start dates are not
in increasing order and the value is something else than the
default value, a season configuration warning is given.
01.01…31.12
Season start date.
34.61
Season 2 start date
Defines the start date of season 2.
See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
01.01.
34.62
Season 3 start date
Defines the start date of season 3.
See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
01.01.
34.63
Season 4 start date
Defines the start date of season 4.
See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
01.01.
34.70
Number of active
exceptions
Defines how many of the exceptions are active by specifying
the last active one. All preceding exceptions are active.
Exceptions 1…3 are periods (duration can be defined) and
exceptions 4…16 are days (duration is always 24 hours).
Example: If the value is 4, exceptions 1…4 are active, and
exceptions 5…16 are not active.
3
0…16
Number of active exception periods or days.
-
34.71
Exception types
Defines the types of exceptions 1…16 as workday or holiday. 0000b
Exceptions 1…3 are periods (duration can be defined) and
exceptions 4…16 are days (duration is always 24 hours).
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Name
Exception 1
Exception 2
Exception 3
Exception 4
Exception 5
Exception 6
Exception 7
Exception 8
Exception 9
Exception 10
Exception 11
Exception 12
Exception 13
Exception 14
Exception 15
Exception 16
0000h…FFFFh
Def/FbEq16
Description
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
Types of exception period or days.
1=1
Parameters 245
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
34.72
Exception 1 start
Defines the start date of the exception period in format
dd.mm, where dd is the number of the day and mm is the
number of the month.
The timer started on an exception day is always stopped at
23:59:59 even if it has duration left.
The same date can be configured to be holiday and workday.
The date is active if any of exception days are active.
01.01.
01.01.…31.12.
Start date of exception period 1.
34.73
Exception 1 length
Defines the length of the exception period in days.
Exception period is handled the same as a number of
consecutive exception days.
0d
0…60 d
Length of exception period 1.
1=1
34.74
Exception 2 start
See 34.72 Exception 1 start.
01.01.
34.75
Exception 2 length
See 34.73 Exception 1 length.
0d
34.76
Exception 3 start
See 34.72 Exception 1 start.
01.01.
34.77
Exception 3 length
See 34.73 Exception 1 length.
0d
34.78
Exception day 4
Defines the date of exception day 4.
01.01.
01.01.…31.12.
Start date of exception day 4.
The timer started on an exception day is always stopped at
23:59:59 even if it has duration left.
34.79
Exception day 5
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
34.80
Exception day 6
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.81
Exception day 7
See 34.79 Exception day 4
01.01
34.82
Exception day 8
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.83
Exception day 9
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.84
Exception day 10
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.85
Exception day 11
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.86
Exception day 12
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.87
Exception day 13
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.88
Exception day 14
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.89
Exception day 15
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
34.90
Exception day 16
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
01.01
01.01
246 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
34.100
Timed function 1
Defines which timers are connected to combined timer 1.
0 = Not connected.
1 = Connected.
See 34.01 Combined timer status.
0000b
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14…15
Name
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timer 3
Timer 4
Timer 5
Timer 6
Timer 7
Timer 8
Timer 9
Timer 10
Timer 11
Timer 12
Reserved
Description
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
0 = Inactive. 1 =
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
Active.
0000h…FFFFh
Timers connected to combined timer 1.
1=1
34.101
Timed function 2
Defines which timers are connected to combined timer 2.
See 34.01 Combined timer status.
0000b
34.102
Timed function 3
Defines which timers are connected to combined timer 3.
See 34.01 Combined timer status.
0000b
34.110
Extra time function
Defines which combined timers (that is, timers that are
connected to the combined timers) are activated with the
extra time function.
0000b
Bit
0
1
2
3…15
34.111
Name
Combined 1
Combined 2
Combined 3
Reserved
Description
0 = Inactive. 1 = Active.
0 = Inactive. 1 = Active.
0 = Inactive. 1 = Active.
0000h…FFFFh
Combined timers including the extra timer.
1=1
Extra time
activation source
Selects the source of extra time activation signal.
0 = Disabled.
1 = Enabled.
Off
Off
0.
0
On
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Parameters 247
No.
34.112
Name/Value
Description
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Extra time duration
Defines the time inside which the extra time is deactivated
after extra time activation signal is switched off.
Example: If parameter 34.111 Extra time activation source is
set to DI1 and 34.112 Extra time duration is set to 00 01:30,
the extra time is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital
input DI is deactivated.
00 00:00…00 00:00 Extra time duration.
35
Def/FbEq16
00 00:00
1=1
35 Motor thermal
protection
Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature
measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor
fan control configuration.
See also section Motor thermal protection (page 123).
35.01
Motor estimated
temperature
Displays the motor temperature as estimated by the internal
motor thermal protection model (see parameters
35.50…35.55). The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit
selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-60…1000 °C or
-76…1832 °F
Estimated motor temperature.
1 = 1°
Measured
temperature 1
Displays the temperature received through the source
defined by parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. The unit is
selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
Measured temperature 1.
1 = 1 unit
Measured
temperature 2
Displays the temperature received through the source
defined by parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source. The unit
is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
Measured temperature 2.
1 = 1 unit
Temperature 1
source
Selects the source from which measured temperature 1 is
read.
Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the motor
controlled by the drive, but it could be used to measure and
monitor a temperature from other parts of the process as long
as a suitable sensor is used as per the selection list.
Estimated
temperature
Disabled
None. Temperature monitoring function 1 is disabled.
0
Estimated
temperature
Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor
estimated temperature).
The temperature is estimated from an internal drive
calculation. It is important to set up the ambient temperature
of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
1
35.02
35.03
35.11
248 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
KTY84 analog I/O
KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
2
1 × Pt100 analog
I/O
Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected
by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
5
2 × Pt100 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
6
3 × Pt100 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
7
Direct temperature
The temperature is taken from the source selected by
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source. The value of the
source is assumed to be degrees Celsius.
11
Parameters 249
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
KTY83 analog I/O
KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
12
1 × Pt1000 analog
I/O
Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected
by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
13
2 × Pt1000 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
14
3 × Pt1000 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
15
Ni1000
Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
16
250 Parameters
No.
35.12
35.13
35.14
35.21
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
PTC extension
module
PTC is connected to the CMOD-02 multifunction extension
module, which is installed in drive slot 2. See chapter
Optional I/O extension modules, section CMOD-02
multifunction extension module (external 24 V AC/DC and
isolated PTC interface) in the Hardware manual of the drive).
19
Supervision1 fault
limit
Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision function 1.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
130 °C or
266 °F
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 1.
1 = 1 unit
Supervision1 1
warning limit
Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision
function 1. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit
selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
110 °C or
230 °F
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 1.
1 = 1 unit
Temperature 1 AI
source
Selects the input for parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source
selections KTY84 analog I/O, 1 × Pt100 analog I/O, 2 × Pt100
analog I/O, 3 × Pt100 analog I/O, Direct temperature, KTY83
analog I/O, 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, 2 × Pt1000 analog I/O, 3 ×
Pt1000 analog I/O and Ni1000.
Not selected
Not selected
None.
0
AI1 actual value
Analog input AI1 on the control unit.
1
AI2 actual value
Analog input AI2 on the control unit.
2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Temperature 2
source
Selects the source from which measured temperature 2 is
read.
Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the motor
controlled by the drive, but it could be used to measure and
monitor a temperature from other parts of the process as long
as a suitable sensor is used as per the selection list.
Disabled
Disabled
None. Temperature monitoring function 2 is disabled.
0
Estimated
temperature
Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor
estimated temperature).
The temperature is estimated from an internal drive
calculation. It is important to set up the ambient temperature
of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
1
KTY84 analog I/O
KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
2
Parameters 251
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
1 × Pt100 analog
I/O
Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected
by parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
5
2 × Pt100 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
6
3 × Pt100 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
7
Direct temperature
The temperature is taken from the source selected by
parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source. The value of the
source is assumed to be degrees Celsius.
11
KTY83 analog I/O
KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
12
252 Parameters
No.
35.22
35.23
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
1 × Pt1000 analog
I/O
Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected
by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
13
2 × Pt1000 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
14
3 × Pt1000 analog
I/O
As selection 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
15
Ni1000
Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
16
PTC extension
module
PTC is connected to the CMOD-02 multifunction extension
module, which is installed in drive slot 2. See chapter
Optional I/O extension modules, section CMOD-02
multifunction extension module (external 24 V AC/DC and
isolated PTC interface) in the Hardware manual of the drive).
19
Supervision1 2 fault
limit
Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision function 2.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
130 °C or
266 °F
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 2.
1 = 1 unit
Supervision1 2
warning limit
Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision
function 2. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit
selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
110 °C or
230 °F
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 2.
1 = 1 unit
Parameters 253
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
35.24
Temperature 2 AI
source
Selects the input for parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source
selections KTY84 analog I/O, 1 × Pt100 analog I/O, 2 × Pt100
analog I/O, 3 × Pt100 analog I/O, Direct temperature, KTY83
analog I/O, 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, 2 × Pt1000 analog I/O, 3 ×
Pt1000 analog I/O and Ni1000.
Not selected
Not selected
None.
0
AI1 actual value
Analog input AI1 on the control unit.
1
AI2 actual value
Analog input AI2 on the control unit.
2
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Motor ambient
temperature
20 °C or
Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for the motor
68 °F
thermal protection model. The unit is selected by parameter
96.16 Unit selection.
The motor thermal protection model estimates the motor
temperature on the basis of parameters 35.50…35.55. The
motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above
the load curve, and decreases if it operates in the region
below the load curve.
WARNING! The model cannot protect the motor if the
motor does not cool properly because of dust, dirt, etc.
-60…100 °C or
-76 … 212 °F
Ambient temperature.
1 = 1°
Motor load curve
Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.52
Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point. The load curve is
used by the motor thermal protection model to estimate the
motor temperature.
When the parameter is set to 100%, the maximum load is
taken as the value of parameter 99.06 Motor nominal current
(higher loads heat up the motor). The load curve level should
be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the
nominal value set in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
100%
35.50
35.51
I/IN
(%)
I = Motor current
IN = Nominal motor current
150
35.51
100
50
35.52
35.53
50…150%
Maximum load for the motor load curve.
Drive output
frequency
1 = 1%
254 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
35.52
Zero speed load
Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.51
Motor load curve and 35.53 Break point. Defines the
maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve. A
higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor
fan to boost the cooling. See the motor manufacturer's
recommendations.
See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
100%
50…150%
Zero speed load for the motor load curve.
1 = 1%
35.53
Break point
Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.51
Motor load curve and 35.52 Zero speed load. Defines the
break point frequency of the load curve ie. the point at which
the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of
parameter 35.51 Motor load curve towards the value of
parameter 35.52 Zero speed load.
See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
45.00 Hz
1.00…500.00 Hz
Break point for the motor load curve.
See par.
46.02
Motor nominal
temperature rise
Defines the temperature rise of the motor above ambient
when the motor is loaded with nominal current. See the motor
manufacturer's recommendations.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
80 °C or
176 °F
35.54
Temperature
Motor nominal
temperature rise
Ambient temperature
Time
0…300 °C or
32…572 °F
Temperature rise.
1 = 1°
Parameters 255
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
35.55
Motor thermal time
const
Defines the thermal time constant for use with the motor
thermal protection model, defined as the time to reach 63% of
the nominal motor temperature. See the motor
manufacturer's recommendations.
256 s
Motor current
100%
Time
Temperature rise
100%
63%
Motor thermal time
100…10000 s
36
Time
Motor thermal time constant.
1=1s
36 Load analyzer
Peak value and amplitude logger settings.
See also section Load analyzer (page 129).
36.01
PVL signal source
Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger.
The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by
parameter 36.02 PVL filter time.
The peak value is stored, along with other pre-selected
signals at the time, into parameters 36.10…36.15.
The peak value logger can be reset using parameter 36.09
Reset loggers. The date and time of the last reset are stored
into parameters 36.16 and 36.17 respectively.
Output power
Not selected
None (peak value logger disabled).
0
Motor speed used
01.01 Motor speed used (page 139).
1
Output frequency
01.06 Output frequency (page 139).
3
Motor current
01.07 Motor current (page 139).
4
Motor torque
01.10 Motor torque (page 139).
6
DC voltage
01.11 DC voltage (page 139).
7
Output power
01.14 Output power (page 140).
8
Speed ref ramp in
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 200).
10
Speed ref ramped
23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 200).
11
Speed ref used
24.01 Used speed reference (page 204).
12
Torque ref used
26.02 Torque reference used (page 209).
13
Freq ref used
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 213).
14
256 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Process PID out
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 261).
16
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
36.02
PVL filter time
Peak value logger filtering time. See parameter 36.01 PVL
signal source.
2.00 s
0.00…120.00 s
Peak value logger filtering time.
100 = 1 s
36.06
AL2 signal source
Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2. The
signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals.
The results are displayed by parameters 36.40…36.49. Each
parameter represents an amplitude range, and shows what
portion of the samples fall within that range.
The signal value corresponding to 100% is defined by
parameter 36.07 AL2 signal scaling.
Amplitude logger 2 can be reset using parameter 36.09 Reset
loggers. The date and time of the last reset are stored into
parameters 36.50 and 36.51 respectively.
For the selections, see parameter 36.01 PVL signal source.
Motor torque
36.07
AL2 signal scaling
Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100% amplitude. 100.00
0.00…32767.00
Signal value corresponding to 100%.
1=1
Reset loggers
Resets the peak value logger and/or amplitude logger 2.
(Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.)
Done
36.09
36.10
36.11
36.12
36.13
Done
Reset completed or not requested (normal operation).
0
All
Reset both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2.
1
PVL
Reset the peak value logger.
2
AL2
Reset amplitude logger 2.
3
PVL peak value
Peak value recorded by the peak value logger.
0.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Peak value.
1=1
PVL peak date
The date on which the peak value was recorded.
01.01.1980
-
Peak occurrence date.
-
PVL peak time
The time at which the peak value was recorded.
00:00:00
-
Peak occurrence time.
-
PVL current at peak Motor current at the moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 A
-32768.00…
32767.00 A
Motor current at peak.
1=1A
36.14
PVL DC voltage at
peak
Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the
moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 V
0.00…2000.00 V
DC voltage at peak.
10 = 1 V
36.15
PVL speed at peak
Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 rpm
-30000.00…
30000.00 rpm
Motor speed at peak.
See par.
46.01
36.16
36.17
PVL reset date
The date on which the peak value logger was last reset.
01.01.1980
-
Last reset date of the peak value logger.
-
PVL reset time
The time at which the peak value logger was last reset.
00:00:00
-
Last reset time of the peak value logger.
-
Parameters 257
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
36.20
AL1 0 to 10%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 0 and 10%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%.
1 = 1%
36.21
AL1 10 to 20%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20%.
1 = 1%
36.22
AL1 20 to 30%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30%.
1 = 1%
36.23
AL1 30 to 40%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40%.
1 = 1%
36.24
AL1 40 to 50%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50%.
1 = 1%
36.25
AL1 50 to 60%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60%.
1 = 1%
36.26
AL1 60 to 70%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 60 and 70%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70%.
1 = 1%
36.27
AL1 70 to 80%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 70 and 80%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80%.
1 = 1%
36.28
AL1 80 to 90%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90%.
1 = 1%
36.29
AL1 over 90%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
exceed 90%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%.
1 = 1%
36.40
AL2 0 to 10%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 0 and 10%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10%.
1 = 1%
36.41
AL2 10 to 20%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10 and 20%.
1 = 1%
36.42
AL2 20 to 30%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30%.
1 = 1%
36.43
AL2 30 to 40%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40%.
1 = 1%
36.44
AL2 40 to 50%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50%.
1 = 1%
258 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
36.45
AL2 50 to 60%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60%.
1 = 1%
36.46
AL2 60 to 70%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 60 and 70%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70%.
1 = 1%
36.47
AL2 70 to 80%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 70 and 80%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80%.
1 = 1%
36.48
AL2 80 to 90%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90%.
1 = 1%
36.49
AL2 over 90%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
exceed 90%.
0.00%
0.00…100.00%
Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%.
1 = 1%
36.50
AL2 reset date
The date on which amplitude logger 2 was last reset.
01.01.1980
-
Last reset date of amplitude logger 2.
-
AL2 reset time
The time at which amplitude logger 2 was last reset.
00:00:00
-
Last reset time of amplitude logger 2.
-
36.51
37
37 User load curve
Settings for user load curve.
See also section User load curve (page 104).
37.01
Displays the status of the monitored signal.
ULC output status
word
Bit
0
1
2
3…15
37.02
37.03
Name
Under load limit
Within load range
Overload limit
Reserved
0000h
Description
1 = Signal lower than the underload curve.
1 = Signal between the underload and overload curve.
1 = Signal higher than the overload curve.
0000h…FFFFh
Status of the monitored signal.
1=1
ULC supervision
signal
Selects the signal to be supervised.
Motor torque
%
Not selected
No signal selected. ULC disabled.
0
Motor speed %
01.03 Motor speed % (page 139).
1
Motor current %
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom (page 139).
2
Motor torque %
01.10 Motor torque (page 139).
3
Output power % of
motor nominal
01.15 Output power % of motor nom (page 140).
4
Output power % of
drive nominal
01.16 Output power % of drive nom (page 140).
5
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
ULC overload
actions
Selects an action taken if the signal stays over the overload
curve for a defined time.
Disabled
Disabled
No warnings or fault generated.
0
Parameters 259
No.
37.04
37.11
37.12
37.13
37.14
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Warning
The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload warning if the
signal has been continuously over the overload curve for a
time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
1
Fault
The drive generates an 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal
has been continuously over the overload curve for a time
defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
2
Warning/Fault
The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload warning if the
signal has been continuously over the overload curve for half
of the time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
The drive generates an 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal
has been continuously over the overload curve for a time
defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
3
ULC underload
actions
Selects an action taken if the signal stays under the
underload curve for a defined time.
Disabled
Disabled
No warnings or fault generated.
0
Warning
The drive generates an A8C4 ULC underload warning if the
signal has been continuously under the underload curve for a
time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
1
Fault
The drive generates an 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal
has been continuously under the underload curve for a time
defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
2
Warning/Fault
The drive generates an A8C4 ULC underload warning if the
signal has been continuously under the underload curve for
half of the time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload
timer.
The drive generates an 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal
has been continuously under the underload curve for a time
defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
3
ULC speed table
point 1
Defines the first of the five speed points on the X-axis of the
user load curve.
The values of the parameters must satisfy: -30000.0 rpm <
37.11 ULC speed table point 1 < 37.12 ULC speed table point
2 < 37.13 ULC speed table point 3 < 37.14 ULC speed table
point 4 < 37.15 ULC speed table point 5 < 30000.0 rpm.
Speed points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control mode
is set to Vector or if 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar
and the reference unit is rpm.
150.0 rpm
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
Speed.
1 = 1 rpm
ULC speed table
point 2
Defines the second speed point.
See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
750.0 rpm
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
Speed.
1 = 1 rpm
ULC speed table
point 3
Defines the third speed point.
See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
1290.0 rpm
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
Speed.
1 = 1 rpm
ULC speed table
point 4
Defines the fourth speed point.
See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
1500.0 rpm
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
Speed.
1 = 1 rpm
260 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
37.15
ULC speed table
point 5
Defines the fifth speed point.
See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
1800.0 rpm
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
Speed.
1 = 1 rpm
ULC frequency
table point 1
Defines the first of the five frequency points on the X-axis of
the user load curve.
The values of the parameters must satisfy: -500.0 Hz < 37.16
ULC frequency table point 1 < 37.17 ULC frequency table
point 2 < 37.18 ULC frequency table point 3 < 37.19 ULC
frequency table point 4 < 37.20 ULC frequency table point 5 <
500.0 Hz.
Frequency points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control
mode is set to Scalar and the reference unit is Hz.
5.0 Hz
37.16
-500.0…500.0 Hz
Frequency.
1 = 1 Hz
37.17
ULC frequency
table point 2
Defines the second frequency point.
See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
25.0 Hz
-500.0…500.0 Hz
Frequency.
1 = 1 Hz
37.18
ULC frequency
table point 3
Defines the third frequency point.
See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
43.0 Hz
-500.0…500.0 Hz
Frequency.
1 = 1 Hz
37.19
ULC frequency
table point 4
Defines the fourth frequency point.
See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
50.0 Hz
-500.0…500.0 Hz
Frequency.
1 = 1 Hz
37.20
ULC frequency
table point 5
Defines the fifth frequency point.
See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
60.0 Hz
-500.0…500.0 Hz
Frequency.
1 = 1 Hz
37.21
ULC underload
point 1
Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that together
with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11 ULC speed
table point 1…37.15 ULC speed table point 5 or 37.15 ULC
speed table point 5…37.20 ULC frequency table point 5)
define the underload (lower) curve.
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
• 37.21 ULC underload point 1 <= 37.31 ULC overload point 1
• 37.22 ULC underload point 2 <= 37.32 ULC overload point 2
• 37.23 ULC underload point 3 <= 37.33 ULC overload point 3
• 37.24 ULC underload point 4 <= 37.34 ULC overload point 4
• 37.25 ULC underload point 5 <= 37.35 ULC overload point 5
10.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Underload point.
1 = 1%
37.22
ULC underload
point 2
Defines the second underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
15.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Underload point.
1 = 1%
37.23
ULC underload
point 3
Defines the third underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1
25.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Underload point.
1 = 1%
37.24
ULC underload
point 4
Defines the fourth underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1
30.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Underload point.
1 = 1%
Parameters 261
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
37.25
ULC underload
point 5
Defines the fifth underload point.
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1
30.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Underload point.
1 = 1%
37.31
ULC overload point
1
Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that together
with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11 ULC speed
table point 1…37.15 ULC speed table point 5 or 37.15 ULC
speed table point 5…37.20 ULC frequency table point 5)
define the overload (higher) curve.
At each of the five points the value of the underload curve
point must be equal to or smaller than the value of the
overload curve point. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload
point 1.
300.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Overload point.
1 = 1%
37.32
ULC overload point
2
Defines the second overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
300.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Overload point.
1 = 1%
37.33
ULC overload point
3
Defines the third overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
300.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Overload point.
1 = 1%
37.34
ULC overload point
4
Defines the fourth overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
300.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Overload point.
1 = 1%
37.35
ULC overload point
5
Defines the fifth overload point.
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
300.0%
-1600.0…1600.0%
Overload point.
1 = 1%
37.41
ULC overload timer
Defines the time period for which time the monitored signal
must remain continuously below the overload curve.
20.0 s
0.0…10000.0 s
Time.
1=1s
37.42
ULC underload
timer
Defines the time period for which time the monitored signal
must remain continuously above the underload curve.
20.0 s
0.0…10000.0 s
Time.
1=1s
40
40 Process PID set 1
Parameter values for process PID control.
The drive output can be controlled by the process PID. When
the process PID control is enabled, the drive controls the
process feedback to the reference value.
Two different parameter sets can be defined for the process
PID. One parameter set is in use at a time. The first set is
made up of parameters 40.07…40.50, the second set is
defined by the parameters in group 41 Process PID set 2.
The binary source that defines which set is used is selected
by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection.
See also the control chain diagrams on pages 430 and 431.
To set the PID customer unit, select Menu - Primary settings
- PID - Unit on the panel.
40.01
Displays the output of the process PID controller. See the
control chain diagram on page 431.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Process PID controller output.
1 = 1%
Process PID output
actual
-32768.00…
32767.00%
262 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
40.02
Process PID
feedback actual
Displays the value of process feedback after source
selection, mathematical function (parameter 40.10 Set 1
feedback function), and filtering. See the control chain
diagram on page 430.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Process feedback.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Process PID
setpoint actual
Displays the value of process PID setpoint after source
selection, mathematical function (40.18 Set 1 setpoint
function), limitation and ramping. See the control chain
diagram on page 431.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Setpoint for process PID controller.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Process PID
deviation actual
Displays the process PID deviation. By default, this value
equals setpoint - feedback, but deviation can be inverted by
parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. See the control
chain diagram on page 431.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
PID deviation.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Process PID status
word
Displays status information on process PID control.
This parameter is read-only.
-
40.03
40.04
40.06
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name
PID active
Setpoint frozen
Output frozen
PID sleep mode
Sleep boost
Reserved
Tracking mode
Output limit high
Output limit low
Reserved
PID set
Reserved
Internal setpoint
active
13…15 Reserved
40.07
Value
1 = Process PID control active.
1 = Process PID setpoint frozen.
1 = Process PID controller output frozen.
1 = Sleep mode active.
1 = Sleep boost active.
1 = Tracking function active.
1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.37.
1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.36.
0 = Parameter set 1 in use. 1 = Parameter set 2 in use.
1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 40.16…40.16)
0000h…FFFFh
Process PID control status word.
1=1
Process PID
operation mode
Activates/deactivates process PID control.
Note: Process PID control is only available in external
control; see section Local control vs. external control (page
86).
Off
Off
Process PID control inactive.
0
On
Process PID control active.
1
Parameters 263
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
On when drive
running
Process PID control is active when the drive is running.
2
Set 1 feedback 1
source
Selects the primary source of process feedback. See the
control chain diagram on page 430.
AI2 percent
Not selected
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
Freq in scaled
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value (see page 154).
3
AI1 percent
12.101 AI1 percent value (see page 160)
8
AI2 percent
12.102 AI2 percent value (see page 160)
9
Feedback storage
40.91 Feedback data storage (see page 271),
9
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
40.09
Set 1 feedback 2
source
Selects the second source of process feedback. The second
source is used only if the setpoint function requires two
inputs.
For the selections, see parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1
source.
Not selected
40.10
Set 1 feedback
function
Defines how process feedback is calculated from the two
feedback sources selected by parameters 40.08 Set 1
feedback 1 source and 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
In1
In1
Source 1.
0
In1+In2
Sum of sources 1 and 2.
1
In1-In2
Source 2 subtracted from source 1.
2
In1*In2
Source 1 multiplied by source 2.
3
In1/In2
Source 1 divided by source 2.
4
MIN(In1,In2)
Smaller of the two sources.
5
40.08
MAX(In1,In2)
Greater of the two sources.
6
AVE(In1,In2)
Average of the two sources.
7
sqrt(In1)
Square root of source 1.
8
sqrt(In1-In2)
Square root of (source 1 - source 2).
9
sqrt(In1+In2)
Square root of (source 1 + source 2).
10
sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2)
Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2.
11
40.11
Set 1 feedback filter
time
Defines the filter time constant for process feedback.
0.000 s
0.000…30.000 s
Feedback filter time.
1=1s
40.16
Set 1 setpoint 1
source
Selects the primary source of process PID setpoint. See the
control chain diagram on page 430.
AI1 percent
Not selected
None.
0
Internal setpoint
Internal setpoint. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint
sel1.
2
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
3
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
4
Motor
potentiometer
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor
potentiometer).
8
Freq in scaled
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value (see page 154).
10
264 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
AI1 percent
12.101 AI1 percent value (see page 160)
11
AI2 percent
12.102 AI2 percent value (see page 160)
12
Control panel (ref
saved)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141)
saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
13
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
Control panel (ref
copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 141) for
the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
14
Reference
t
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
Ext1 -> Ext2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
15
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
16
EFB ref1
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 142).
19
EFB ref2
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 142).
20
Setpoint data
storage
40.92 Setpoint data storage (see page 271)
24
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
40.17
Set 1 setpoint 2
source
Selects the second source of process setpoint. The second
source is used only if the setpoint function requires two
inputs.
For the selections, see parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
source.
Not selected
40.18
Set 1 setpoint
function
Selects a function between the setpoint sources selected by
parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17 Set 1
setpoint 2 source.
In1
In1
Source 1.
0
In1+In2
Sum of sources 1 and 2.
1
In1-In2
Source 2 subtracted from source 1.
2
In1*In2
Source 1 multiplied by source 2.
3
In1/In2
Source 1 divided by source 2.
4
MIN(In1,In2)
Smaller of the two sources.
5
MAX(In1,In2)
Greater of the two sources.
6
AVE(In1,In2)
Average of the two sources.
7
sqrt(In1)
Square root of source 1.
8
Parameters 265
No.
40.19
Name/Value
Description
sqrt(In1-In2)
Square root of (source 1 - source 2).
Def/FbEq16
9
sqrt(In1+In2)
Square root of (source 1 + source 2).
10
sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2)
Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2.
11
Set 1 internal
setpoint sel1
Selects together with 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 the
internal setpoint out of the presets defined by parameters
40.21…40.23.
Note: Parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17
Set 1 setpoint 2 source must be set to Internal setpoint.
Not selected
Source defined Source defined
Setpoint preset active
by par. 40.19
by par. 40.20
40.20
0
0
1
0
Setpoint source
1 (par. 40.21)
0
1
2 (par. 40.22)
1
1
3 (par. 40.23)
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Set 1 internal
setpoint sel2
Selects together with 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 the
internal setpoint used out of the three internal setpoints
defined by parameters 40.21…40.23. See table at 40.19 Set
1 internal setpoint sel1.
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
Not selected
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
266 Parameters
No.
40.21
40.22
40.23
40.26
40.27
40.28
40.29
40.30
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Set 1 internal
setpoint 1
Internal process setpoint 1. See parameter 40.19 Set 1
internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID
customer
units
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Internal process setpoint 1.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Set 1 internal
setpoint 2
Internal process setpoint 2. See parameter 40.19 Set 1
internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID
customer
units
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Internal process setpoint 2.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Set 1 internal
setpoint 3
Internal process setpoint 3. See parameter 40.19 Set 1
internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID
customer
units
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Internal process setpoint 3.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Set 1 setpoint min
Defines a minimum limit for the process PID controller
setpoint.
0.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Minimum limit for process PID controller setpoint.
1=1
Set 1 setpoint max
Defines a maximum limit for the process PID controller
setpoint.
32767.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Maximum limit for process PID controller setpoint.
1=1
Set 1 setpoint
increase time
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to increase
from 0% to 100%.
0.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s
Setpoint increase time.
1=1
Set 1 setpoint
decrease time
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to decrease
from 100% to 0%.
0.0 s
0.0…1800.0 s
Setpoint decrease time.
1=1
Set 1 setpoint
freeze enable
Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the
setpoint of the process PID controller. This feature is useful
when the reference is based on a process feedback
connected to an analog input, and the sensor must be
serviced without stopping the process.
1 = Process PID controller setpoint frozen
See also parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
Not selected
Not selected
Process PID controller setpoint not frozen.
0
Selected
Process PID controller setpoint frozen.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Parameters 267
No.
Name/Value
Description
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
Def/FbEq16
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Set 1 deviation
inversion
Inverts the input of the process PID controller.
0 = Deviation not inverted (Deviation = Setpoint - Feedback)
1 = Deviation inverted (Deviation = Feedback - Setpoint)
See also section Sleep and boost functions for process PID
control (page 112).
Not inverted
(Ref - Fbk)
Not inverted
(Ref - Fbk)
0.
0
Inverted (Fbk - Ref)
1.
1
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
40.32
Set 1 gain
Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See
parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
1.00
0.10…100.00
Gain for PID controller.
100 = 1
40.33
Set 1 integration
time
Defines the integration time for the process PID controller.
This time needs to be set to the same order of magnitude as
the reaction time of the process being controlled, otherwise
instability will result.
60.0 s
40.31
Error/Controller output
O
I
G×I
G×I
Ti
Time
I = controller input (error)
O = controller output
G = gain
Ti = integration time
Note: Setting this value to 0 disables the “I” part, turning the
PID controller into a PD controller.
0.0…9999.0 s
Integration time.
1=1s
268 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
40.34
Set 1 derivation
time
Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The
derivative component at the controller output is calculated on
basis of two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according
to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME × (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which
TS = 2 ms sample time
E = Error = Process reference - process feedback.
0.000 s
0.000…10.000 s
Derivation time.
1000 = 1 s
Set 1 derivation
filter time
Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth
the derivative component of the process PID controller.
0.0 s
40.35
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63
Filtered signal
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant
0.0…10.0 s
Filter time constant.
10 = 1 s
40.36
Set 1 output min
Defines the minimum limit for the process PID controller
output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible
to restrict the operation range.
0.0
-32768.0… 32767.0 Minimum limit for process PID controller output.
1=1
40.37
Set 1 output max
100.0
40.38
Defines the maximum limit for the process PID controller
output. See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
-32768.0… 32767.0 Maximum limit for process PID controller output.
1=1
Set 1 output freeze
enable
Freezes (or defines a source that can be used to freeze) the
output of the process PID controller, keeping the output at the
value it was before freeze was enabled. This feature can be
used when, for example, a sensor providing process
feedback must to be serviced without stopping the process.
1 = Process PID controller output frozen
See also parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable.
Not selected
Not selected
Process PID controller output not frozen.
0
Selected
Process PID controller output frozen.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Parameters 269
No.
Name/Value
Description
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
40.43
Set 1 sleep level
Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the value is 0.0,
set 1 sleep mode is disabled.
The sleep function compares the motor speed to the value of
this parameter. If the motor speed remains below this value
longer than the sleep delay defined by 40.44 Set 1 sleep
delay, the drive enters the sleep mode and stops the motor.
0.0
0.0…32767.0
Sleep start level.
1=1
40.44
Set 1 sleep delay
Defines a delay before the sleep function actually becomes
enabled, to prevent nuisance sleeping.
The delay timer starts when the sleep mode is enabled by
parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level, and resets when the sleep
mode is disabled.
60.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s
Sleep start delay.
1=1s
40.45
Set 1 sleep boost
time
Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step. See parameter
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step.
0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s
Sleep boost time.
1=1s
40.46
Set 1 sleep boost
step
When the drive is entering sleep mode, the process setpoint
is increased by this value for the time defined by parameter
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time.
If active, sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up.
0.0 PID
customer
units
0.0…32767.0 PID
customer units
Sleep boost step.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Set 1 wake-up
deviation
Defines the wake-up level as deviation between process
setpoint and feedback.
When the deviation exceeds the value of this parameter, and
remains there for the duration of the wake-up delay (40.48
Set 1 wake-up delay), the drive wakes up.
See also parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
0.00 PID
customer
units
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Wake-up level (as deviation between process setpoint and
feedback).
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Set 1 wake-up
delay
Defines a wake-up delay for the sleep function to prevent
nuisance wake-ups. See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up
deviation.
The delay timer starts when the deviation exceeds the wakeup level (40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation), and resets if the
deviation falls below the wake-up level.
0.50 s
0.00…60.00 s
Wake-up delay.
1=1s
40.47
40.48
Def/FbEq16
270 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
40.49
Set 1 tracking mode Activates (or selects a source that activates) tracking mode.
In tracking mode, the value selected by parameter 40.50 Set
1 tracking ref selection is substituted for the PID controller
output. See also section Tracking (page 113).
1 = Tracking mode enabled
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Set 1 tracking ref
selection
Selects the value source for tracking mode. See parameter
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode.
Not selected
Not selected
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 157).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 158).
2
FB A ref1
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 142).
3
FB A ref2
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 142).
4
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
PID set1/set2
selection
Selects the source that determines whether process PID
parameter set 1 (parameters 40.07…40.50) or set 2 (group
41 Process PID set 2) is used.
0 = Process PID parameter set 1 in use
1 = Process PID parameter set 2 in use
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
40.50
40.57
Description
Def/FbEq16
Parameters 271
No.
40.58
40.59
40.62
40.91
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Set 1 increase
prevention
Prevention of PID integration term increase for PID set 1.
No
No
Increase prevention not in use.
0
Limiting
The PID integration term is not increased if the maximum
value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid
for the PID set 1.
1
Ext PID min lim
The process PID integration term is not increased when the
output of the external PID has reached its minimum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the
process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
2
Ext PID max lim
The process PID integration term is not increased when the
output of the external PID has reached its maximum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the
process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
3
Set 1 decrease
prevention
Prevention of PID integration term decrease for PID set 1.
No
No
Decrease prevention not in use.
0
Limiting
The PID integration term is not decreased if the minimum
value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid
for the PID set 1.
1
Ext PID min lim
The process PID integration term is not decreased when the
output of the external PID has reached its minimum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the
process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
2
Ext PID max lim
The process PID integration term is not decreased when the
output of the external PID has reached its maximum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the
process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
3
PID internal
setpoint actual
Displays the value of the internal setpoint. See the control
chain diagram on page 431.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-32768.00…
32767.00 PID
customer units
Process PID internal setpoint.
1 = 1 PID
customer unit
Feedback data
storage
Storage parameter for receiving a process feedback value eg.
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set
the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114) to Feedback data storage. In 40.08 Set 1
feedback 1 source (or 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source), select
Feedback storage.
-
-327.68…327.67
Storage parameter for process feedback.
100 = 1
272 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
40.92
Setpoint data
storage
Storage parameter for receiving a process setpoint value eg.
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set
the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114)) to Setpoint data storage. In 40.16 Set 1
setpoint 1 source (or 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source), select
Setpoint data storage.
-
-327.68…327.67
Storage parameter for process setpoint.
100 = 1
41
41 Process PID set 2
A second set of parameter values for process PID control.
The selection between this set and first set (parameter group
40 Process PID set 1) is made by parameter 40.57 PID
set1/set2 selection.
See also parameters 40.01…40.06, and the control chain
diagrams on pages 430 and 431.
41.08
Set 2 feedback 1
source
See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source.
AI2 percent
41.09
Set 2 feedback 2
source
See parameter 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
Not selected
41.10
Set 2 feedback
function
See parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function.
In1
41.11
Set 2 feedback filter
time
See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time.
0.000 s
41.16
Set 2 setpoint 1
source
See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source.
AI1 percent
41.17
Set 2 setpoint 2
source
See parameter 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source.
Not selected
41.18
Set 2 setpoint
function
See parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function.
In1
41.19
Set 2 internal
setpoint sel1
See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Not selected
41.20
Set 2 internal
setpoint sel2
See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2.
Not selected
41.21
Set 2 internal
setpoint 1
See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1.
0.00 PID
customer
units
41.22
Set 2 internal
setpoint 2
See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2.
0.00 PID
customer
units
41.23
Set 2 internal
setpoint 3
See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3.
0.00 PID
customer
units
41.26
Set 2 setpoint min
See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min.
0.00
41.27
Set 2 setpoint max
See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max.
32767.00
41.28
Set 2 setpoint
increase time
See parameter 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time.
0.0 s
41.29
Set 2 setpoint
decrease time
See parameter 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time.
0.0 s
41.30
Set 2 setpoint
freeze enable
See parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable.
Not selected
Parameters 273
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
41.31
Set 2 deviation
inversion
See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
Not inverted
(Ref - Fbk)
41.32
Set 2 gain
See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain.
1.00
41.33
Set 2 integration
time
See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
60.0 s
41.34
Set 2 derivation
time
See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time.
0.000 s
41.35
Set 2 derivation
filter time
See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time.
0.0 s
41.36
Set 2 output min
See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
0.0
41.37
Set 2 output max
See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max.
100.0
41.38
Set 2 output freeze
enable
See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
Not selected
41.43
Set 2 sleep level
See parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level.
0.0
41.44
Set 2 sleep delay
See parameter 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay.
60.0 s
41.45
Set 2 sleep boost
time
See parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time.
0.0 s
41.46
Set 2 sleep boost
step
See parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step.
0.0 PID
customer
units
41.47
Set 2 wake-up
deviation
See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation.
0.00 PID
customer
units
41.48
Set 2 wake-up
delay
See parameter 40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay.
0.50 s
41.49
Set 2 tracking mode See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode.
Not selected
41.50
Set 2 tracking ref
selection
See parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection.
Not selected
41.58
Set 2 increase
prevention
See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention.
No
41.59
Set 2 decrease
prevention
See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention.
No
43
43 Brake chopper
Settings for the internal brake chopper.
43.01
Braking resistor
temperature
Displays the estimated temperature of the brake resistor, or
how close the brake resistor is to being too hot.
The value is given in percent where 100% is the temperature
the resistor would reach if the maximum continuous braking
power (43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont) is applied to the
resistor for 100% rated time. The thermal time constant
(43.08 Brake resistor thermal tc) defines the rated time to
achieve 63% temperature. 100% would be reached when
100% time has elapsed.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0.0…120.0%
Estimated brake resistor temperature.
1 = 1%
274 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
43.06
Brake chopper
enable
Enables brake chopper control.
Note: Before enabling brake chopper control, ensure that
• a brake resistor is connected
• overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 30.30
Overvoltage control)
• the supply voltage range (parameter 95.01 Supply voltage)
has been selected correctly.
Disabled
Disabled
Brake chopper control disabled.
0
Enabled with
thermal model
Brake chopper control enabled with resistor overload
protection.
1
Enabled without
thermal model
Brake chopper control enabled without resistor overload
protection. This setting can be used, for example, if the
resistor is equipped with a thermal circuit breaker that is wired
to stop the drive if the resistor overheats.
2
Brake chopper
runtime enable
Selects the source for quick brake chopper on/off control.
0 = Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off
1 = Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation.
This parameter can be used to program the chopper control
to function only when the supply is missing from a drive with a
regenerative supply unit.
On
43.07
Off
0.
0
On
1.
1
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
43.08
Brake resistor
thermal tc
Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor for
overload protection.
0…10000 s
Brake resistor thermal time constant.
1=1s
43.09
Brake resistor
Pmax cont
Defines the maximum continuous braking power of the
resistor (in kW) which will raise the resistor temperature to the
maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload
protection.
0.00 kW
0.00…
10000.00 kW
Maximum continuous braking power.
1 = 1 kW
43.10
Brake resistance
Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value
is used for brake chopper protection.
0.0 ohm
0.0…1000.0 ohm
Brake resistor resistance value.
1 = 1 ohm
43.11
Brake resistor fault
limit
Selects the fault limit for the brake resistor temperature
protection function. When the limit is exceeded, the drive trips
on fault 7183 BR excess temperature.
The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor
reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter
43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont.
105%
0…150%
Brake resistor temperature fault limit.
1 = 1%
43.12
Brake resistor
warning limit
Selects the warning limit for the brake resistor temperature
protection function. When the limit is exceeded, the drive
generates a A793 BR excess temperature warning.
The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor
reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter
43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont.
95%
0…150%
Brake resistor temperature warning limit.
1 = 1%
0s
Parameters 275
No.
Name/Value
44
44 Mechanical brake
control
44.01
Bit
0
Name
Open command
1
Opening torque
request
Hold stopped
request
Ramp to stopped
Enabled
Closed
Opening
Open
Closing
Reserved
3
4
5
6
7
8
9…15
Def/FbEq16
Configuration of mechanical brake control.
See also section Mechanical brake control (page 115).
Brake control status Displays the mechanical brake control status word.
This parameter is read-only.
2
44.06
Description
-
Information
Close/open command to brake actuator (0 = close, 1 = open).
Connect this bit to desired output.
1 = Opening torque requested from drive logic
1 = Hold requested from drive logic
1 = Ramping down to zero speed requested from drive logic
1 = Brake control is enabled
1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSED state
1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPENING state
1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPEN state
1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSING state
0000h…FFFFh
Mechanical brake control status word.
1=1
Brake control
enable
Activates/deactivates (or selects a source that
activates/deactivates) the mechanical brake control logic.
0 = Brake control inactive
1 = Brake control active
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
2
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
5
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
276 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
44.08
Brake open delay
Defines the brake open delay, ie. the delay between the
internal open brake command and the release of motor speed
control. The delay timer starts when the drive has magnetized
the motor. Simultaneously with the timer start, the brake
control logic energizes the brake control output and the brake
starts to open.
Set this parameter to the value of mechanical opening delay
specified by the brake manufacturer.
0.00 s
0.00…5.00 s
Brake open delay.
100 = 1 s
44.13
Brake close delay
Specifies a delay between a close command (that is, when
the brake control output is de-energized) and when the drive
stops modulating. This is to keep the motor live and under
control until the brake actually closes.
Set this parameter equal to the value specified by the brake
manufacturer as the mechanical make-up time of the brake.
0.00 s
0.00…60.00 s
Brake close delay.
100 = 1 s
44.14
Brake close level
Defines the brake close speed as an absolute value.
After motor speed has decelerated to this level, a close
command is given.
100.00 rpm
0.00…1000.00 rpm
Brake close speed.
See par.
46.01
45
45 Energy efficiency
Settings for the energy saving calculators.
See also section Energy saving calculators (page 129).
45.01
Saved GW hours
Energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on-line motor
connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.02
Saved MW hours rolls over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…65535 GWh
Energy savings in GWh.
1 = 1 GWh
45.02
Saved MW hours
Energy saved in MWh compared to direct-on-line motor
connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.03
Saved kW hours rolls over.
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.01 Saved GW
hours is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0…999 MWh
Energy savings in MWh.
1 = 1 MWh
45.03
Saved kW hours
Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor
connection.
If the internal brake chopper of the drive is enabled, all energy
fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be converted into
heat, but the calculation still records savings made by
controlling the speed. If the chopper is disabled, then
regenerated energy from the motor is also recorded here.
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.02 Saved MW
hours is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0.0…999.9 kWh
Energy savings in kWh.
10 = 1 kWh
-
Parameters 277
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
45.04
Saved energy
Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor
connection.
If the internal brake chopper of the drive is enabled, all energy
fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be converted into
heat.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0.0…214748364.7
kWh
Energy savings in kWh.
1 = 1 kWh
Saved money
x1000
Monetary savings in thousands compared to direct-on-line
motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.06
Saved money rolls over.
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0…4294967295
thousands
Monetary savings in thousands of units.
1 = 1 unit
45.06
Saved money
Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor
connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the
saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff
(45.14 Tariff selection).
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.05 Saved
money x1000 is incremented.
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0.00…999.99 units
Monetary savings.
1 = 1 unit
45.07
Saved amount
Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor
connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the
saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff
(45.14 Tariff selection).
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0.00…
21474830.08 units
Monetary savings.
1 = 1 unit
CO2 reduction in
kilotons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons compared to
direct-on-line motor connection. This value is incremented
when parameter 45.09 CO2 reduction in tons rolls over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0…65535 metric
kilotons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons.
1 = 1 metric
kiloton
45.05
45.08
278 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
45.09
CO2 reduction in
tons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to
direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by
multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of
parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5
metric tons/MWh).
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.08 CO2
reduction in kilotons is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0.0…999.9 metric
tons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons.
1 = 1 metric
ton
Total saved CO2
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to
direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by
multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of
parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5
metric tons/MWh).
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
-
0.0…214748300.8
metric tons
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons.
1 = 1 metric
ton
Energy optimizer
Enables/disables the energy optimization function. The
function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy
consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the
drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency
(motor and drive) can be improved by 1…20% depending on
load torque and speed.
Note: With a permanent magnet motor, energy optimization
is always enabled regardless of this parameter.
Disable
Disable
Energy optimization disabled.
0
Enable
Energy optimization enabled.
1
Energy tariff 1
Defines energy tariff 1 (price of energy per kWh). Depending
on the setting of parameter 45.14 Tariff selection, either this
value or 45.13 Energy tariff 2 is used for reference when
monetary savings are calculated.
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
Note: Tariffs are read only at the instant of selection, and are
not applied retroactively.
0.100 units
0.000…
4294966.296 units
Energy tariff 1.
-
Energy tariff 2
Defines energy tariff 2 (price of energy per kWh).
See parameter 45.12 Energy tariff 1.
0.200 units
0.000…
4294966.296 units
Energy tariff 2.
-
Tariff selection
Selects (or defines a source that selects) which pre-defined
energy tariff is used.
0 = 45.12 Energy tariff 1
1 = 45.13 Energy tariff 2
Energy tariff
1
Energy tariff 1
0.
0
Energy tariff 2
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
45.10
45.11
45.12
45.13
45.14
Parameters 279
No.
45.17
45.18
45.19
45.21
Name/Value
Description
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Def/FbEq16
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Tariff currency unit
Specifies the currency used for the savings calculations.
EUR
Local currency
The currency is determined by the language selection (see
parameter 96.01 Language).
100
EUR
Euro.
101
USD
US dollar.
102
CO2 conversion
factor
Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2
emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh).
0.500
tn/MWh
0.000…65.535
tn/MWh
Factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions.
1 = 1 tn/MWh
Comparison power
Actual power that the motor absorbs when connected directon-line and operating the application. The value is used for
reference when energy savings are calculated.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is
directly dependent on the accuracy of this value. If nothing is
entered here, then the nominal motor power is used by the
calculation, but that may inflate the energy savings reported
as many motors do not absorb nameplate power.
0.00 kW
0.00…10000000.00 Motor power.
kW
1 = 1 kW
Energy calculations
reset
Done
Resets the savings counter parameters 45.01…45.10.
Done
Reset not requested (normal operation), or reset complete.
0
Reset
Reset the savings counter parameters. The value reverts
automatically to Done.
1
46
46 Monitoring/scaling
settings
Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general
scaling settings.
46.01
Speed scaling
Defines the maximum speed value used to define the
acceleration ramp rate and the initial speed value used to
define the deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group 23
Speed reference ramp). The speed acceleration and
deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value
(not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed).
Also defines the 16-bit scaling of speed-related parameters.
The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in eg.
fieldbus communication.
1500.00 rpm
0.10…30000.00
rpm
Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed.
1 = 1 rpm
280 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
46.02
Frequency scaling
Defines the maximum frequency value used to define the
acceleration ramp rate and the initial frequency value used to
define deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group 28
Frequency reference chain). The frequency acceleration and
deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value
(not to parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency).
Also defines the 16-bit scaling of frequency-related
parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to
20000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
50.00 Hz
0.10…1000.00 Hz
Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial frequency.
10 = 1 Hz
46.03
Torque scaling
Defines the 16-bit scaling of torque parameters. The value of
this parameter (in percent of nominal motor torque)
corresponds to 10000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
100.0%
0.1…1000.0%
Torque corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus.
10 = 1%
46.04
Power scaling
Defines the output power value that corresponds to 10000 in
eg. fieldbus communication. The unit is selected by
parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
1000.00 kW
or hp
0.1…30000.00 kW
or
0.1…40214.48 hp
Power corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus.
1 = 1 unit
46.05
Current scaling
Defines the 16-bit scaling of current parameters. The value of
this parameter corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus
communication.
10000 A
46.11
Filter time motor
speed
Defines a filter time for signals 01.01 Motor speed used and
01.02 Motor speed estimated.
500 ms
2…20000 ms
Motor speed signal filter time.
1 = 1 ms
46.12
Filter time output
frequency
Defines a filter time for signal 01.06 Output frequency.
500 ms
0…30000 A
46.13
46.14
2…20000 ms
Output frequency signal filter time.
1 = 1 ms
Filter time motor
torque
Defines a filter time for signal 01.10 Motor torque.
100 ms
2…20000 ms
Motor torque signal filter time.
1 = 1 ms
Filter time power
Defines a filter time for signal 01.14 Output power.
100 ms
2…20000 ms
Output power signal filter time.
1 = 1 ms
Parameters 281
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
46.21
At speed hysteresis
Defines the “at setpoint” limits for speed control of the drive.
When the difference between reference (22.87 Speed
reference act 7) and the speed (24.02 Used speed feedback)
is smaller than 46.21 At speed hysteresis, the drive is
considered to be “at setpoint”. This is indicated by bit 8 of
06.11 Main status word.
50.00 rpm
24.02 (rpm)
22.87 + 46.21 (rpm)
Drive at setpoint
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
22.87 (rpm)
22.87 - 46.21 (rpm)
0 rpm
46.22
0.00…30000.00
rpm
Limit for “at setpoint” indication in speed control.
See par.
46.01
At frequency
hysteresis
Defines the “at setpoint” limits for frequency control of the
drive. When the absolute difference between reference
(28.96 Frequency ref ramp input) and actual frequency (01.06
Output frequency) is smaller than 46.22 At frequency
hysteresis, the drive is considered to be “at setpoint”. This is
indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.
2.00 Hz
01.06 (Hz)
28.96 + 46.22 (Hz)
Drive at setpoint
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
28.96 (Hz)
28.96 - 46.22 (Hz)
0 Hz
0.00…1000.00 Hz
Limit for “at setpoint” indication in frequency control.
See par.
46.02
282 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
46.23
At torque hysteresis Defines the “at setpoint” limits for torque control of the drive.
When the absolute difference between reference (26.73
Torque reference act 4) and actual torque (01.10 Motor
torque) is smaller than 46.23 At torque hysteresis, the drive is
considered to be “at setpoint”. This is indicated by bit 8 of
06.11 Main status word.
Description
Def/FbEq16
5.0%
01.10 (%)
26.73 + 46.23 (%)
Drive at setpoint
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
26.73 (%)
26.73 - 46.23 (%)
0%
46.31
46.32
46.33
46.41
0.0…300.0%
Limit for “at setpoint” indication in torque control.
See par.
46.03
Above speed limit
Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in speed
control. When actual speed exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17
Drive status word 2 is set.
1500.00 rpm
0.00…30000.00
rpm
“Above limit” indication trigger level for speed control.
See par.
46.01
Above frequency
limit
Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in
frequency control. When actual frequency exceeds the limit,
bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
50.00 Hz
0.00…1000.00 Hz
“Above limit” indication trigger level for frequency control.
See par.
46.02
Above torque limit
Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in torque
control. When actual torque exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17
Drive status word 2 is set.
300.0%
0.0…1600.0%
“Above limit” indication trigger level for torque control.
See par.
46.03
kWh pulse scaling
Defines the trigger level for the “kWh pulse” on for 50 ms. The
output of the pulse is bit 9 of 05.22 Diagnostic word 3.
1.000 kWh
0.001…
1000.000 kWh
“kWh pulse” on trigger level.
1 = 1 kWh
47
47 Data storage
Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from
using other parameters’ source and target settings.
Note that there are different storage parameters for different
data types.
See also section Data storage parameters (page 133).
47.01
Data storage 1
real32
Data storage parameter 1.
0.000
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage 2
real32
Data storage parameter 2.
0.000
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
32-bit data.
-
47.02
Parameters 283
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
47.03
Data storage 3
real32
Data storage parameter 3.
0.000
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage 4
real32
Data storage parameter 4.
0.000
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage 1
int32
Data storage parameter 9.
0
-2147483648…
2147483647
32-bit data.
-
Data storage 2
int32
Data storage parameter 10.
0
-2147483648…
2147483647
32-bit data.
-
Data storage 3
int32
Data storage parameter 11.
0
-2147483648…
2147483647
32-bit data.
-
Data storage 4
int32
Data storage parameter 12.
0
-2147483648…
2147483647
32-bit data.
-
47.21
Data storage 1
int16
Data storage parameter 17.
0
-32768…32767
16-bit data.
1=1
47.22
Data storage 2
int16
Data storage parameter 18.
0
-32768…32767
16-bit data.
1=1
47.23
Data storage 3
int16
Data storage parameter 19.
0
-32768…32767
16-bit data.
1=1
47.24
Data storage 4
int16
Data storage parameter 20.
0
-32768…32767
16-bit data.
1=1
47.04
47.11
47.12
47.13
47.14
49
49 Panel port
communication
Communication settings for the control panel port on the
drive.
49.01
Node ID number
Defines the node ID of the drive. All devices connected to the
network must have a unique node ID.
Note: For networked drives, it is advisable to reserve ID 1 for
spare/replacement drives.
1…32
Node ID.
1=1
49.03
Baud rate
Defines the transfer rate of the link.
115.2 kbps
38.4 kbps
38.4 kbit/s.
1
57.6 kbps
57.6 kbit/s.
2
86.4 kbps
86.4 kbit/s.
3
1
284 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
115.2 kbps
115.2 kbit/s.
4
230.4 kbps
230.4 kbit/s.
5
49.04
Communication
loss time
Sets a timeout for control panel (or PC tool) communication. If
a communication break lasts longer than the timeout, the
action specified by parameter 49.05 Communication loss
action is taken.
10.0 s
0.3…3000.0 s
Panel/PC tool communication timeout.
10 = 1 s
49.05
Communication
loss action
Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel (or PC tool)
communication break.
Fault
49.06
No action
No action taken.
0
Fault
Drive trips on 7081 Control panel loss Programmable fault:
49.05 Communication loss action.
1
Last speed
Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and freezes the
speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is
determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms lowpass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
2
Speed ref safe
Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and sets the
speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref
safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference
is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
3
Refresh settings
Applies the settings of parameters 49.01…49.05.
Note: Refreshing may cause a communication break, so
reconnecting the drive may be required.
Done
Done
Refresh done or not requested.
0
Configure
Refresh parameters 49.01…49.05. The value reverts
automatically to Done.
1
50
50 Fieldbus adapter
(FBA)
Fieldbus communication configuration.
See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
(page 405).
50.01
FBA A enable
Enables/disables communication between the drive and
fieldbus adapter A, and specifies the slot the adapter is
installed into.
Disable
Disable
Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A
disabled.
0
Enable
Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A
enabled. The adapter is in slot 1.
1
FBA A comm loss
func
Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication
break. The time delay is defined by parameter 50.03 FBA A
comm loss t out.
No
No
No action taken.
0
Fault
Communication break detection active. Upon a
communication break, the drive trips on a 7510 FBA A
communication fault and coasts to a stop.
1
50.02
Parameters 285
No.
50.03
50.04
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Last speed
Communication break detection active. Upon a
communication break, the drive generates a warning (A7C1
FBA A communication) and freezes the speed to the level the
drive was operating at. The speed is determined on the basis
of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
2
Speed ref safe
Communication break detection active. Upon a
communication break, the drive generates a warning (A7C1
FBA A communication) and sets the speed to the value
defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41
Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
3
Fault always
Drive trips on 7510 FBA A communication. This occurs even
though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
4
Warning
Drive generates an A7C1 FBA A communication warning.
This occurs even though no control is expected from the
fieldbus.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
5
FBA A comm loss t
out
Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter
50.02 FBA A comm loss func is taken. Time count starts when
the communication link fails to update the message.
0.3 s
0.3…6553.5 s
Time delay.
1=1s
FBA A ref1 type
Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from
fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the reference is defined by
parameters 46.01…46.04, depending on which reference
type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or
frequency
Speed or frequency
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
currently active operation mode as follows:
0
Operation mode
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Reference 1 type
Speed
Speed
Frequency
Transparent
No scaling is applied.
1
General
Generic reference without a specific unit.
2
Torque
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. 5
286 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
50.05
FBA A ref2 type
Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from
fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the reference is defined by
parameters 46.01…46.04, depending on which reference
type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or
frequency
Speed or frequency
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
currently active operation mode as follows:
0
Operation mode
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
50.06
50.07
Reference 2 type
Torque
Torque
Torque
Transparent
No scaling is applied.
General
Generic reference without a specific unit.
1
2
Torque
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
4
Speed
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. 5
FBA A SW sel
Selects the source of the Status word to be sent to the
fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Auto
Source of the Status word is chosen automatically.
0
Transparent mode
The source selected by parameter 50.09 FBA A SW
transparent source is transmitted as the Status word to the
fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
1
Auto
FBA A actual 1 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to
the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. The scaling
of the value is defined by parameters 46.01…46.04,
depending on which actual value type is selected by this
parameter.
Speed or
frequency
Speed or frequency
0
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
currently active operation mode as follows:
Operation mode
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Actual value 1 type
Speed
Speed
Frequency
Transparent
No scaling is applied.
General
Generic reference without a specific unit.
1
2
Torque
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. 5
Parameters 287
No.
Name/Value
50.08
FBA A actual 2 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to
the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. The scaling
of the value is defined by parameters 46.01…46.04,
depending on which actual value type is selected by this
parameter.
Description
Speed or
frequency
Speed or frequency
0
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
currently active operation mode as follows:
Operation mode
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
50.09
50.10
50.11
50.12
50.13
Def/FbEq16
Actual value 2 type
Torque
Torque
Torque
Transparent
No scaling is applied.
1
General
Generic reference without a specific unit.
2
Torque
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. 5
FBA A SW
transparent source
Selects the source of the fieldbus status word when
parameter 50.06 FBA A SW sel is set to Transparent mode.
Not selected
Not selected
No source selected.
-
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
FBA A act1
transparent source
When parameter 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type is set to
Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual value
1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter
A.
Not selected
Not selected
No source selected.
-
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
FBA A act2
transparent source
When parameter 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type is set to
Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual value
2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter
A.
Not selected
Not selected
No source selected.
-
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
FBA A debug mode
This parameter enables debug mode. Displays raw
(unmodified) data received from and sent to fieldbus adapter
A in parameters 50.13…50.18.
Normal
Disable
Debug mode disabled.
0
Fast
Debug mode enabled. Cyclical data update is as fast as
possible which increases CPU load on the drive.
1
Normal
Debug mode is enabled but data update cycle is slow enough
to enable normal operations.
2
FBA A control word
Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-
00000000h…
FFFFFFFFh
Control word sent by master to fieldbus adapter A.
-
288 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
50.14
FBA A reference 1
Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF1 sent by the master
(PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-2147483648…
2147483647
Raw REF1 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A.
-
FBA A reference 2
Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF2 sent by the master
(PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-2147483648…
2147483647
Raw REF2 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A.
-
FBA A status word
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by fieldbus
adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-
00000000h…
FFFFFFFFh
Status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to master.
-
FBA A actual value
1
Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT1 sent by fieldbus
adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-2147483648…
2147483647
Raw ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master.
-
FBA A actual value
2
Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT2 sent by fieldbus
adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-
-2147483648…
2147483647
Raw ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master.
-
50.15
50.16
50.17
50.18
51
51 FBA A settings
Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
51.01
FBA A type
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = Module is not found or is not properly connected, or is
disabled by parameter 50.01 FBA A enable; 0 = None;
1 = PROFIBUS-DP; 32 = CANopen; 37 = DeviceNet;
128 = Ethernet; 132 = PROFInet IO; 135 = EtherCAT;
136 = ETH Pwrlink; 485 = RS-485 comm; 101 = ControlNet;
This parameter is read-only.
-
51.02
FBA A Par2
Parameters 51.02…51.26 are adapter module-specific. For
more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus
adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are
necessarily in use.
-
0…65535
Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter.
1=1
…
…
…
…
51.26
FBA A Par26
See parameter 51.02 FBA A Par2.
-
0…65535
Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter.
1=1
Parameters 289
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
51.27
FBA A par refresh
Validates any changed fieldbus adapter module configuration
settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to
Done.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Done
Done
Refreshing done.
0
Configure
Refreshing.
1
51.28
FBA A par table ver
Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter
module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive).
In format axyz, where ax = major table revision number; yz =
minor table revision number.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Parameter table revision of adapter module.
-
51.29
FBA A drive type
code
Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus adapter module
mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive).
This parameter is read-only.
-
0…65535
Drive type code stored in the mapping file.
1=1
51.30
FBA A mapping file
ver
Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision
stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0…65535
Mapping file revision.
1=1
51.31
D2FBA A comm
status
Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module
communication.
Not
configured
Not configured
Adapter is not configured.
0
Initializing
Adapter is initializing.
1
Time out
A timeout has occurred in the communication between the
adapter and the drive.
2
Configuration error
Adapter configuration error: mapping file not found in the file
system of the drive, or mapping file upload has failed more
than three times.
3
Off-line
Fieldbus communication is off-line.
4
On-line
Fieldbus communication is on-line, or fieldbus adapter has
been configured not to detect a communication break. For
more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus
adapter.
5
6
Reset
Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
51.32
FBA A comm SW
ver
Displays the common program revision of the adapter module
in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor
revision number, z = correction number or letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
51.33
FBA A appl SW ver
Common program revision of adapter module.
-
Displays the application program revision of the adapter
module in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy =
minor revision number, z = correction number or letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Application program version of adapter module.
-
290 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
52
Description
Def/FbEq16
52 FBA A data in
Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus
controller through fieldbus adapter A.
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters.
Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter, the
next parameter is automatically reserved.
52.01
FBA A data in1
Parameters 52.01…52.12 select data to be transferred from
None
the drive to the fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A.
None
None.
0
CW 16bit
Control Word (16 bits)
1
Ref1 16bit
Reference REF1 (16 bits)
2
Ref2 16bit
Reference REF2 (16 bits)
3
SW 16bit
Status Word (16 bits)
4
Act1 16bit
Actual value ACT1 (16 bits)
5
Act2 16bit
Actual value ACT2 (16 bits)
6
CW 32bit
Control Word (32 bits)
11
Ref1 32bit
Reference REF1 (32 bits)
12
Ref2 32bit
Reference REF2 (32 bits)
13
SW 32bit
Status Word (32 bits)
14
Act1 32bit
Actual value ACT1 (32 bits)
15
Act2 32bit
Actual value ACT2 (32 bits)
16
SW2 16bit
Status Word 2 (16 bits)
24
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
…
…
…
…
52.12
FBA A data in12
See parameter 52.01 FBA A data in1.
None
53
53 FBA A data out
Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to
drive through fieldbus adapter A.
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters.
Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter, the
next parameter is automatically reserved.
53.01
FBA A data out1
Parameters 53.01…53.12 select data to be transferred from
None
the fieldbus controller to the drive through fieldbus adapter A.
None
None.
0
CW 16bit
Control Word (16 bits)
1
Ref1 16bit
Reference REF1 (16 bits)
2
Ref2 16bit
Reference REF2 (16 bits)
3
CW 32bit
Control Word (32 bits)
11
Ref1 32bit
Reference REF1 (32 bits)
12
Ref2 32bit
Reference REF2 (32 bits)
13
CW2 16bit
Control Word 2 (16 bits)
21
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
…
…
…
…
53.12
FBA A data out12
See parameter 53.01 FBA A data out1.
None
Parameters 291
No.
Name/Value
58
Description
Def/FbEq16
58 Embedded fieldbus
Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface.
See also chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded
fieldbus interface (EFB) (page 377).
58.01
Protocol enable
Enables/disables the embedded fieldbus interface and
selects the protocol to use.
None
None
None (communication disabled).
0
Modbus RTU
Embedded fieldbus interface is enabled and uses the Modbus
RTU protocol.
1
58.02
Protocol ID
Displays the protocol ID and revision.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Protocol ID and revision.
1=1
58.03
Node address
Defines the node address of the drive on the fieldbus link.
Values 1…247 are allowable. Two devices with the same
address are not allowed on-line.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
1
0…255
Node address (values 1…247 are allowed).
1=1
58.04
Baud rate
Selects the transfer rate of the fieldbus link.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
19.2 kbps
4.8 kbps
4.8 kbit/s.
1
9.6 kbps
9.6 kbit/s.
2
19.2 kbps
19.2 kbit/s.
3
38.4 kbps
38.4 kbit/s.
4
57.6 kbps
57.6 kbit/s.
5
76.8 kbps
76.8 kbit/s.
6
115.2 kbps
115.2 kbit/s.
7
Parity
Selects the type of parity bit and number of stop bits.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
8 EVEN 1
8 NONE 1
Eight data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit.
0
8 NONE 2
Eight data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits.
1
8 EVEN 1
Eight data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit.
2
8 ODD 1
Eight data bits, odd parity bit, one stop bit.
3
Communication
control
Takes changed EFB settings in use, or activates silent mode.
Enabled
Enabled
Normal operation.
0
Refresh settings
Refreshes settings (parameters 58.01…58.05, 58.14…58.17,
58.25, 58.28…58.34) and takes changed EFB configuration
settings in use. Reverts automatically to Enabled.
1
Silent mode
Activates silent mode (no messages are transmitted).
Silent mode can be terminated by activating the Refresh
settings selection of this parameter.
2
58.05
58.06
292 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
58.07
Communication
diagnostics
Displays the status of the EFB communication.
This parameter is read-only.
Note that the name is only visible when the error is present
(bit value is 1).
-
Bit
0
1
2
Name
Init failed
Addr config err
Silent mode
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reserved
Wiring error
Parity error
Baud rate error
No bus activity
No packets
9
Noise or addressing
error
Comm loss
10
11
CW/Ref loss
12
Not active
13…15 Reserved
Description
1 = EFB initialization failed
1 = Node address not allowed by protocol
1 = Drive not allowed to transmit
0 = Drive allowed to transmit
1 = Errors detected (A/B wires possibly swapped)
1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.04 and 58.05
1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.05 and 58.04
1 = 0 bytes received during last 5 seconds
1 = 0 packets (addressed to any device) detected during last 5
seconds
1 = Errors detected (interference, or another device with the
same address on line)
1 = 0 packets addressed to the drive received within timeout
(58.16)
1 = No control word or references received within timeout (58.16)
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
EFB communication status.
1=1
58.08
Received packets
Displays a count of valid packets addressed to the drive.
During normal operation, this number increases constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down
for over 3 seconds.
-
0…4294967295
Number of received packets addressed to the drive.
1=1
58.09
Transmitted packets Displays a count of valid packets transmitted by the drive.
During normal operation, this number increases constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down
for over 3 seconds.
-
0…4294967295
Number of transmitted packets.
1=1
58.10
All packets
Displays a count of valid packets addressed to any device on
the bus. During normal operation, this number increases
constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down
for over 3 seconds.
-
0…4294967295
Number of all received packets.
1=1
58.11
UART errors
Displays a count of character errors received by the drive. An
increasing count indicates a configuration problem on the
bus.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down
for over 3 seconds.
-
0…4294967295
Number of UART errors.
1=1
Parameters 293
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
58.12
CRC errors
Displays a count of packets with a CRC error received by the
drive. An increasing count indicates interference on the bus.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down
for over 3 seconds.
-
0…4294967295
Number of CRC errors.
1=1
58.14
Communication
loss action
Selects how the drive reacts to an EFB communication break. Fault
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameters 58.15 Communication loss mode and
58.16 Communication loss time.
No
No action taken (monitoring disabled).
0
Fault
The drive monitors communication loss when start/stop is
expected from the EFB on the currently active control
location. Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss only if control in
the currently active control location is expected from the EFB.
The drive does not trip if only reference is coming from EFB
and the communication is lost.
1
Last speed
Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and
freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The
speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using
850 ms low-pass filtering. This occurs only if control is
expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
2
Speed ref safe
Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and sets
the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref
safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference
is being used). This occurs only if control is expected from the
EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
3
Fault always
Drive continuously monitors for communication loss. Drive
trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This happens even thought the
drive is in a control location where the EFB start/stop or
reference is not used.
4
Warning
Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning. This
occurs even though no control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
5
Communication
loss mode
Defines which message types reset the timeout counter for
detecting an EFB communication loss.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameters 58.14 Communication loss action and
58.16 Communication loss time.
Cw / Ref1 /
Ref2
58.15
Any message
Any message addressed to the drive resets the timeout.
1
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2
A write of the control word or a reference resets the timeout.
2
294 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
58.16
Communication
loss time
Sets a timeout for EFB communication. If a communication
break lasts longer than the timeout, the action specified by
parameter 58.14 Communication loss action is taken.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameter 58.15 Communication loss mode.
3.0 s
0.0…6000.0 s
EFB communication timeout.
1=1
58.17
Transmit delay
Defines a minimum response delay in addition to any fixed
delay imposed by the protocol.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
0 ms
0…65535 ms
Minimum response delay.
1=1
58.18
EFB control word
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by the drive to
the Modbus controller. For debugging purposes.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0000h…FFFFh
Control word sent by Modbus controller to the drive.
1=1
58.19
EFB status word
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word for debugging
purposes.
This parameter is read-only.
-
0000h…FFFFh
Status word sent by the drive to the Modbus controller.
1=1
58.25
Control profile
Defines the communication profile used by the protocol.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
ABB Drives
58.26
ABB Drives
ABB Drives control profile (with a 16-bit control word)
0
DCU Profile
DCU control profile (with a 16 or 32-bit control word)
5
EFB ref1 type
Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received through
the embedded fieldbus interface.
The scaled reference is displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1.
Speed or
frequency
Speed or frequency
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
currently active operation mode as follows.
0
Operation mode
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Reference 1 type
Speed
Speed
Frequency
Transparent
No scaling is applied.
General
Generic reference without a specific unit. Scaling: 1 = 100.
1
2
Torque
Torque reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03
Torque scaling.
3
Speed
Speed reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01
Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
Frequency reference. The scaling is defined by parameter
46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
Parameters 295
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
58.27
EFB ref2 type
Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received through
the embedded fieldbus interface.
The scaled reference is displayed by 03.10 EFB reference 2.
Torque
58.28
EFB act1 type
Selects the type of actual value 1.
Speed or
frequency
Speed or frequency
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
currently active operation mode as follows.
0
Operation mode
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Actual 1 type
Speed
Speed
Frequency
Transparent
No scaling is applied.
1
General
Generic reference without a specific unit. Scaling: 1 = 100.
2
Torque
Scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Speed
Scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
Scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
58.29
EFB act2 type
Selects the type of actual value 2.
For the selections, see parameter 58.28 EFB act1 type.
Transparent
58.31
EFB act1
transparent source
Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter 58.28
EFB act1 type is set to Transparent.
Not selected
Not selected
None.
0
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
EFB act2
transparent source
Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter 58.29
EFB act2 type is set to Transparent.
Other (par.
01.07 Motor
current)
Not selected
None.
0
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Addressing mode
Defines the mapping between parameters and holding
registers in the 400101…465535 Modbus register range.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
Mode 0
Mode 0
16-bit values (groups 1…99, indexes 1…99):
Register address = 400000 + 100 × parameter group +
parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be
mapped to register 400000 + 2200 + 80 = 402280.
32-bit values (groups 1…99, indexes 1…99):
Register address = 420000 + 200 × parameter group +
2 × parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be
mapped to register 420000 + 4400 + 160 = 424560.
0
Mode 1
16-bit values (groups 1…255, indexes 1…255):
Register address = 400000 + 256 × parameter group +
parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be
mapped to register 400000 + 5632 + 80 = 405712.
1
Mode 2
32-bit values (groups 1…127, indexes 1…255):
Register address = 400000 + 512 × parameter group +
2 × parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be
mapped to register 400000 + 11264 + 160 = 411424.
2
58.32
58.33
296 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
58.34
Word order
Selects in which order 16-bit registers of 32-bit parameters
are transferred.
For each register, the first byte contains the high order byte
and the second byte contains the low order byte.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is
rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06
Communication control (Refresh settings).
LO-HI
HI-LO
The first register contains the high order word, the second
contains the low order word.
0
LO-HI
The first register contains the low order word, the second
contains the high order word.
1
Data I/O 1
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master
accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address
corresponding to Modbus register 1 (400001).
The master defines the type of the data (input or output). The
value is transmitted in a Modbus frame consisting of two 16bit words. If the value is 16-bit, it is transmitted in the LSW
(least significant word). If the value is 32-bit, the subsequent
parameter is also reserved for it and must be set to None.
CW 16bit
58.101
None
No mapping, register is always zero.
0
CW 16bit
ABB Drives profile: 16-bit ABB drives control word; DCU
Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU control word
1
Ref1 16bit
Reference REF1 (16 bits)
2
Ref2 16bit
Reference REF2 (16 bits)
3
SW 16bit
ABB Drives profile: 16-bit ABB drives status word; DCU
Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU status word
4
Act1 16bit
Actual value ACT1 (16 bits)
5
Act2 16bit
Actual value ACT2 (16 bits)
6
CW 32bit
Control Word (32 bits)
11
Ref1 32bit
Reference REF1 (32 bits)
12
Ref2 32bit
Reference REF2 (32 bits)
13
SW 32bit
Status Word (32 bits)
14
Act1 32bit
Actual value ACT1 (32 bits)
15
Act2 32bit
Actual value ACT2 (32 bits)
16
CW2 16bit
ABB Drives profile: not used; DCU Profile: upper 16 bits of
the DCU control word
21
SW2 16bit
ABB Drives profile: not used / always zero; DCU Profile:
upper 16 bits of the DCU status word
24
RO/DIO control
word
Parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word.
31
AO1 data storage
Parameter 13.91 AO1 data storage.
32
AO2 data storage
Parameter 13.92 AO2 data storage.
33
Feedback data
storage
Parameter 40.91 Feedback data storage.
40
Setpoint data
storage
Parameter 40.92 Setpoint data storage.
41
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
Parameters 297
Description
Def/FbEq16
58.102 Data I/O 2
No.
Name/Value
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400002.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Ref1 16bit
58.103 Data I/O 3
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400003.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Ref2 16bit
58.104 Data I/O 4
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400004.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
SW 16bit
58.105 Data I/O 5
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400005.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Act1 16bit
58.106 Data I/O 6
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400006.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Act2 16bit
58.107 Data I/O 7
Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400007.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
…
…
…
…
58.114
Data I/O 14
Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400014.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
71
71 External PID1
Configuration of external PID.
71.01
External PID act
value
See parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual.
-
71.02
Feedback act value
See parameter 40.02 Process PID feedback actual.
-
71.03
Setpoint act value
See parameter 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual.
-
71.04
Deviation act value
See parameter 40.04 Process PID deviation actual.
-
298 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
71.06
PID status word
Displays status information on process external PID control.
This parameter is read-only.
-
Bit
0
1
2
Name
PID active
Reserved
Output frozen
3…6
7
8
9
10…11
12
Reserved
Output limit high
Output limit low
Deadband active
Reserved
Internal setpoint
active
13…15 Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Value
1 = Process PID control active.
1 = Process PID controller output frozen. Bit is set if parameter
71.38 Output freeze enable is TRUE, or the deadband function is
active (bit 9 is set).
1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.37.
1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.36.
1 = Deadband is active.
1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 40.16…40.16)
Process PID control status word.
1=1
71.07
PID operation mode See parameter 40.07 Process PID operation mode.
Off
71.08
Feedback 1 source
AI2 percent
71.11
Feedback filter time See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time.
0.000 s
71.14
Set 1 setpoint
scaling
Defines, together with parameter 71.15 Set 1 output scaling,
a general scaling factor for the external PID control chain.
The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process
setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID controller is
used as an rpm value in speed control. In this case, this
parameter might be set to 50, and parameter 71.15 to the
nominal motor speed at 50 Hz.
In effect, the output of the PID controller [71.15] when
deviation (setpoint - feedback) = [71.14] and [71.32] = 1.
Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 71.14 and
71.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would produce
the same scaling as 1 and 3.
1500.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Process setpoint base.
1=1
71.15
See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source.
Set 1 output scaling See parameter 71.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling.
1500.00
-32768.00…
32767.00
Process PID controller output base.
1=1
71.16
Setpoint 1 source
See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source.
AI1 percent
71.19
Internal setpoint
sel1
See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Not selected
71.20
Internal setpoint
sel2
See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2.
Not selected
71.21
Internal setpoint 1
See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1.
0.00 PID
customer
units
71.22
Internal setpoint 2
See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2.
0.00 PID
customer
units
Parameters 299
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
71.23
Internal setpoint 3
See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3.
0.00 PID
customer
units
71.26
Setpoint min
See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min.
0.00
71.27
Setpoint max
See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max.
32767.00
71.31
Deviation inversion
See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
Not inverted
(Ref - Fbk)
71.32
Gain
See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain.
1.00
71.33
Integration time
See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
60.0 s
71.34
Derivation time
See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time.
0.000 s
71.35
Derivation filter time See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time.
0.0 s
71.36
Output min
See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
-32768.0
71.37
Output max
See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max.
32767.0
71.38
Output freeze
enable
See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
Not selected
71.39
Deadband range
The control program compares the absolute value of
parameter 71.04 Deviation act value to the deadband range
defined by this parameter. If the absolute value is within the
deadband range for the time period defined by parameter
71.40 Deadband delay, PID's deadband mode is activated
and 71.06 PID status word bit 9 Deadband active is set. Then
PID's output is frozen and 71.06 PID status word bit 2 Output
frozen is set.
If the absolute value is equal or greater than the deadband
range, PID's deadband mode is deactivated.
0.0
0.0…32767.0
Range
1=1
71.40
Deadband delay
Defines the deadband delay for the deadband function. See
parameter 71.39 Deadband range.
0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s
Delay
1=1s
71.58
Increase prevention See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention.
No
71.59
Decrease
prevention
See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention.
No
71.62
Internal setpoint
actual
See parameter 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual.
-
76
76 PFC configuration
PFC (Pump and fan control) and Autochange configuration
parameters. See also section Pump and fan control (PFC) on
page 114.
76.01
Displays the running/stopped status of the PFC motors.
PFC1, PFC2, PFC3 and PFC4 always correspond to the
1st…4th motor of the PFC system. If 76.74 Autochange
auxiliary PFC auxiliary PFC is set to Aux motors only, PFC1
represents the motor connected to the drive and PFC2 the
first auxiliary motor (the 2nd motor of the system). If 76.74 is
set to All motors, PFC1 is the first motor, PFC2 the 2nd. The
drive can be connected to any of these motors depending on
the Autochange functionality.
PFC status
-
300 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Bit
0
1
2
3
4…15
Description
Name
PFC 1 running
PFC 2 running
PFC 3 running
PFC 4 running
Reserved
Def/FbEq16
Value
0 = Stop, 1
0 = Stop, 1
0 = Stop, 1
0 = Stop, 1
= Start
= Start
= Start
= Start
0000h…FFFFh
Status of the PFC relay outputs.
1=1
76.02
PFC system status
Displays the status of the PFC system in text form. Provides a
quick PFC system overview, eg. if the parameter is added to
the Home view on the control panel.
-
76.11
Pump/fan status 1
Shows the status of pump or fan 1.
-
Bit
0
2
5
1, 3,
4…10
11
12…15
Name
Ready
Running
In PFC control
Reserved
Value
0 = False, 1 = True
0 = False, 1 = True
0 = False, 1 = True
Interlocked
Reserved
0 = False, 1 = True
0000h…FFFFh
Status of pump or fan 1.
1=1
76.12
Pump/fan status 2
See parameter 76.11 Pump/fan status 1.
-
76.13
Pump/fan status 3
See parameter 76.11 Pump/fan status 1.
-
76.14
Pump/fan status 4
See parameter 76.11 Pump/fan status 1.
-
76.21
PFC configuration
Selects the multi-pump/fan control (PFC) mode.
Off
Off
PFC disabled.
0
PFC
PFC enabled. One pump at a time is controlled by the drive.
The remaining pumps are direct-on-line pumps that are
started and stopped by the drive logic
The frequency (group 28 Frequency reference chain) / speed
(group 22 Speed reference selection) reference must be
defined as PID for the PFC functionality to work properly.
2
76.25
Number of motors
Total number of motors used in the application, including the
motor connected directly to the drive.
1
1…4
Number of motors.
1=1
76.26
Min number of
motors allowed
Minimum number of motors running simultaneously.
1
0…4
Minimum number of motors.
1=1
76.27
Max number of
motors allowed
Maximum number of motors running simultaneously.
1
1…4
Maximum number of motors.
1=1
Parameters 301
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
76.30
Start speed 1
Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the first auxiliary motor.
As the motor speed or frequency exceeds the limit defined by
this parameter, a new auxiliary motor is started.
To avoid nuisance starts of the second auxiliary motor, the
speed of the variable speed motor should be higher than the
start speed for the duration defined by parameter 76.55 Start
delay. If the speed decreases below the start speed, the
auxiliary motor is not started.
To maintain the process conditions during the start of the
second auxiliary motor, a speed hold on time can be defined
with parameter 76.57 Speed hold on. Certain pump types do
not produce significant flow with low frequencies. The speed
hold on time can be used to compensate the time needed to
accelerate the second auxiliary motor to a speed where it
produces flow. The start of the second auxiliary motor is not
aborted if the speed of the first auxiliary motor decreases
Vector:
1300 rpm;
Scalar 48 Hz
(US: 58 Hz)
Speed
76.55
76.57
Max. speed
76.30
76.41
76.56
Aux. pump 1
Stop/Start
Min. speed
76.58
Time
ON
OFF
Start
ON
OFF
Stop
Increasing
flow
Decreasing
flow
0…32767 rpm/Hz
Speed/frequency.
1 = 1 unit
76.31
Start speed 2
Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the second auxiliary
motor. See parameter 76.31 Start speed 1.
Vector:
1300 rpm;
Scalar 48 Hz
(US: 58 Hz)
76.32
Start speed 3
Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the third auxiliary motor.
See parameter 76.31 Start speed 1.
Vector:
1300 rpm;
Scalar 48 Hz
(US: 58 Hz)
76.41
Stop speed 1
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the first auxiliary motor.
When the speed of the motor connected directly to the drive
falls below this value and one auxiliary motor is running, the
stop delay defined by parameter 76.56 Stop delay is started.
If the speed is still at the same level or lower when the stop
delay elapses, the first auxiliary motor stops.
The running speed of the drive is increased by [Start speed 1
- Stop speed 1] after the auxiliary motor stops
Vector:
800 rpm;
Scalar 25 Hz
(US: 30 Hz)
0…32767 rpm/Hz
Speed/frequency
1 = 1 unit
302 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
76.42
Stop speed 2
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the second auxiliary
motor. See parameter 76.31 Stop speed 1.
Vector:
800 rpm;
Scalar 25 Hz
(US: 30 Hz)
76.43
Stop speed 3
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the third auxiliary motor.
See parameter 76.31 Stop speed 1.
Vector:
800 rpm;
Scalar 25 Hz
(US: 30 Hz)
76.55
Start delay
Defines a start delay for auxiliary motors. See parameter
76.31 Start speed 1.
10.00 s
0.00…12600.00 s
Time delay.
1=1s
76.56
Stop delay
Defines a stop delay for auxiliary motors. See parameter
76.31 Stop speed 1.
10.00 s
0.00…12600.00 s
Time delay.
1=1s
76.57
Speed hold on
Hold time for auxiliary motor switch-on. See parameter 76.31
Start speed 1.
0.00 s
0.00…1000.00 s
Time.
1=1s
76.58
Speed hold off
Hold time for auxiliary motor switch-off. See parameter 76.31
Stop speed 1.
0.00 s
0.00…1000.00 s
Time.
1=1s
76.59
PFC contactor
delay
Start delay for the motor that is directly controlled by the drive.
This does not affect the starting of the auxiliary motors.
WARNING! There must always be a delay set if the
motors are equipped with star-delta starters. The
delay must be set longer than the time setting of the
starter. After the motor is switched on by the relay output of
the drive, there must be enough time for the star-delta starter
to first switch to star and then back to delta before the motor
is connected to the drive.
0.50 s
0.20…600.00 s
Time delay.
1=1s
76.60
PFC ramp
acceleration time
Defines the acceleration time for the drive motor speed
compensation, when an auxiliary motor is stopped. This ramp
time is also used for the drive motor to accelerate after an
autochange has occurred.
The parameter sets the ramp-up time as seconds from zero
to maximum frequency (not from the previous reference to
the new reference).
1.00 s
0.00…1800.00 s
Time.
1=1s
76.61
PFC ramp
deceleration time
Defines the deceleration time for the drive motor speed
compensation, when an auxiliary motor is started. This ramp
time is also used for the drive motor to decelerate after an
autochange has occurred.
The parameter sets the ramp-up time as seconds from
maximum to zero frequency (not from the previous reference
to the new reference).
1.00 s
0.00…1800.00 s
Time.
1=1s
Parameters 303
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
76.70
Autochange
Defines the way the autochange is triggered.
In all cases except Even wear, the start order is moved one
step forward each time the autochange occurs. If the start
order initially is 1-2-3-4, after the first autochange the order
will be 2-3-4-1, etc.
For Even wear, the start order will be determined so that the
running times of all motors remain within the defined limit.
Note: Autochange only occurs when the speed of the drive is
below the speed defined by parameter 76.73 Autochange
level.
See also section Autochange on page 114.
Not selected
Not selected
Autochange disabled.
0
Selected
Rising edge starts the autochange if autochange conditions
are met.
1
DI1
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI1
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI2
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI3
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI4
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI5
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI6
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Autochange triggered by timed function 1 (bit 0 of 34.01
Combined timer status (see page 240)).
8
Timed function 2
Autochange triggered by timed function 2 (bit 1 of 34.01
Combined timer status (see page 240)).
9
Timed function 3
Autochange triggered by timed function 3 (bit 2 of 34.01
Combined timer status (see page 240)).
10
Fixed interval
Autochange is done when the interval determined in the
parameter 76.71 Autochange interval has elapsed.
11
All stop
Autochange is done when all the motors are stopped.
The PID sleep feature (parameters 40.43 Set 1 sleep level …
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay) must be used for the drive to stop
when the process demand is low.
12
Even wear
The running time of the motors are balanced by the drive.
When the difference in running time between the motors with
the least and most running hours exceeds the time defined by
parameter 76.72 Maximum wear imbalance, the autochange
occurs.
The running hours of the motors can be found in group 77
PFC maintenance and monitoring.
13
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
76.71
Autochange interval Specifies the interval that is used in setting Fixed interval of
parameter 76.70 Autochange.
1.00 h
0.00…42949672.95 Time.
h
1=1h
304 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
76.72
Maximum wear
imbalance
Specifies the maximum wear imbalance, or difference in
running times between any motor, used by the Even wear
setting of parameter 76.70 Autochange.
10.00 h
0.00…1000000.00
h
Time.
1=1h
Autochange level
Upper speed limit for the Autochange to occur. The
Autochange occurs when:
• the condition defined in 76.70 Autochange is fulfilled and,
• the speed of the drive motor 01.03 Motor speed % is below
the speed limit defined in this parameter.
Note: When the value is selected as 0%, this speed limit
check is disabled.
100.0%
0.0…300.0%
Speed/frequency in percentage of the nominal speed or
frequency of the drive motor.
1 = 1%
Autochange
auxiliary PFC
Selects whether only auxiliary motors or all motors are
included in the Autochange function.
Aux motors
only
All motors
All motors, including the one connected to the drive
participates in the autochange. The Autochange logic will
connect the drive to each of the motors according to setting of
parameter 76.70 Autochangee.
Note: The first motor (PFC1) also requires the appropriate
hardware contactor connections and PFC1 must be defined
in one of the relay output source parameters.
0
Aux motors only
Only auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are affected by the
autochange function.
Note: PFC1 refers to the motor that is fixed to the drive and
must not be selected in any of the relay output source
parameters. Only the starting order of the auxiliary motors will
be rotated.
1
PFC interlock 1
Defines if the PFC motor 1 can be started. An interlocked
PFC motor cannot be started.
0 = Interlocked (not available), 1 = Available.
Available.
PFC motor is
available
Interlocked. PFC
motor is not in use
PFC motor is interlocked and not available.
0
Available. PFC
motor is available
PFC motor is available.
1
76.73
76.74
76.81
76.82
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
8
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
9
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
10
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
PFC interlock 2
See parameter 76.82 PFC interlock 1.
Available.
PFC motor is
available
Parameters 305
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
76.83
PFC interlock 3
See parameter 76.82 PFC interlock 1.
Available.
PFC motor is
available
76.84
PFC interlock 4
See parameter 76.82 PFC interlock 1.
Available.
PFC motor is
available
77
77 PFC maintenance
and monitoring
PFC (Pump and fan control) maintenance and monitoring
parameters.
77.10
Enables the reset, or arbitrary setting, of 77.11 Pump/fan 1
running time … 77.14 Pump/fan 4 running time.
77.11
Runtime change
Done
Done
The parameter automatically reverts back to this value.
0
Set any PFC run
time
Enables the setting of 77.11 Pump/fan 1 running time …
77.14 Pump/fan 4 running time to an arbitrary value.
1
Reset PFC1 run
time
Resets parameter 77.11 Pump/fan 1 running time.
2
Reset PFC2 run
time
Resets parameter 77.12 Pump/fan 2 running time.
3
Reset PFC3 run
time
Resets parameter 77.13 Pump/fan 3 running time.
4
Reset PFC4 run
time
Resets parameter 77.14 Pump/fan 4 running time.
5
Pump/fan 1 running
time
Running time counter of pump/fan 1. Can be set or reset by
parameter 77.10 Pump/fan 1 running time.
0.00 h
0.00…42949672.95 Time
h
1=1h
77.12
Pump/fan 2 running
time
See parameter 77.11 Pump/fan 1 running time.
0.00 h
77.13
Pump/fan 3 running
time
See parameter 77.11 Pump/fan 1 running time.
0.00 h
77.14
Pump/fan 4 running
time
See parameter 77.11 Pump/fan 1 running time.
0.00 h
95
95 HW configuration
Various hardware-related settings.
95.01
Supply voltage
Selects the supply voltage range. This parameter is used by
the drive to determine the nominal voltage of the supply
network. The parameter also affects the current ratings and
the DC voltage control functions (trip and brake chopper
activation limits) of the drive.
WARNING! An incorrect setting may cause the motor
to rush uncontrollably, or the brake chopper or resistor
to overload.
Note: The selections shown depend on the hardware of the
drive. If only one voltage range is valid for the drive in
question, it is selected by default.
Automatic /
not selected
Automatic / not
selected
No voltage range selected. The drive will not start modulating
before a range is selected, unless parameter 95.02 Adaptive
voltage limits is set to Enable, in which case the drive
estimates the supply voltage itself.
0
208…240 V
208…240 V
1
380…415 V
380…415 V
2
306 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
440…480 V
440…480 V
3
500 V
500 V
4
525…600 V
525…600 V
5
660…690 V
660…690 V
6
Adaptive voltage
limits
Enables adaptive voltage limits.
Adaptive voltage limits can be used if, for example, an IGBT
supply unit is used to raise the DC voltage level. If the
communication between the inverter and IGBT supply unit is
active, the voltage limits are related to the DC voltage
reference from the IGBT supply unit. Otherwise the limits are
calculated based on the measured DC voltage at the end of
the pre-charging sequence.
This function is also useful if the AC supply voltage to the
drive is high, as the warning levels are raised accordingly.
Enable
Disable
Adaptive voltage limits disabled.
0
Enable
Adaptive voltage limits enabled.
1
95.03
Estimated AC
supply voltage
AC supply voltage estimated by calculation. Estimation is
done every time the drive is powered up and is based on the
rise speed of voltage level of the DC bus while the drive
charges the DC bus.
-
0…65535 V
Voltage.
10 = 1 V
95.04
Control board
supply
Specifies how the control board of the drive is powered.
Internal 24V
Internal 24V
The drive control board is powered from the drive power unit
it is connected to.
0
External 24V
The drive control board is powered from an external power
supply.
1
HW options word 1
Specifies hardware-related options that require differentiated
parameter defaults.
This parameter is not affected by a parameter restore.
-
95.02
95.20
Bit
0
Name
Supply frequency
60 Hz
1…15
Reserved
0000h…FFFFh
Def/FbEq16
Value
If you change the value of this bit, you have to do a complete reset to
the drive after the change. After reset you have to reselect the macro
to be used.
0 = 50 Hz.
1 = 60 Hz.
Hardware options configuration word.
1=1
Parameters 307
No.
Name/Value
96
Description
Def/FbEq16
96 System
Language selection; access levels; macro selection;
parameter save and restore; control unit reboot; user
parameter sets; unit selection.
96.01
Language
Selects the language of the parameter interface and other
displayed information when viewed on the control panel.
Notes:
• Not all languages listed below are necessarily supported.
• This parameter does not affect the languages visible in the
Drive composer PC tool. (Those are specified under View
– Settings – Drive default language.)
Not selected
None.
0
English
English.
1033
Deutsch
German.
1031
Italiano
Italian.
1040
Español
Spanish.
3082
Portugues
Portuguese.
2070
Nederlands
Dutch.
1043
96.02
-
Français
French.
1036
Dansk
Danish.
1030
Suomi
Finnish.
1035
Svenska
Swedish.
1053
Russki
Russian.
1049
Polski
Polish.
1045
Türkçe
Turkish.
1055
Chinese (Simplified, Simplified Chinese.
PRC)
2052
Pass code
Pass codes can be entered into this parameter to activate
further access levels, for example additional parameters,
parameter lock, etc. See parameter 96.03 Access level
status.
Entering “358” toggles the parameter lock, which prevents the
changing of all other parameters.
0
0…99999999
Pass code.
-
308 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
96.03
Access level status
Shows which access levels have been activated by pass
codes entered into parameter 96.02 Pass code.
0001b
Bit
0
1
2
3…10
11
12
13
14
15
96.04
96.05
Name
End user
Service
Advanced programmer
Reserved
OEM access level 1
OEM access level 2
OEM access level 3
Parameter lock
Reserved
0000b…0111b
Active access levels.
-
Macro select
Selects the control macro. See chapter Control macros (page
59) for more information.
After a selection is made, the parameter reverts automatically
to Done.
Done
Done
Macro selection complete; normal operation.
0
ABB standard
Factory macro (see page 60). For scalar motor control.
1
Hand/Auto
Hand/Auto macro (see page 70).
2
Hand/PID
Hand/PID macro (see page 72).
3
3-wire
3-wire macro see page 60).
11
Alternate
Alternate macro see page 66).
12
Motor
potentiometer
Motor potentiometer macro (see page 68).
13
PID
PID macro (see page 74).
14
Panel PID
Panel PID macro (see page 76).
15
PFC
PFC macro (see page 78).
16
ABB standard
(vector)
ABB standard (vector) macro (see page 62). For vector motor
control.
17
Macro active
Shows which control macro is currently selected. See chapter
Control macros (page 59) for more information.
To change the macro, use parameter 96.04 Macro select.
ABB
standard
1
ABB standard
Factory macro (see page 60). For scalar motor control.
Hand/Auto
Hand/Auto macro (see page 70).
2
Hand/PID
Hand/PID macro (see page 72).
3
3-wire
3-wire macro see page 60).
11
Alternate
Alternate macro see page 66).
12
Motor
potentiometer
Motor potentiometer macro (see page 68).
13
PID
PID macro (see page 74).
14
Panel PID
Panel PID macro (see page 76).
15
PFC
PFC macro (see page 78).
16
Parameters 309
No.
96.06
96.07
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
ABB standard
(vector)
ABB standard (vector) macro (see page 62). For vector motor
control.
17
Parameter restore
Restores the original settings of the control program, ie.
parameter default values.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Done
Done
Restoring is completed.
0
Restore defaults
Restores all editable parameter values to default values,
except
• motor data and ID run results
• I/O extension module settings
• end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults,
and the drive name
• control panel/PC communication settings
• fieldbus adapter settings
• control macro selection and the parameter defaults
implemented by it
• parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the differentiated
defaults implemented by it.
8
Clear all
Restores all editable parameter values to default values,
except
• end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults,
and the drive name
• control macro selection and the parameter defaults
implemented by it
• parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the differentiated
defaults implemented by it.
62
Reset all fieldbus
settings
Restores all fieldbus and communication related settings to
default values.
Note: Fieldbus, control panel and PC tool communication are
interrupted during the restore.
32
Reset home view
Restores the home view layout back to show the values of the
default parameters defined by the control macro in use
512
Reset end user
texts
Restores all end user texts to default values, including the
drive name, contact info, customized fault and warning texts,
PID unit and currency unit.
1024
Reset motor data
Restores all motor nominal values and motor ID run results to
default values.
2
All to factory
defaults
Restores all drive parameters and settings back to initial
factory values, except
• parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the differentiated
defaults implemented by it.
34560
Parameter save
manually
Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory
on the drive control unit to ensure that operation can continue
after cycling the power. Save the parameters with this
parameter
• to store values sent from the fieldbus
• when using external +24 V DC power supply to the control
unit: to save parameter changes before you power down
the control unit. The supply has a very short hold-up time
when powered off.
Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when
changed from the PC tool or control panel but not when
altered through a fieldbus adapter connection.
Done
Done
Save completed.
0
310 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Save
Save in progress.
1
96.08
Control board boot
Changing the value of this parameter to 1 reboots the control
unit (without requiring a power off/on cycle of the complete
drive module).
The value reverts to 0 automatically.
0
0…1
1 = Reboot the control unit.
1=1
96.10
User set status
Shows the status of the user parameter sets.
This parameter is read-only.
See also section User parameter sets (page 133).
-
n/a
No user parameter sets have been saved.
0
Loading
A user set is being loaded.
1
96.11
Def/FbEq16
Saving
A user set is being saved.
2
Faulted
Invalid or empty parameter set.
3
User1 IO active
User set 1 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set
I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
4
User2 IO active
User set 2 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set
I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
5
User3 IO active
User set 3 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set
I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
6
User4 IO active
User set 4 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set
I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
7
User1 backup
User set 1 has been saved or loaded.
20
User2 backup
User set 2 has been saved or loaded.
21
User3 backup
User set 3 has been saved or loaded.
22
User4 backup
User set 4 has been saved or loaded.
23
User set save/load
Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of
parameter settings.
The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in
use after the next power-up.
Notes:
• Some hardware configuration settings, such as I/O
extension module, fieldbus and encoder configuration
parameters (groups 14…16, 47, 50…58 and 92…93) are
not included in user parameter sets.
• Parameter changes made after loading a set are not
automatically stored – they must be saved using this
parameter.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running
No action
No action
Load or save operation complete; normal operation.
0
User set I/O mode
Load user parameter set using parameters 96.12 User set I/O
mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
1
Load set 1
Load user parameter set 1.
2
Load set 2
Load user parameter set 2.
3
Load set 3
Load user parameter set 3.
4
Load set 4
Load user parameter set 4.
5
Save to set 1
Save user parameter set 1.
18
Save to set 2
Save user parameter set 2.
19
Parameters 311
No.
96.12
96.13
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Save to set 3
Save user parameter set 3.
20
Save to set 4
Save user parameter set 4.
21
User set I/O mode
in1
When parameter 96.11 User set save/load is set to User set
I/O mode, selects the user parameter set together with
parameter 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 as follows:
Not selected
Status of source
defined by par.
96.12
Status of source
defined by par.
96.13
User parameter
set selected
0
0
Set 1
1
0
Set 2
0
1
Set 3
1
1
Set 4
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1
Bit 0 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
18
Timed function 2
Bit 1 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
19
Timed function 3
Bit 2 of 34.01 Combined timer status (see page 240).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
24
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
25
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 234).
26
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 136). -
User set I/O mode
in2
See parameter 96.12 User set I/O mode in1.
Not selected
312 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
96.16
Unit selection
Selects the unit of parameters indicating power, temperature
and torque.
0000b
96.51
Bit
0
Name
Power unit
1
2
Reserved
Temperature
unit
3
4
Reserved
Torque unit
5…15
Reserved
97.03
0 = Nm (N·m)
1 = lbft (lb·ft)
0000h…FFFFh
Unit selection word.
1=1
Clears all events from the drive’s fault and event logs.
0
0…1
0 = No effect; 1 = Clears the logger.
1=1
97 Motor control
97.02
0 = °C
1 = °F
Clear fault and
event logger
97
97.01
Information
0 = kW
1 = hp
Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking;
anti-cogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
Switching
Defines the switching frequency of the drive that is used as
frequency reference long as the drive does not heat too much. See section
Switching frequency on page 108.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise.
In multimotor systems, do not change the switching frequency
from the default value.
4 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz.
4
8 kHz
8 kHz.
8
12 kHz
12 kHz.
12
Minimum switching
frequency
Lowest switching frequency that is allowed. Depends on the
frame size.
2 kHz
1.5 kHz
1.5 kHz.
1.5
2 kHz
2 kHz.
2
4 kHz
4 kHz.
4
8 kHz
8 kHz.
8
12 kHz
12 kHz.
12
Slip gain
Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated
motor slip. 100% means full slip gain; 0% means no slip gain.
The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a
static speed error is detected despite having the setting at full
slip gain.
Example (with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm): A
1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive.
Despite having full slip gain (= 100%), a manual tachometer
measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998
rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To
compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased to
105% (2 rpm / 40 rpm = 5%).
100%
0…200%
Slip gain.
1 = 1%
Parameters 313
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
97.04
Voltage reserve
Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the
voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive
enters the field weakening area.
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the
voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum output
voltage in steady-state operation is
0.95 × 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 V
The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field
weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage
reserve value, but the drive enters the field weakening area
earlier.
-2%
-4…50%
Voltage reserve.
1 = 1%
97.05
Flux braking
Defines the level of flux braking power. (Other stopping and
braking modes can be configured in parameter group 21
Start/stop mode).
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
Disabled
Disabled
Flux braking is disabled.
0
Moderate
Flux level is limited during the braking. Deceleration time is
longer compared to full braking.
1
Full
Maximum braking power. Almost all available current is used
to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal energy
in the motor.
WARNING! Using full flux braking heats up the motor
especially in cyclic operation. Make sure that the
motor can withstand this if you have a cyclic
application.
2
Signal injection
Enables the anti-cogging function: a high-frequency
alternating signal is injected to the motor in the low speed
region to improve the stability of torque control. This removes
the “cogging” that can sometimes be seen as the rotor passes
the motor magnetic poles. Anti-cogging can be enabled with
different amplitude levels.
Notes:
• This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
• Use as low a level as possible that gives satisfactory
performance.
• Signal injection cannot be applied to asynchronous
motors.
Disabled
Disabled
Anti-cogging disabled.
0
Enabled (5%)
Anti-cogging enabled with amplitude level of 5%.
1
Enabled (10%)
Anti-cogging enabled with amplitude level of 10%.
2
97.10
Enabled (15%)
Anti-cogging enabled with amplitude level of 15%.
3
Enabled (20%)
Anti-cogging enabled with amplitude level of 20%.
4
314 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
97.11
TR tuning
Rotor time constant tuning.
This parameter can be used to improve torque accuracy in
closed-loop control of an induction motor. Normally, the motor
identification run provides sufficient torque accuracy, but
manual fine-tuning can be applied in exceptionally
demanding applications to achieve optimal performance.
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
100%
25…400%
Rotor time constant tuning.
1 = 1%
97.13
IR compensation
Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR
compensation). The function is useful in applications with a
high break-away torque where vector control cannot be
applied.
3.50%
U / UN
(%)
Relative output voltage. IR
compensation set to 15%.
100%
Relative output voltage. No
IR compensation.
15%
Field weakening point
f (Hz)
50% of nominal
frequency
See also section IR compensation for scalar motor control on
page 103.
0.00…50.00%
Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor
voltage.
1 = 1%
Motor model
temperature
adaptation
Enables the motor model temperature adaptation. Estimated
motor temperature can be used to adapt temperature
dependent parameters (e.g. resistances) of motor model.
Disabled
Disabled
Temperature adaptation disabled.
0
Estimated
temperature
Temperature adaptation with motor temperature estimate
(parameter 35.01 Motor estimated temperature).
1
97.16
Stator temperature
factor
Tunes the motor temperature dependence of stator
parameters (stator resistance).
50%
0…200%
Tuning factor.
1 = 1%
97.17
Rotor temperature
factor
Tunes the motor temperature dependence of rotor
parameters (eg. rotor resistance).
100%
97.15
97.20
0…200%
Tuning factor.
1 = 1%
U/F ratio
Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio below
field weakening point. For scalar control only.
Squared
Linear
Linear ratio for constant torque applications.
0
Parameters 315
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Squared
Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications.
With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most
operating frequencies. Not recommended for permanent
magnet motors.
1
98
98 User motor
parameters
Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor
model.
These parameters are useful for non-standard motors, or to
just get more accurate motor control of the motor on site. A
better motor model always improves the shaft performance.
98.01
User motor model
mode
Activates the motor model parameters 98.02…98.12 and
98.14.
Notes:
• Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is
selected by parameter 99.13 ID run requested. The values
of parameters 98.02…98.12 are then updated according to
the motor characteristics identified during the ID run.
• Measurements made directly from the motor terminals
during the ID run are likely to produce slightly different
values than those on a data sheet from a motor
manufacturer.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
98.02
98.03
98.04
Not selected
Parameters 98.02…98.12 inactive.
0
Motor parameters
The values of parameters 98.02… 98.12 are used as the
motor model.
1
Rs user
Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model.
With a star-connected motor, RS is the resistance of one
winding. With a delta-connected motor, RS is one-third of the
resistance of one winding.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000…0.50000
p.u.
Stator resistance in per unit.
-
Rr user
Defines the rotor resistance R R of the motor model.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000…0.50000
p.u.
Rotor resistance in per unit.
-
Lm user
Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000…10.00000 Main inductance in per unit.
p.u.
98.05
98.06
98.07
Not selected
-
Defines the leakage inductance σL S.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000…1.00000
p.u.
Leakage inductance in per unit.
-
Ld user
Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00000 p.u.
SigmaL user
0.00000…10.00000 Direct axis inductance in per unit.
p.u
-
Lq user
0.00000 p.u.
Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
316 Parameters
No.
98.08
98.09
98.10
Name/Value
Description
-
PM flux user
Defines the permanent magnet flux.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000… 2.00000
p.u
Permanent magnet flux in per unit.
-
Rs user SI
Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model.
98.12
98.13
98.14
0.00000 ohm
0.00000…100.0000 Stator resistance.
0 ohm
-
Rr user SI
0.00000 ohm
Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000…100.0000 Rotor resistance.
0 ohm
98.11
Def/FbEq16
0.00000…10.00000 Quadrature axis inductance in per unit.
p.u
-
Lm user SI
Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00 mH
0.00…100000.00
mH
Main inductance.
1 = 10000
mH
SigmaL user SI
Defines the leakage inductance σLS.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00 mH
0.00…100000.00
mH
Leakage inductance.
1 = 10000
mH
Ld user SI
Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 mH
0.00…100000.00
mH
Direct axis inductance.
1 = 10000
mH
Lq user SI
Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 mH
0.00…100000.00
mH
Quadrature axis inductance.
1 = 10000
mH
99
99 Motor data
Motor configuration settings.
99.03
Motor type
Selects the motor type.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Asynchronous motor
Asynchronous
motor
Standard squirrel cage AC induction motor (asynchronous
induction motor).
0
Permanent magnet
motor
Permanent magnet motor. Three-phase AC synchronous
motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal BackEMF
voltage.
Note: With permanent magnet motors special attention must
be paid on setting the motor nominal values correctly in
parameter group 99 Motor data. You must use vector control.
If the nominal BackEMF voltage of the motor is not available,
a full ID run should be performed for improving performance.
1
Parameters 317
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
99.04
Motor control mode
Selects the motor control mode.
Scalar
Vector
Vector control. Vector control has better accuracy than scalar
control but cannot be used in all situations (see selection
Scalar below).
Requires motor identification run (ID run). See parameter
99.13 ID run requested.
Note: In vector control the drive performs a standstill ID run at
the first start if ID run has not been previously performed. A
new start command is required after standstill ID run.
Note: To achieve a better motor control performance, you can
perform a normal ID run without load.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 89).
0
Scalar
Scalar control. Suitable for most applications, if top
performance is not required.
Motor identification run is not required.
Note: Scalar control must be used in the following situations:
• with multimotor applications 1) if the load is not equally
shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different
sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the
motor identification (ID run)
• if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the
nominal output current of the drive
• if the drive is used with no motor connected (for example,
for test purposes).
Note: Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing
current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal
current of the inverter.
See also section Speed control performance figures (page
102), and section Operating modes of the drive (page 89).
1
Motor nominal
current
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value
on the motor rating plate. If multiple motors are connected to
the drive, enter the total current of the motors.
Notes:
• Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing
current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal
current of the drive.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.0 A
0.0…6400.0 A
Nominal current of the motor. The allowable range is 1/6…2 ×
IN of the drive (0…2 × IN with scalar control mode).
1=1A
99.06
318 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
99.07
Motor nominal
voltage
Defines the nominal motor voltage supplied to the motor. This
setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor.
Notes:
• With permanent magnet motors, the nominal voltage is the
BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor. If the
voltage is given as voltage per rpm, e.g. 60 V per
1000 rpm, the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm is
3 × 60 V = 180 V. Note that the nominal voltage is not
equal to the equivalent DC motor voltage (EDCM)
specified by some motor manufacturers. The nominal
voltage can be calculated by dividing the EDCM voltage by
1.7 (or square root of 3).
• The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on
the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case
where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the
drive and the supply.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.0 V
0.0…800.0
Nominal voltage of the motor.
10 = 1 V
99.08
Motor nominal
frequency
Defines the nominal motor frequency. This setting must
match the value on the rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
50.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz
Nominal frequency of the motor.
10 = 1 Hz
99.09
Motor nominal
speed
Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must match the
value on the rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0 rpm
0…30000 rpm
Nominal speed of the motor.
1 = 1 rpm
99.10
Motor nominal
power
Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must match the
value on the rating plate of the motor. If multiple motors are
connected to the drive, enter the total power of the motors.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.00 kW or
hp
-10000.00…
10000.00 kW or
-13404.83…
13404.83 hp
Nominal power of the motor.
1 = 1 unit
Motor nominal cos
Φ
Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor
model. (Not applicable to permanent magnet motors.) Not
obligatory; if set, should match the value on the rating plate of
the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.00
0.00…1.00
Cosphi of the motor.
100 = 1
99.11
Parameters 319
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
99.12
Motor nominal
torque
Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate
motor model. Not obligatory. The unit is selected by
parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.000
N·m or lb·ft
99.13
0.000…4000000.000 Nominal motor torque.
N·m or
0.000…2950248.597
lb·ft
1 = 100 unit
ID run requested
Selects the type of the motor identification routine (ID run)
performed at the next start of the drive. During the ID run, the
drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum
motor control.
If no ID run has been performed yet (or if default parameter
values have been restored using parameter 96.06 Parameter
restore), this parameter is automatically set to Standstill,
signifying that an ID run must be performed.
After the ID run, the drive stops and this parameter is
automatically set to None.
Notes:
• To ensure that the ID run can work properly, the drive limits
in group 30 (maximum speed and minimum speed, and
maximum torque and minimum torque) must to be large
enough (the range specified by the limits must be wide
enough. If eg. speed limits are less than the motor nominal
speed, the ID run cannot be completed.
• For the Advanced ID run, the machinery must always be
de-coupled from the motor.
• With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance
motor, a Normal, Reduced or Standstill ID run requires that
the motor shaft is NOT locked and the load torque is less
than 10%.
• With scalar control mode (99.04 Motor control mode =
Scalar), only the Current measurement calibration ID run
mode is possible.
• Once the ID run is activated, it can be canceled by
stopping the drive.
• The ID run must be performed every time any of the motor
parameters (99.04, 99.06…99.12) have been changed.
• Ensure that the Safe Torque Off and emergency stop
circuits (if any) are closed during the ID run.
• Mechanical brake (if present) is not opened by the logic for
the ID run.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
None
None
No motor ID run is requested. This mode can be selected
only if the ID run
(Normal/Reduced/Standstill/Advanced/Advanced standstill)
has already been performed once.
0
320 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Normal
Normal ID run. Guarantees good control accuracy for all
cases. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode should
be selected whenever it is possible.
Notes:
• If the load torque will be higher than 20% of motor nominal
torque, or if the machinery is not able to withstand the
nominal torque transient during the ID run, then the driven
machinery must be de-coupled from the motor during a
Normal ID run.
• Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting
the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the
forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately
50…100% of the nominal speed during the ID run.
ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR
BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
1
Reduced
Reduced ID run. This mode should be selected instead of the
Normal or Advanced ID Run if
• mechanical losses are higher than 20% (ie. the motor
cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment), or if
• flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (ie.
in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from
the motor terminals).
With this ID run mode, the resultant motor control in the field
weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as
accurate as motor control following a Normal ID run. Reduced
ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run (< 90
seconds).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before
starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the
forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately
50…100% of the nominal speed during the ID run.
ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR
BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
2
Standstill
Standstill ID run. The motor is injected with DC current. With
an AC induction (asynchronous) motor, the motor shaft is not
rotated. With a permanent magnet motor, the shaft can rotate
up to half a revolution.
Note: This mode should be selected only if the Normal,
Reduced or Advanced ID run is not possible due to the
restrictions caused by the connected mechanics (e.g. with lift
or crane applications).
3
Current
measurement
calibration
Current offset and gain measurement calibration is set to
calibrate the control loops. The calibration will be performed
at next start. Only for frames R5…R9.
5
Parameters 321
No.
99.14
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Advanced
Advanced ID run. Only for frames R5…R9.
Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID run
takes a very long time to complete. This mode should be
selected when top performance is needed across the whole
operating area.
Note: The driven machinery must be de-coupled from the
motor because of high torque and speed transients that are
applied.
WARNING! The motor may run at up to the maximum
(positive) and minimum (negative) allowed speed
during the ID run. Several accelerations and
decelerations are done. The maximum torque, current and
speed allowed by the limit parameters may be utilized.
ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE
PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
6
Advanced standstill
Advanced standstill ID run.
Recommended for AC induction motors larger than 30 kW
instead of the Standstill ID run if
• the exact nominal ratings of the motor are not known, or
• the control performance of the motor is not satisfactory
after a Standstill ID run.
Note: The time it takes for the Advanced standstill ID run to
complete varies according to motor size. With a small motor,
it typically completes within 5 minutes; with a large
motor, it may take up to an hour.
7
Last ID run
performed
Shows the type of ID run that was performed last. For more
information about the different modes, see the selections of
parameter 99.13 ID run requested.
None
None
No ID run has been performed.
0
Normal
Normal ID run.
1
Reduced
Reduced ID run.
2
Standstill
Standstill ID run.
3
Current
measurement
calibration
Current measurement calibration.
5
Advanced
Advanced ID run.
6
Advanced standstill
Advanced standstill ID run
7
99.15
Motor polepairs
calculated
Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor.
0
0…1000
Number of pole pairs.
1=1
99.16
Motor phase order
Switches the rotation direction of motor. This parameter can
be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction (for example,
because of the wrong phase order in the motor cable), and
correcting the cabling is considered impractical.
Notes:
• Changing this parameter does not affect speed reference
polarities, so positive speed reference will rotate the motor
forward. The phase order selection just ensures that
“forward” is in fact the correct direction.
UVW
UVW
Normal.
0
UWV
Reversed rotation direction.
1
322 Parameters
Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz
supply frequency settings
Parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz changes the drive
parameter default values according to the supply frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The bit
is set according to the market before the drive is delivered.
If you need to change from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or vice versa, change the value of the bit
and then do a complete reset to the drive. After that you have to reselect the macro to
be used.
The table below shows the parameters whose default values depend on the supply
frequency setting. The supply frequency setting, with the type designation of the
drive, also affects Group 99 Motor data parameter values though these parameters
are not listed in the table.
No
Name
95.20 HW options word 1 bit
Supply frequency 60 Hz =
50 Hz
95.20 HW options word 1
bit Supply frequency 60 Hz =
60 Hz
11.45
Freq in 1 at scaled max
1500.000
1800.000
15.35
Freq out 1 src max
1500.000
1800.000
12.20
AI1 scaled at AI1 max
1500.000
1800.000
13.18
AO1 source max
1500.0
1800.0
22.26
Constant speed 1
300.00 rpm
360.00 rpm
22.27
Constant speed 2
600.00 rpm
720.00 rpm
22.28
Constant speed 3
900 .00 rpm
1080.00 rpm
22.29
Constant speed 4
1200.00 rpm
1440.00 rpm
22.30
Constant speed 5
1500.00 rpm
1800.00 rpm
22.30
Constant speed 6
2400.00 rpm
2880.00 rpm
22.31
Constant speed 7
3000.00 rpm
3600.00 rpm
28.26
Constant frequency 1
5.00 Hz
6.00 Hz
28.27
Constant frequency 2
10.00 Hz
12.00 Hz
28.28
Constant frequency 3
15.00 Hz
18.00 Hz
28.29
Constant frequency 4
20.00 Hz
24.00 Hz
28.30
Constant frequency 5
25.00 Hz
30.00 Hz
28.31
Constant frequency 6
40.00 Hz
48.00 Hz
28.32
Constant frequency 7
50.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
Parameters 323
No
Name
95.20 HW options word 1 bit
Supply frequency 60 Hz =
50 Hz
95.20 HW options word 1
bit Supply frequency 60 Hz =
60 Hz
30.11
Minimum speed
-1500.00 rpm
-1800.00 rpm
30.12
Maximum speed
1500.00 rpm
1800.00 rpm
30.13
Minimum frequency
-50.00 Hz
-60.00 Hz
30.14
Maximum frequency
50.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
31.26
Stall speed limit
150.00 rpm
180.00 rpm
31.27
Stall frequency limit
31.30
Overspeed trip margin
46.01
Speed scaling
46.02
Frequency scaling
15.00 Hz
18.00 Hz
500.00 rpm
500.00 rpm
1500.00 rpm
1800.00 rpm
50.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
324 Parameters
Additional parameter data 325
8
Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains
This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data such as their ranges and
32-bit fieldbus scaling. For parameter descriptions, see chapter Parameters (page
135).
Terms and abbreviations
Term
Definition
Actual signal
Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored
but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.
Analog src
Analog source: the parameter can be set to the value of another parameter
by choosing “Other”, and selecting the source parameter from a list.
In addition to the “Other” selection, the parameter may offer other preselected settings.
Binary src
Binary source: the value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit
in another parameter value (“Other”). Sometimes the value can be fixed to
0 (false) or 1 (true). In addition, the parameter may offer other pre-selected
settings.
Data
Data parameter
FbEq32
32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the
panel and the integer used in communication when a 32-bit value is
selected for transmission to an external system.
The corresponding 16-bit scalings are listed in chapter Parameters (page
135).
List
Selection list.
326 Additional parameter data
Term
Definition
No.
Parameter number.
PB
Packed Boolean (bit list).
Real
Real number.
Type
Parameter type. See Analog src, Binary src, List, PB, Real.
Fieldbus addresses
Refer to the User’s manual of the fieldbus adapter.
Additional parameter data 327
Parameter groups 1…9
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
01 Actual values
01.01
Motor speed used
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
01.02
Motor speed estimated
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
01.03
Motor speed %
Real
-1000.00…1000.00
%
100 = 1%
01.06
Output frequency
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
100 = 1 A
01.07
Motor current
Real
0.00…30000.00
A
01.08
Motor current % of motor nom
Real
0.0…1000.0
%
10 = 1%
01.09
Motor current % of drive nom
Real
0.0…1000.0
%
10 = 1%
01.10
Motor torque
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
01.11
DC voltage
Real
0.00…2000.00
V
100 = 1 V
01.13
Output voltage
Real
0…2000
V
1=1V
01.14
Output power
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
kW or hp
100 = 1 unit
01.15
Output power % of motor nom
Real
-300.00…300.00
%
100 = 1%
01.16
Output power % of drive nom
Real
-300.00…300.00
%
100 = 1%
100 = 1 unit
01.17
Motor shaft power
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
kW or hp
01.18
Inverter GWh counter
Real
0…65535
GWh
1 = 1 GWh
01.19
Inverter MWh counter
Real
0…1000
MWh
1 = 1 MWh
1 = 1 kWh
01.20
Inverter kWh counter
Real
0…1000
kWh
01.24
Flux actual %
Real
0…200
%
1 = 1%
01.30
Nominal torque scale
Real
0.000…4000000
N·m or
lb·ft
1000 = 1 unit
100 = 1 kWh
01.50
Current hour kWh
Real
0.00…1000000.00
kWh
01.51
Previous hour kWh
Real
0.00…1000000.00
kWh
100 = 1 kWh
01.52
Current day kWh
Real
0.00…1000000.00
kWh
100 = 1 kWh
Real
01.53
Previous day kWh
0.00…1000000.00
kWh
100 = 1 kWh
01.61
Abs motor speed used
0.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
01.62
Abs motor speed %
0.00…1000.00%
%
100 = 1%
01.63
Abs output frequency
0.00…500.00 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
01.64
Abs motor torque
0.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
01.65
Abs output power
0.00…32767.00
kW
100 = 1 kW
01.66
Abs output power % mot nom
0.00…300.00
%
100 = 1%
01.67
Abs output power % drive nom
0.00…300.00
%
100 = 1%
01.68
Abs motor shaft power
0.00…30000.00
kW
100 = 1 kW
03 Input references
03.01
Panel reference
Real
-100000.00…100000.00
rpm, Hz
or %
100 = 1 unit
03.02
Panel reference remote
Real
-100000.00…100000.00
rpm, Hz
or %
100 = 1 unit
100 = 1
03.05
FB A reference 1
Real
-100000.00…100000.00
-
03.06
FB A reference 2
Real
-100000.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
03.09
EFB reference 1
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
-
100 = 1
328 Additional parameter data
No.
03.10
Name
EFB reference 2
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
-
100 = 1
04 Warnings and faults
04.01
Tripping fault
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.02
Active fault 2
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.03
Active fault 3
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.06
Active warning 1
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.07
Active warning 2
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.08
Active warning 3
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.11
Latest fault
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.12
2nd latest fault
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.13
3rd latest fault
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.16
Latest warning
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.17
2nd latest warning
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
04.18
3rd latest warning
Data
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
05 Diagnostics
05.01
On-time counter
Real
0…65535
d
1=1d
05.02
Run-time counter
Real
0…65535
d
1=1d
05.04
Fan on-time counter
Real
0…65535
d
1=1d
05.10
Control board temperature
Real
-100…300
°C or °F
10 = 1 °
05.11
Inverter temperature
Real
-40.0…160.0
%
10 = 1%
05.22
Diagnostic word 3
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
06 Control and status words
06.01
Main control word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.11
Main status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.16
Drive status word 1
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.17
Drive status word 2
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.18
Start inhibit status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.19
Speed control status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.20
Constant speed status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.21
Drive status word 3
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
06.30
MSW bit 11 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
06.31
MSW bit 12 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
06.32
MSW bit 13 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
06.33
MSW bit 14 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
07 System info
07.03
Drive rating id
List
0…999
-
1=1
07.04
Firmware name
List
-
-
1=1
07.05
Firmware version
Data
-
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 329
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
07.06
No.
Loading package name
Name
List
-
-
1=1
07.07
Loading package version
Data
-
-
1=1
07.11
Cpu usage
Real
0…100
%
1 = 1%
330 Additional parameter data
Parameter groups 10…99
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
10 Standard DI, RO
10.02
DI delayed status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.03
DI force selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.04
DI forced data
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.21
RO status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.22
RO force selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.23
RO forced data
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.24
RO1 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
10.25
RO1 ON delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
10.26
RO1 OFF delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
10.27
RO2 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
10.28
RO2 ON delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
10.29
RO2 OFF delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
10.30
RO3 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
10.31
RO3 ON delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
10.32
RO3 OFF delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
10.99
RO/DIO control word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
10.101 RO1 toggle counter
Real
0…4294967000
-
1=1
10.102 RO2 toggle counter
Real
0…4294967000
-
1=1
10.103 RO3 toggle counter
Real
0…4294967000
-
1=1
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
11.25
DI6 configuration
List
0…1
-
1=1
11.38
Freq in 1 actual value
Real
0…16000
Hz
1 = 1 Hz
11.39
Freq in 1 scaled value
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
11.42
Freq in 1 min
Real
0…16000
Hz
1 = 1 Hz
11.43
Freq in 1 max
Real
0…16000
Hz
1 = 1 Hz
11.44
Freq in 1 at scaled min
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
11.45
Freq in 1 at scaled max
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
12 Standard AI
12.02
AI force selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
12.03
AI supervision function
List
0…4
-
1=1
12.04
AI supervision selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
12.11
AI1 actual value
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.12
AI1 scaled value
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
12.13
AI1 forced value
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.15
AI1 unit selection
List
2, 10
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 331
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
12.16
No.
AI1 filter time
Name
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
12.17
AI1 min
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.18
AI1 max
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1
12.19
AI1 scaled at AI1 min
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
12.20
AI1 scaled at AI1 max
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
12.21
AI2 actual value
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.22
AI2 scaled value
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
12.23
AI2 forced value
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.25
AI2 unit selection
List
2, 10
-
1=1
12.26
AI2 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
12.27
AI2 min
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.28
AI2 max
Real
0.000…20.000 mA or
0.000…10.000 V
mA or V
1000 = 1 unit
12.29
AI2 scaled at AI2 min
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
12.30
AI2 scaled at AI2 max
Real
-32768.000…32767.000
-
1000 = 1
12.101 AI1 percent value
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
12.102 AI2 percent value
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
13 Standard AO
13.02
AO force selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
13.11
AO1 actual value
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
1000 = 1 mA
13.12
AO1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
1000 = 1 mA
13.13
AO1 forced value
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
13.15
AO1 unit selection
List
2, 10
-
1=1
13.16
AO1 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
13.17
AO1 source min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
13.18
AO1 source max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
1000 = 1 mA
13.19
AO1 out at AO1 src min
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
13.20
AO1 out at AO1 src max
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
1000 = 1 mA
13.21
AO2 actual value
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
1000 = 1 mA
13.22
AO2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
13.23
AO2 forced value
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
1000 = 1 mA
13.26
AO2 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
13.27
AO2 source min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
13.28
AO2 source max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
13.29
AO2 out at AO2 src min
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
1000 = 1 mA
13.30
AO2 out at AO2 src max
Real
0.000…22.000
mA
1000 = 1 mA
13.91
AO1 data storage
Real
-327.68…327.67
-
100 = 1
332 Additional parameter data
No.
13.92
Name
AO2 data storage
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Real
-327.68…327.67
-
100 = 1
15 I/O extension module
15.01
Extension module type
List
0…3
-
1=1
15.02
Detected extension module
List
0…3
-
1=1
15.03
DI status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
15.04
RO/DO status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
15.05
RO/DO force selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
15.06
RO/DO forced data
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
15.07
RO4 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
15.08
RO4 ON delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
15.09
RO4 OFF delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
15.10
RO5 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
15.11
RO5 ON delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
15.12
RO5 OFF delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
15.22
DO1 configuration
List
0…1
-
1=1
15.23
DO1 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
15.24
DO1 ON delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
15.25
DO1 OFF delay
Real
0.0…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
15.32
Freq out 1 actual value
Real
0…16000
Hz
1 = 1 Hz
15.33
Freq out 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
15.34
Freq out 1 src min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
1000 = 1
15.35
Freq out 1 src max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
1000 = 1
15.36
Freq out 1 at src min
Real
0…16000
Hz
1 = 1 Hz
15.37
Freq out 1 at src max
Real
0…16000
Hz
1 = 1 Hz
19 Operation mode
19.01
Actual operation mode
List
1…6, 10…20
-
1=1
19.11
Ext1/Ext2 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
19.12
Ext1 control mode
List
1…5
-
1=1
19.14
Ext2 control mode
List
1…5
-
1=1
19.16
Local control mode
List
0…1
-
1=1
19.17
Local control disable
List
0…1
-
1=1
20 Start/stop/direction
20.01
Ext1 commands
List
0…6, 11…12, 14
-
1=1
20.02
Ext1 start trigger type
List
0…1
-
1=1
20.03
Ext1 in1 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.04
Ext1 in2 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 333
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
20.05
No.
Ext1 in3 source
Name
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.06
Ext2 commands
List
0…6, 11…12, 14
-
1=1
20.07
Ext2 start trigger type
List
0…1
-
1=1
20.08
Ext2 in1 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.09
Ext2 in2 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.10
Ext2 in3 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.11
Run enable stop mode
List
0…2
-
1=1
20.12
Run enable 1 source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.19
Enable start command
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.21
Direction
List
0…2
-
1=1
20.22
Enable to rotate
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.25
Jogging enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.26
Jogging 1 start source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
20.27
Jogging 2 start source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
21 Start/stop mode
21.01
Vector start mode
List
0…2
-
1=1
21.02
Magnetization time
Real
0…10000
ms
1 = 1 ms
21.03
Stop mode
List
0…2
-
1=1
21.04
Emergency stop mode
List
0…3
-
1=1
21.05
Emergency stop source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
21.06
Zero speed limit
Real
0.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
21.07
Zero speed delay
Real
0…30000
ms
1 = 1 ms
21.08
DC current control
PB
0000b…0011b
-
1=1
21.09
DC hold speed
Real
0.00…1000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
21.10
DC current reference
Real
0.0…100.0
%
10 = 1%
21.11
Post magnetization time
Real
0…3000
s
1=1s
21.14
Pre-heating input source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
21.16
Pre-heating current
Real
0.0…30.0
%
10 = 1%
21.18
Auto restart time
Real
0.0, 0.1…10.0
s
10 = 1 s
21.19
Scalar start mode
List
0…4
-
1=1
21.21
DC hold frequency
Real
0.00…1000.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
21.22
Start delay
Real
0.00…60.00
s
100 = 1 s
21.23
Smooth start
Real
0…2
-
1=1
334 Additional parameter data
No.
21.24
Name
Smooth start current
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Real
10.0…100.0
%
100 = 1%
21.25
Smooth start speed
Real
2.0…100.0
%
100 = 1%
21.26
Torque boost current
Real
15.0…300.0
%
100 = 1%
21.30
Speed compensated stop
mode
Real
0…3
-
1=1
21.31
Speed compensated stop
delay
Real
0.00…1000.00
s
100 = 1 s
21.32
Speed comp stop threshold
Real
0…100
%
1 = 1%
22 Speed reference selection
22.01
Speed ref unlimited
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.11
Ext1 speed ref1
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
22.12
Ext1 speed ref2
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
22.13
Ext1 speed function
List
0…5
-
1=1
22.18
Ext2 speed ref1
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
22.19
Ext2 speed ref2
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
22.20
Ext2 speed function
List
0…5
-
1=1
22.21
Constant speed function
PB
00b…11b
-
1=1
22.22
Constant speed sel1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
22.23
Constant speed sel2
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
22.24
Constant speed sel3
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
22.26
Constant speed 1
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.27
Constant speed 2
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.28
Constant speed 3
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.29
Constant speed 4
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.30
Constant speed 5
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.31
Constant speed 6
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.32
Constant speed 7
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.41
Speed ref safe
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.42
Jogging 1 ref
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.43
Jogging 2 ref
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.51
Critical speed function
22.52
Critical speed 1 low
PB
00b…11b
-
1=1
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.53
Critical speed 1 high
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.54
Critical speed 2 low
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.55
Critical speed 2 high
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.56
Critical speed 3 low
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.57
Critical speed 3 high
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
Additional parameter data 335
Type
Range
Unit
22.71
No.
Motor potentiometer function
Name
List
0…3
-
FbEq32
1=1
22.72
Motor potentiometer initial
value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
22.73
Motor potentiometer up source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
22.74
Motor potentiometer down
source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
22.75
Motor potentiometer ramp time
Real
0.0…3600.0
s
10 = 1 s
22.76
Motor potentiometer min value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
22.77
Motor potentiometer max
value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
22.80
Motor potentiometer ref act
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
22.86
Speed reference act 6
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
22.87
Speed reference act 7
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
23 Speed reference ramp
23.01
Speed ref ramp input
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
23.02
Speed ref ramp output
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
23.11
Ramp set selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
23.12
Acceleration time 1
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
23.13
Deceleration time 1
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
23.14
Acceleration time 2
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
23.15
Deceleration time 2
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
23.20
Acc time jogging
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
23.21
Dec time jogging
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
1000 = 1 s
23.23
Emergency stop time
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
23.28
Variable slope enable
List
0…1
-
1=1
23.29
Variable slope rate
Real
2…30000
ms
1 = 1 ms
23.32
Shape time 1
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
23.33
Shape time 2
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
24 Speed reference conditioning
24.01
Used speed reference
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
24.02
Used speed feedback
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
24.03
Speed error filtered
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
24.04
Speed error inverted
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
24.11
Speed correction
Real
-10000.00…10000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
24.12
Speed error filter time
Real
0…10000
ms
1 = 1 ms
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
25 Speed control
25.01
Torque reference speed
control
25.02
Speed proportional gain
Real
0.00…250.00
-
100 = 1
25.03
Speed integration time
Real
0.00…1000.00
s
100 = 1 s
25.04
Speed derivation time
Real
0.000…10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
336 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Real
0…10000
ms
1 = 1 ms
Acc comp derivation time
Real
0.00…1000.00
s
100 = 1 s
Acc comp filter time
Real
0.0…1000.0
ms
10 = 1 ms
25.15
Proportional gain em stop
Real
1.00…250.00
-
100 = 1
25.53
Torque prop reference
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
%
10 = 1%
25.54
Torque integral reference
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
%
10 = 1%
25.55
Torque deriv reference
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
%
10 = 1%
25.56
Torque acc compensation
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
%
10 = 1%
25.05
Derivation filter time
25.06
25.07
26 Torque reference chain
26.01
Torque reference to TC
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.02
Torque reference used
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.08
Minimum torque ref
Real
-1000.0…0.0
%
10 = 1%
26.09
Maximum torque ref
Real
0.0…1000.0
%
10 = 1%
26.11
Torque ref1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
26.12
Torque ref2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
26.13
Torque ref1 function
List
0…5
-
1=1
26.14
Torque ref1/2 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
26.17
Torque ref filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
26.18
Torque ramp up time
Real
0.000…60.000
s
1000 = 1 s
26.19
Torque ramp down time
Real
0.000…60.000
s
1000 = 1 s
26.21
Torque sel torque in
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
26.22
Torque sel speed in
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
26.70
Torque reference act 1
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.71
Torque reference act 2
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.72
Torque reference act 3
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.73
Torque reference act 4
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.74
Torque ref ramp out
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
26.75
Torque reference act 5
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
28 Frequency reference chain
28.01
Frequency ref ramp input
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.02
Frequency ref ramp output
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.11
Ext1 frequency ref1
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
28.12
Ext1 frequency ref2
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
28.13
Ext1 frequency function
List
0…5
-
1=1
28.15
Ext2 frequency ref1
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 337
No.
28.16
Name
Ext2 frequency ref2
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
1=1
28.17
Ext2 frequency function
List
0…5
-
28.21
Constant frequency function
PB
0000b…0001b
-
1=1
28.22
Constant frequency sel1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
28.23
Constant frequency sel2
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
28.24
Constant frequency sel3
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
28.26
Constant frequency 1
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.27
Constant frequency 2
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.28
Constant frequency 3
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.29
Constant frequency 4
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.30
Constant frequency 5
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.31
Constant frequency 6
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.32
Constant frequency 7
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.41
Frequency ref safe
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.51
Critical frequency function
PB
00b…11b
-
1=1
28.52
Critical frequency 1 low
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.53
Critical frequency 1 high
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.54
Critical frequency 2 low
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.55
Critical frequency 2 high
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.56
Critical frequency 3 low
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.57
Critical frequency 3 high
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.71
Freq ramp set selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
28.72
Freq acceleration time 1
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
28.73
Freq deceleration time 1
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
28.74
Freq acceleration time 2
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
28.75
Freq deceleration time 2
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
28.76
Freq ramp in zero source
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
28.82
Shape time 1
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
28.83
Shape time 2
Real
0.000…1800.000
s
1000 = 1 s
28.92
Frequency ref act 3
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.96
Frequency ref act 7
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
28.97
Frequency ref unlimited
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
1=1
30 Limits
30.01
Limit word 1
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
30.02
Torque limit status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
30.11
Minimum speed
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
30.12
Maximum speed
Real
-30000.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
338 Additional parameter data
No.
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Minimum frequency
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
30.14
Maximum frequency
Real
-500.00…500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
30.17
Maximum current
Real
0.00…30000.00
A
100 = 1 A
30.18
Torq lim sel
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
30.13
Name
30.19
Minimum torque 1
Real
-1600.0…0.0
%
10 = 1%
30.20
Maximum torque 1
Real
0.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
30.21
Min torque 2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
30.22
Max torque 2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
30.23
Minimum torque 2
Real
-1600.0…0.0
%
10 = 1%
30.24
Maximum torque 2
Real
0.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
30.26
Power motoring limit
Real
0.00…600.00
%
100 = 1%
30.27
Power generating limit
Real
-600.00…0.00
%
100 = 1%
30.30
Overvoltage control
List
0…1
-
1=1
30.31
Undervoltage control
List
0…1
-
1=1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
31 Fault functions
31.01
External event 1 source
31.02
External event 1 type
31.03
External event 2 source
31.04
External event 2 type
31.05
External event 3 source
31.06
External event 3 type
31.07
External event 4 source
31.08
External event 4 type
31.09
External event 5 source
List
0…1
-
1=1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
List
0…1
-
1=1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
List
0…1
-
1=1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
List
0…1
-
1=1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
31.10
External event 5 type
List
0…1
-
1=1
31.11
Fault reset selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
1=1
31.12
Autoreset selection
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
31.13
Selectable fault
Real
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
31.14
Number of trials
Real
0…5
-
1=1
31.15
Total trials time
Real
1.0…600.0
s
10 = 1 s
31.16
Delay time
Real
0.0…120.0
s
10 = 1 s
31.19
Motor phase loss
List
0…1
-
1=1
31.20
Earth fault
List
0…2
-
1=1
31.21
Supply phase loss
List
0…1
-
1=1
31.22
STO indication run/stop
List
0…3
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 339
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
31.23
No.
Wiring or earth fault
Name
List
0…1
-
1=1
31.24
Stall function
List
0…2
-
1=1
31.25
Stall current limit
Real
0.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
31.26
Stall speed limit
Real
0.00…10000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
31.27
Stall frequency limit
Real
0.00…1000.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
31.28
Stall time
Real
0…3600
s
1=1s
31.30
Overspeed trip margin
Real
0.00…10000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
31.32
Emergency ramp supervision
Real
0…300
%
1 = 1%
31.33
Emergency ramp supervision
delay
Real
0…100
s
1=1s
32 Supervision
32.01
Supervision status
PB
0000…0111b
-
1=1
32.05
Supervision 1 function
List
0…6
-
1=1
32.06
Supervision 1 action
List
0…2
-
1=1
32.07
Supervision 1 signal
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
32.08
Supervision 1 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
32.09
Supervision 1 low
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.10
Supervision 1 high
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.11
Supervision 1 hysteresis
Real
0.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
32.15
Supervision 2 function
List
0…6
-
1=1
32.16
Supervision 2 action
List
0…2
-
1=1
32.17
Supervision 2 signal
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
32.18
Supervision 2 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
32.19
Supervision 2 low
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.20
Supervision 2 high
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.21
Supervision 2 hysteresis
Real
0.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
32.25
Supervision 3 function
List
0…6
-
1=1
32.26
Supervision 3 action
List
0…2
-
1=1
32.27
Supervision 3 signal
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
32.28
Supervision 3 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
32.29
Supervision 3 low
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.30
Supervision 3 high
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.31
Supervision 3 hysteresis
Real
0.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
32.35
Supervision 4 function
List
0…6
-
1=1
32.36
Supervision 4 action
List
0…2
-
1=1
340 Additional parameter data
No.
32.37
Name
Supervision 4 signal
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
32.38
Supervision 4 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
32.39
Supervision 4 low
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.40
Supervision 4 high
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.41
Supervision 4 hysteresis
Real
0.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
32.45
Supervision 5 function
List
0…6
-
1=1
32.46
Supervision 5 action
List
0…2
-
1=1
32.47
Supervision 5 signal
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
32.48
Supervision 5 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
32.49
Supervision 5 low
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.50
Supervision 5 high
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.51
Supervision 5 hysteresis
Real
0.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
32.55
Supervision 6 function
List
0…6
-
1=1
32.56
Supervision 6 action
List
0…2
-
1=1
32.57
Supervision 6 signal
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
32.58
Supervision 6 filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
32.59
Supervision 6 low
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.60
Supervision 6 high
Real
-21474836.00…
21474836.00
-
100 = 1
32.61
Supervision 6 hysteresis
Real
0.00…100000.00
-
100 = 1
34 Timed functions
34.01
Combined timer status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.02
Timer status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.04
Season/exception day status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.10
Timed functions enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
34.11
Timer 1 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.12
Timer 1 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.13
Timer 1 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.14
Timer 2 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.15
Timer 2 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.16
Timer 2 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.17
Timer 3 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.18
Timer 3 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.19
Timer 3 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.20
Timer 4 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 341
Type
Range
Unit
34.21
No.
Timer 4 start time
Name
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
FbEq32
1=1s
34.22
Timer 4 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.23
Timer 5 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.24
Timer 5 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.25
Timer 5 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.26
Timer 6 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.27
Timer 6 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.28
Timer 6 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.29
Timer 7 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.30
Timer 7 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.31
Timer 7 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.32
Timer 8 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.33
Timer 8 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.34
Timer 8 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.35
Timer 9 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.36
Timer 9 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.37
Timer 9 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.38
Timer 10 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.39
Timer 10 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.40
Timer 10 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.41
Timer 11 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.42
Timer 11 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.43
Timer 11 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.44
Timer 12 configuration
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.45
Timer 12 start time
Time
00:00:00…23:59:59
s
1=1s
34.46
Timer 12 duration
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.60
Season 1 start date
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.61
Season 2 start date
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.62
Season 3 start date
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.63
Season 4 start date
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.70
Number of active exceptions
Real
0…16
-
1=1
34.71
Exception types
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.72
Exception 1 start
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.73
Exception 1 length
Real
0…60
d
1=1d
34.74
Exception 2 start
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.75
Exception 2 length
Real
0…60
d
1=1d
34.76
Exception 3 start
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.77
Exception 3 length
Real
0…60
d
1=1d
34.78
Exception day 4
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.79
Exception day 5
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.80
Exception day 6
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
342 Additional parameter data
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
34.81
No.
Exception day 7
Name
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.82
Exception day 8
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.83
Exception day 9
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.84
Exception day 10
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.85
Exception day 11
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.86
Exception day 12
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.87
Exception day 13
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.88
Exception day 14
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.89
Exception day 15
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.90
Exception day 16
Date
01.01…31.12
d
1=1d
34.100 Timed function 1
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.101 Timed function 2
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.102 Timed function 3
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
34.110 Extra time function
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
Duration
00 00:00…07 00:00
min
1 = 1 min
34.111 Extra time activation source
34.112 Extra time duration
35 Motor thermal protection
35.01
Motor estimated temperature
Real
-60…1000 °C or
-76…1832 °F
°C or °F
1=1°
35.02
Measured temperature 1
Real
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
°C, °F or
ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.03
Measured temperature 2
Real
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
°C, °F or
ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.11
Temperature 1 source
List
0…2, 5…7, 11…16, 19
-
1=1
35.12
Supervision1 fault limit
Real
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
°C, °F or
ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.13
Supervision1 1 warning limit
Real
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
°C, °F or
ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.14
Temperature 1 AI source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
35.21
Temperature 2 source
List
0…2, 5…7, 11…16, 19
-
1=1
35.22
Supervision1 2 fault limit
Real
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
°C, °F or
ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.23
Supervision1 2 warning limit
Real
-60…5000 °C or
-76…9032 °F
°C, °F or
ohm
1 = 1 unit
35.24
Temperature 2 AI source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
35.50
Motor ambient temperature
Real
-60…100 °C or
-76 … 212 °F
°C
1=1°
35.51
Motor load curve
Real
50…150
%
1 = 1%
35.52
Zero speed load
Real
50…150
%
1 = 1%
35.53
Break point
Real
1.00 … 500.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
35.54
Motor nominal temperature
rise
Real
0…300 °C or 32…572 °F
°C or °F
1=1°
Additional parameter data 343
No.
35.55
Name
Motor thermal time const
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Real
100…10000
s
1=1s
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
36 Load analyzer
36.01
PVL signal source
36.02
PVL filter time
Real
0.00…120.00
s
100 = 1 s
36.06
AL2 signal source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
100 = 1
36.07
AL2 signal scaling
Real
0.00…32767.00
-
36.09
Reset loggers
List
0…3
-
1=1
36.10
PVL peak value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
1=1
36.11
PVL peak date
Data
-
-
36.12
PVL peak time
Data
-
-
1=1
36.13
PVL current at peak
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
A
100 = 1 A
36.14
PVL DC voltage at peak
Real
0.00…2000.00
V
100 = 1 V
36.15
PVL speed at peak
Real
-30000.00… 30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
36.16
PVL reset date
Data
-
-
1=1
36.17
PVL reset time
Data
-
-
1=1
36.20
AL1 0 to 10%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.21
AL1 10 to 20%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.22
AL1 20 to 30%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.23
AL1 30 to 40%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.24
AL1 40 to 50%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.25
AL1 50 to 60%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.26
AL1 60 to 70%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.27
AL1 70 to 80%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.28
AL1 80 to 90%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.29
AL1 over 90%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.40
AL2 0 to 10%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.41
AL2 10 to 20%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.42
AL2 20 to 30%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.43
AL2 30 to 40%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.44
AL2 40 to 50%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.45
AL2 50 to 60%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.46
AL2 60 to 70%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.47
AL2 70 to 80%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.48
AL2 80 to 90%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.49
AL2 over 90%
Real
0.00…100.00
%
100 = 1%
36.50
AL2 reset date
Data
-
-
1=1
36.51
AL2 reset time
Data
-
-
1=1
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
37 User load curve
37.01
ULC output status word
344 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
ULC overload actions
List
0…3
-
1=1
ULC underload actions
List
0…3
-
1=1
37.11
ULC speed table point 1
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
37.12
ULC speed table point 2
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
37.13
ULC speed table point 3
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
37.14
ULC speed table point 4
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
37.15
ULC speed table point 5
Real
-30000.0…30000.0
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
37.16
ULC frequency table point 1
Real
-500.0…500.0
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
37.17
ULC frequency table point 2
Real
-500.0…500.0
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
37.18
ULC frequency table point 3
Real
-500.0…500.0
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
37.19
ULC frequency table point 4
Real
-500.0…500.0
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
37.20
ULC frequency table point 5
Real
-500.0…500.0
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
37.21
ULC underload point 1
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.22
ULC underload point 2
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.23
ULC underload point 3
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.24
ULC underload point 4
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.25
ULC underload point 5
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.31
ULC overload point 1
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.32
ULC overload point 2
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.33
ULC overload point 3
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.34
ULC overload point 4
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.35
ULC overload point 5
Real
-1600.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
37.41
ULC overload timer
Real
0.0…10000.0
s
10 = 1 s
37.42
ULC underload timer
Real
0.0…10000.0
s
10 = 1 s
37.02
ULC supervision signal
37.03
37.04
40 Process PID set 1
40.01
Process PID output actual
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
%
100 = 1%
40.02
Process PID feedback actual
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.03
Process PID setpoint actual
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.04
Process PID deviation actual
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.06
Process PID status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
40.07
Process PID operation mode
List
0…2
-
1=1
40.08
Set 1 feedback 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
40.09
Set 1 feedback 2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
40.10
Set 1 feedback function
List
0…11
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 345
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
Set 1 setpoint 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
40.17
Set 1 setpoint 2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
40.11
Set 1 feedback filter time
40.16
40.18
Set 1 setpoint function
List
0…11
-
1=1
40.19
Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
40.20
Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
40.21
Set 1 internal setpoint 1
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.22
Set 1 internal setpoint 2
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.23
Set 1 internal setpoint 3
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.26
Set 1 setpoint min
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
40.27
Set 1 setpoint max
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
40.28
Set 1 setpoint increase time
Real
0.0…1800.0
s
10 = 1 s
40.29
Set 1 setpoint decrease time
Real
0.0…1800.0
s
10 = 1 s
40.30
Set 1 setpoint freeze enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
40.31
Set 1 deviation inversion
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
40.32
Set 1 gain
Real
0.10…100.00
-
100 = 1
40.33
Set 1 integration time
Real
0.0…9999.0
s
10 = 1 s
40.34
Set 1 derivation time
Real
0.000…10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
40.35
Set 1 derivation filter time
Real
0.0…10.0
s
10 = 1 s
40.36
Set 1 output min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
40.37
Set 1 output max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
40.38
Set 1 output freeze enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
40.43
Set 1 sleep level
Real
0.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
40.44
Set 1 sleep delay
Real
0.0…3600.0
s
10 = 1 s
40.45
Set 1 sleep boost time
Real
0.0…3600.0
s
10 = 1 s
40.46
Set 1 sleep boost step
Real
0.0…32767.0
PID
customer
units
10 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.47
Set 1 wake-up deviation
Real
-32768.00… 32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.48
Set 1 wake-up delay
Real
0.00…60.00
s
100 = 1 s
40.49
Set 1 tracking mode
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
346 Additional parameter data
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
40.50
No.
Set 1 tracking ref selection
Name
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
40.57
PID set1/set2 selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
1=1
40.58
Set 1 increase prevention
List
0…3
-
40.59
Set 1 decrease prevention
List
0…3
-
1=1
40.62
PID internal setpoint actual
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
40.91
Feedback data storage
Real
-327.68…327.67
-
100 = 1
40.92
Setpoint data storage
Real
-327.68…327.67
-
100 = 1
41 Process PID set 2
41.08
Set 2 feedback 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
41.09
Set 2 feedback 2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
41.10
Set 2 feedback function
List
0…11
-
1=1
41.11
Set 2 feedback filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
1000 = 1 s
41.16
Set 2 setpoint 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
41.17
Set 2 setpoint 2 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
41.18
Set 2 setpoint function
List
0…11
-
1=1
41.19
Set 2 internal setpoint sel1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
41.20
Set 2 internal setpoint sel2
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
41.21
Set 2 internal setpoint 1
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
PID
customer
unit
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
41.22
Set 2 internal setpoint 2
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
41.23
Set 2 internal setpoint 3
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
41.26
Set 2 setpoint min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
100 = 1
41.27
Set 2 setpoint max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
100 = 1
41.28
Set 2 setpoint increase time
Real
0.0…1800.0
s
10 = 1 s
41.29
Set 2 setpoint decrease time
Real
0.0…1800.0
s
10 = 1 s
41.30
Set 2 setpoint freeze enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
41.31
Set 2 deviation inversion
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
41.32
Set 2 gain
Real
0.10…100.00
-
100 = 1
41.33
Set 2 integration time
Real
0.0…9999.0
s
10 = 1 s
41.34
Set 2 derivation time
Real
0.000…10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
Additional parameter data 347
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
41.35
No.
Set 2 derivation filter time
Name
Real
0.0…10.0
s
10 = 1 s
41.36
Set 2 output min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
41.37
Set 2 output max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
41.38
Set 2 output freeze enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
41.43
Set 2 sleep level
Real
0.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
41.44
Set 2 sleep delay
Real
0.0…3600.0
s
10 = 1 s
41.45
Set 2 sleep boost time
Real
0.0…3600.0
s
10 = 1 s
41.46
Set 2 sleep boost step
Real
0.0…32767.0
PID
customer
units
10 = 1 PID
customer unit
41.47
Set 2 wake-up deviation
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
41.48
Set 2 wake-up delay
Real
0.00…60.00
s
100 = 1 s
41.49
Set 2 tracking mode
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
41.50
Set 2 tracking ref selection
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
41.58
Set 2 increase prevention
List
0…3
-
1=1
41.59
Set 2 decrease prevention
List
0…3
-
1=1
43 Brake chopper
43.01
Braking resistor temperature
Real
0.0…120.0
%
10 = 1%
43.06
Brake chopper enable
List
0…2
-
1=1
43.07
Brake chopper runtime enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
43.08
Brake resistor thermal tc
Real
0…10000
s
1=1s
43.09
Brake resistor Pmax cont
Real
0.00…10000.00
kW
100 = 1 kW
43.10
Brake resistance
Real
0.0…1000.0
ohm
10 = 1 ohm
43.11
Brake resistor fault limit
Real
0…150
%
1 = 1%
43.12
Brake resistor warning limit
Real
0…150
%
1 = 1%
44 Mechanical brake control
44.01
Brake control status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
44.06
Brake control enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
100 = 1 s
44.08
Brake open delay
Real
0.00…5.00
s
44.13
Brake close delay
Real
0.00…60.00
s
100 = 1 s
44.14
Brake close level
Real
0.00…1000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
45 Energy efficiency
45.01
Saved GW hours
Real
0…65535
GWh
1 = 1 GWh
45.02
Saved MW hours
Real
0…999
MWh
1 = 1 MWh
45.03
Saved kW hours
Real
0.0…999.9
kWh
10 = 1 kWh
45.04
Saved energy
Real
0.0…214748364.7
kWh
10 = 1 kWh
348 Additional parameter data
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
45.05
No.
Saved money x1000
Name
Real
0…4294967295 thousands
(selectable)
1 = 1 unit
45.06
Saved money
Real
0.00…999.99
(selectable)
100 = 1 unit
45.07
Saved amount
Real
0.00…21474830.08
(selectable)
100 = 1 unit
45.08
CO2 reduction in kilotons
Real
0…65535
metric
kiloton
1 = 1 metric
kiloton
45.09
CO2 reduction in tons
Real
0.0…999.9
metric
ton
10 = 1 metric
ton
45.10
Total saved CO2
Real
0.0…214748300.8
metric
ton
10 = 1 metric
ton
45.11
Energy optimizer
List
0…1
-
1=1
45.12
Energy tariff 1
Real
0.000…4294966.296
(selectable)
1000 = 1 unit
45.13
Energy tariff 2
Real
0.000…4294966.296
(selectable)
1000 = 1 unit
45.14
Tariff selection
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
45.17
Tariff currency unit
List
100…102
-
1=1
45.18
CO2 conversion factor
Real
0.000…65.535
metric
ton/ MWh
1000 = 1
metric
ton/MWh
45.19
Comparison power
Real
0.00…10000000.00
kW
10 = 1 kW
45.21
Energy calculations reset
List
0…1
-
1=1
46 Monitoring/scaling settings
46.01
Speed scaling
Real
0.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
46.02
Frequency scaling
Real
0.10…1000.00
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
46.03
Torque scaling
Real
0.1…1000.0
%
10 = 1%
46.04
Power scaling
Real
0.10…30000.00 kW or
0.10…40214.48 hp
kW or hp
10 = 1 unit
46.05
Current scaling
Real
0…30000
A
1=1A
46.11
Filter time motor speed
Real
2…20000
ms
1 = 1 ms
46.12
Filter time output frequency
Real
2…20000
ms
1 = 1 ms
46.13
Filter time motor torque
Real
2…20000
ms
1 = 1 ms
46.14
Filter time power
Real
2…20000
ms
1 = 1 ms
46.21
At speed hysteresis
Real
0.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
100 = 1 Hz
46.22
At frequency hysteresis
Real
0.00…1000.00
Hz
46.23
At torque hysteresis
Real
0.0…300.0
%
1 = 1%
46.31
Above speed limit
Real
0.00…30000.00
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
100 = 1 Hz
46.32
Above frequency limit
Real
0.00…1000.00
Hz
46.33
Above torque limit
Real
0.0…1600.0
%
10 = 1%
46.41
kWh pulse scaling
Real
0.001…1000.000
kWh
1000 = 1 kWh
Additional parameter data 349
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
47 Data storage
47.01
Data storage 1 real32
Real
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
-
1000 = 1
47.02
Data storage 2 real32
Real
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
-
1000 = 1
47.03
Data storage 3 real32
Real
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
-
1000 = 1
47.04
Data storage 4 real32
Real
-2147483.000…
2147483.000
-
1000 = 1
47.11
Data storage 1 int32
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
47.12
Data storage 2 int32
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
47.13
Data storage 3 int32
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
47.14
Data storage 4 int32
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
47.21
Data storage 1 int16
Real
-32768…32767
-
1=1
47.22
Data storage 2 int16
Real
-32768…32767
-
1=1
47.23
Data storage 3 int16
Real
-32768…32767
-
1=1
47.24
Data storage 4 int16
Real
-32768…32767
-
1=1
49 Panel port communication
49.01
Node ID number
Real
1…32
-
1=1
49.03
Baud rate
List
1…5
-
1=1
49.04
Communication loss time
Real
0.3…3000.0
s
10 = 1 s
49.05
Communication loss action
List
0…3
-
1=1
49.06
Refresh settings
List
0…1
-
1=1
1=1
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA)
50.01
FBA A enable
List
0…1
-
50.02
FBA A comm loss func
List
0…5
-
1=1
50.03
FBA A comm loss t out
Real
0.3…6553.5
s
10 = 1 s
50.04
FBA A ref1 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
50.05
FBA A ref2 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
50.06
FBA A SW sel
List
0…1
-
1=1
50.07
FBA A actual 1 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
50.08
FBA A actual 2 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
50.09
FBA A SW transparent source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
50.10
FBA A act1 transparent source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
50.11
FBA A act2 transparent source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
50.12
FBA A debug mode
List
0…2
-
1=1
50.13
FBA A control word
Data
-
1=1
00000000h…FFFFFFFFh
350 Additional parameter data
Name
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
50.14
No.
FBA A reference 1
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
50.15
FBA A reference 2
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
50.16
FBA A status word
Data
-
1=1
50.17
FBA A actual value 1
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
50.18
FBA A actual value 2
Real
-2147483648…
2147483647
-
1=1
00000000h…FFFFFFFFh
51 FBA A settings
51.01
FBA A type
List
-
-
1=1
51.02
FBA A Par2
Real
0…65535
-
1=1
…
…
…
…
51.26
FBA A Par26
…
Real
0…65535
-
1=1
51.27
FBA A par refresh
List
0…1
-
1=1
51.28
FBA A par table ver
Data
-
-
1=1
51.29
FBA A drive type code
Real
0…65535
-
1=1
51.30
FBA A mapping file ver
Real
0…65535
-
1=1
51.31
D2FBA A comm status
List
0…6
-
1=1
51.32
FBA A comm SW ver
Data
-
-
1=1
51.33
FBA A appl SW ver
Data
-
-
1=1
1=1
52 FBA A data in
52.01
…
52.12
FBA A data in1
List
-
-
…
…
…
…
FBA A data in12
List
-
-
1=1
1=1
53 FBA A data out
53.01
…
53.12
FBA A data out1
List
-
-
…
…
…
…
FBA A data out12
List
-
-
1=1
1=1
58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01
Protocol enable
List
0…1
-
58.02
Protocol ID
Real
0…65535
-
1=1
58.03
Node address
Real
0…255
-
1=1
58.04
Baud rate
List
1…7
-
1=1
58.05
Parity
List
0…3
-
1=1
58.06
Communication control
List
0…2
-
1=1
58.07
Communication diagnostics
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
58.08
Received packets
Real
0…4294967295
-
1=1
58.09
Transmitted packets
Real
0…4294967295
-
1=1
58.10
All packets
Real
0…4294967295
-
1=1
58.11
UART errors
Real
0…4294967295
-
1=1
58.12
CRC errors
Real
0…4294967295
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 351
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
58.14
No.
Communication loss action
Name
List
0…5
-
1=1
58.15
Communication loss mode
List
1…2
-
1=1
58.16
Communication loss time
Real
0.0…6000.0
s
10 = 1 s
58.17
Transmit delay
Real
0…65535
ms
1 = 1 ms
58.18
EFB control word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
58.19
EFB status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
58.25
Control profile
List
0, 5
-
1=1
58.26
EFB ref1 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
58.27
EFB ref2 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
58.28
EFB act1 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
58.29
EFB act2 type
List
0…5
-
1=1
58.31
EFB act1 transparent source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.32
EFB act2 transparent source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.33
Addressing mode
List
0…2
-
1=1
58.34
Word order
List
0…1
-
1=1
58.101 Data I/O 1
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.102 Data I/O 2
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.103 Data I/O 3
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.104 Data I/O 4
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.105 Data I/O 5
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.106 Data I/O 6
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
58.107 Data I/O 7
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
…
…
…
…
58.114 Data I/O 14
Analog
src
-
-
…
1=1
71 External PID1
71.01
External PID act value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
%
100 = 1 %
71.02
Feedback act value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
71.03
Setpoint act value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
71.04
Deviation act value
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
71.06
PID status word
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
352 Additional parameter data
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
71.07
No.
PID operation mode
Name
List
0…2
-
1=1
71.08
Feedback 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
1000 = 1 s
71.11
Feedback filter time
Real
0.000…30.000
s
71.14
Set 1 setpoint scaling
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
71.15
Set 1 output scaling
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
71.16
Setpoint 1 source
Analog
src
-
-
1=1
71.19
Internal setpoint sel1
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
71.20
Internal setpoint sel2
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
71.21
Internal setpoint 1
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
71.22
Internal setpoint 2
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
71.23
Internal setpoint 3
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
71.26
Setpoint min
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
71.27
Setpoint max
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
-
100 = 1
71.31
Deviation inversion
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
71.32
Gain
Real
0.10…100.00
-
100 = 1
71.33
Integration time
Real
0.0…9999.0
s
10 = 1 s
71.34
Derivation time
Real
0.000…10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
71.35
Derivation filter time
Real
0.0…10.0
s
10 = 1 s
71.36
Output min
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
71.37
Output max
Real
-32768.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
71.38
Output freeze enable
Binary
src
-
-
1=1
71.39
Deadband range
Real
0.0…32767.0
-
10 = 1
71.40
Deadband delay
Real
0.0…3600.0
s
10 = 1 s
71.58
Increase prevention
List
0…3
-
1=1
71.59
Decrease prevention
List
0…3
-
1=1
71.62
Internal setpoint actual
Real
-32768.00…32767.00
PID
customer
units
100 = 1 PID
customer unit
76 PFC configuration
76.01
PFC status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
76.02
PFC system status
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
76.11
Pump/fan status 1
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
76.12
Pump/fan status 2
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
76.13
Pump/fan status 3
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
Additional parameter data 353
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
76.14
No.
Pump/fan status 4
Name
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
76.21
PFC configuration
List
0, 2
-
1=1
76.25
Number of motors
Real
1…4
-
1=1
76.26
Min number of motors allowed
Real
0…4
-
1=1
76.27
Max number of motors allowed
Real
1…4
-
1=1
1 = 1 unit
76.30
Start speed 1
Real
0…32767
rpm/Hz
76.31
Start speed 2
Real
0…32767
rpm/Hz
1 = 1 unit
76.32
Start speed 3
Real
0…32767
rpm/Hz
1 = 1 unit
1 = 1 unit
76.41
Stop speed 1
Real
0…32767
rpm/Hz
76.42
Stop speed 2
Real
0…32767
rpm/Hz
1 = 1 unit
76.43
Stop speed 3
Real
0…32767
rpm/Hz
1 = 1 unit
76.55
Start delay
Real
0.00…12600.00
s
100 = 1 s
76.56
Stop delay
Real
0.00…12600.00
s
100 = 1 s
100 = 1 s
76.57
Speed hold on
Real
0.00…1000.00
s
76.58
Speed hold off
Real
0.00…1000.00
s
100 = 1 s
76.59
PFC contactor delay
Real
0.20…600.00
s
100 = 1 s
76.60
PFC ramp acceleration time
Real
0.00…1800.00
s
100 = 1 s
76.61
PFC ramp deceleration time
Real
0.00…1800.00
s
100 = 1 s
76.70
Autochange
List
0…13
-
1=1
76.71
Autochange interval
Real
0.00…42949672.95
h
100 = 1 h
76.72
Maximum wear imbalance
Real
0.00…1000000.00
h
100 = 1 h
76.73
Autochange level
Real
0.0…300.0
%
10 = 1%
76.74
Autochange auxiliary PFC
List
0…1
-
1=1
76.81
PFC interlock 1
List
0…10
-
1=1
76.82
PFC interlock 2
List
0…10
-
1=1
76.83
PFC interlock 3
List
0…10
-
1=1
76.84
PFC interlock 4
List
0…10
-
1=1
77 PFC maintenance and monitoring
77.10
Runtime change
List
0…5
-
1=1
77.11
Pump/fan 1 running time
Real
0.00…42949672.95
h
100 = 1 h
77.12
Pump/fan 2 running time
Real
0.00…42949672.95
h
100 = 1 h
77.13
Pump/fan 3 running time
Real
0.00…42949672.95
h
100 = 1 h
77.14
Pump/fan 4 running time
Real
0.00…42949672.95
h
100 = 1 h
1=1
95 HW configuration
95.01
Supply voltage
List
0…6
-
95.02
Adaptive voltage limits
List
0…1
-
1=1
95.03
Estimated AC supply voltage
Real
0…65535
V
1=1V
95.04
Control board supply
List
0…1
-
1=1
95.20
HW options word 1
PB
0000h…FFFFh
-
1=1
List
-
-
1=1
96 System
96.01
Language
354 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
Data
0…99999999
-
1=1
Access level status
PB
000b…111b
-
1=1
96.04
Macro select
List
0…3, 11…17
-
1=1
96.05
Macro active
List
1…3, 11…17
-
1=1
96.06
Parameter restore
List
0, 2, 8, 32, 62, 512, 1024,
34560
-
1=1
96.07
Parameter save manually
List
0…1
-
1=1
96.08
Control board boot
Real
0…1
-
1=1
96.10
User set status
List
0…7, 20…23
-
1=1
96.11
User set save/load
List
0…5, 18…21
-
1=1
96.12
User set I/O mode in1
Binary
src
-
-
-
96.13
User set I/O mode in2
Binary
src
-
-
-
PB
000h…FFFFh
Real
0…1
-
1=1
96.02
Pass code
96.03
96.16
Unit selection
96.51
Clear fault and event logger
FbEq32
1=1
97 Motor control
97.01
Switching frequency reference
List
4, 8, 12
kHz
1 = 1 kHz
97.02
Minimum switching frequency
List
1.5, 2, 4, 8, 12
kHz
1 = 1 kHz
97.03
Slip gain
Real
0…200
%
1 = 1%
97.04
Voltage reserve
Real
-4…50
%
1 = 1%
97.05
Flux braking
List
0…2
-
1=1
97.10
Signal injection
List
0…4
-
1=1
97.11
TR tuning
Real
25…400
%
1 = 1%
97.13
IR compensation
Real
0.00…50.00
%
100 = 1%
97.15
Motor model temperature
adaptation
List
0…1
-
1=1
97.16
Stator temperature factor
Real
0…200
%
1 = 1%
97.17
Rotor temperature factor
Real
0…200
%
1 = 1%
97.20
U/F ratio
List
0…1
-
1=1
98 User motor parameters
98.01
User motor model mode
List
0…1
-
1=1
98.02
Rs user
Real
0.0000…0.50000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.03
Rr user
Real
0.0000…0.50000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.04
Lm user
Real
0.00000…10.00000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.05
SigmaL user
Real
0.00000…1.00000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.06
Ld user
Real
0.00000…10.00000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.07
Lq user
Real
0.00000…10.00000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
Additional parameter data 355
Type
Range
Unit
FbEq32
98.08
No.
PM flux user
Name
Real
0.00000…2.00000
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.09
Rs user SI
Real
0.00000…100.00000
ohm
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.10
Rr user SI
Real
0.00000…100.00000
ohm
100000 =
1 p.u.
98.11
Lm user SI
Real
0.00…100000.00
mH
100 = 1 mH
98.12
SigmaL user SI
Real
0.00…100000.00
mH
100 = 1 mH
98.13
Ld user SI
Real
0.00…100000.00
mH
100 = 1 mH
98.14
Lq user SI
Real
0.00…100000.00
mH
100 = 1 mH
1=1
99 Motor data
99.03
Motor type
List
0…1
-
99.04
Motor control mode
List
0…1
-
1=1
99.06
Motor nominal current
Real
0.0…6400.0
A
10 = 1 A
99.07
Motor nominal voltage
Real
0.0…800.0
V
10 = 1 V
99.08
Motor nominal frequency
Real
0.0 … 500.0
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
99.09
Motor nominal speed
Real
0 … 30000
rpm
1 = 1 rpm
99.10
Motor nominal power
Real
-10000.00…10000.00 kW
or
-13404.83 … 13404.83 hp
kW or hp
100 = 1 unit
99.11
Motor nominal cos Φ
Real
0.00 … 1.00
-
100 = 1
99.12
Motor nominal torque
Real
0.000…4000000.000 N·m or
0.000…2950248.597 lb·ft
N·m or
lb·ft
1000 = 1 unit
99.13
ID run requested
List
0…3, 5…7
-
1=1
99.14
Last ID run performed
List
0…3, 5…7
-
1=1
99.15
Motor polepairs calculated
Real
0…1000
-
1=1
99.16
Motor phase order
List
0…1
-
1=1
356 Additional parameter data
Fault tracing 357
9
Fault tracing
What this chapter contains
The chapter lists the warning and fault messages including possible causes and
corrective actions. The causes of most warnings and faults can be identified and
corrected using the information in this chapter. If not, contact an ABB service
representative. If you have a possibility to use the Drive composer PC tool, send the
Support package created by the Drive composer to the ABB service representative.
Warnings and faults are listed below in separate tables. Each table is sorted by
warning/fault code.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to service the drive. Read
the instructions in chapter Safety instructions at the beginning of the Hardware
manual of the drive before working on the drive.
Indications
 Warnings and faults
Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status. The codes and names of
active warnings and faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as in
the Drive composer PC tool. Only the codes of warnings and faults are available over
fieldbus.
Warnings do not need to be reset; they stop showing when the cause of the warning
ceases. Warnings do not latch and the drive will continue to operate the motor.
358 Fault tracing
Faults latch inside the drive and cause the drive to trip, and the motor stops. After the
cause of a fault has been removed, the fault can be reset from a selectable source
(Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - Reset faults manually (Reset
faults manually from:); or parameter 31.11 Fault reset selection) such as the control
panel, Drive composer PC tool, the digital inputs of the drive, or fieldbus. Reseting the
fault creates an event 64FF Fault reset. After the reset, the drive can be restarted.
Note that some faults require a reboot of the control unit either by switching the power
off and on, or using parameter 96.08 Control board boot – this is mentioned in the
fault listing wherever appropriate.
 Pure events
In addition to warnings and faults, there are pure events that are only recorded in the
event log of the drive. The codes of these events are included in the Warning
messages table on page (360).
 Editable messages
For external events, the action (fault or warning), name and the message text can be
edited. To specify external events, select Menu - Primary settings - Advanced
functions - External events.
Contact information can also be included and the text edited. To specify contact
information, select Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display - Contact info
view.
Warning/fault history
 Event log
All indications are stored in the event log with a time stamp and other information.
The event log stores information on
•
the last 8 fault recordings, that is, faults that tripped the drive or fault resets
•
the last 10 warnings or pure events that occurred.
See section Viewing warning/fault information on page 358.
Auxiliary codes
Some events generate an auxiliary code that often helps in pinpointing the problem.
On the control panel, the auxiliary code is stored as part of the details of the event; in
the Drive composer PC tool, the auxiliary code is shown in the event listing.
 Viewing warning/fault information
The drive is able to store a list of the active faults actually causing the drive to trip at
the present time. The drive also stores a list of faults and warnings that have
previously occurred.
Fault tracing 359
For active faults and warnings, see
•
Menu - Diagnostics - Active faults
•
Menu - Diagnostics - Active warnings
•
Options - Active faults
•
Options - Active warnings
•
parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 142).
For previously occurred faults and warnings, see
•
Menu - Diagnostics - Fault & event log
•
parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 142).
The event log can also be accessed (and reset) using the Drive composer PC tool.
See Drive composer PC tool user’s manual (3AUA0000094606 [English]).
QR code generation for mobile service application
A QR code (or a series of QR codes) can be generated by the drive for display on the
control panel. The QR code contains drive identification data, information on the
latest events, and values of status and counter parameters. The code can be read
with a mobile device containing the ABB service application, which then sends the
data to ABB for analysis. For more information on the application, contact your local
ABB service representative.
To generate the QR code, select Menu - Primary settings - System info - QR code.
360 Fault tracing
Warning messages
Note: The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log.
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
64FF
Fault reset
A fault has been reset from the
panel, Drive composer PC tool,
fieldbus or I/O.
Event. Informative only.
A2A1
Current calibration
Current offset and gain
measurement calibration will
occur at next start.
Informative warning. (See parameter
99.13 ID run requested.)
A2B1
Overcurrent
Output current has exceeded
internal fault limit.
In addition to an actual
overcurrent situation, this
warning may also be caused
by an earth fault or supply
phase loss.
Check motor load.
Check acceleration times in parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed
control), 26 Torque reference chain
(torque control) or 28 Frequency
reference chain (frequency control). Also
check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling,
46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03
Torque scaling.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Check there are no contactors opening
and closing in motor cable.
Check that the start-up data in parameter
group 99 Motor data corresponds to the
motor rating plate.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
A2B3
Earth leakage
Drive has detected load
unbalance typically due to
earth fault in motor or motor
cable.
Check there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the Hardware manual of the
drive. If an earth fault is found, fix or
change the motor cable and/or motor.
If no earth fault can be detected, contact
your local ABB representative.
Fault tracing 361
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
A2B4
Short circuit
Short-circuit in motor cable(s)
or motor.
Check motor and motor cable for cabling
errors.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Check there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
A2BA
IGBT overload
Excessive IGBT junction to
case temperature. This
warning protects the IGBT(s)
and can be activated by a short
circuit in the motor cable.
Check motor cable.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A3A1
DC link overvoltage
Intermediate circuit DC voltage
too high (when the drive is
stopped).
A3A2
DC link undervoltage
Intermediate circuit DC voltage
too low (when the drive is
stopped).
A3AA
DC not charged
The voltage of the intermediate
DC circuit has not yet risen to
operating level.
Check the supply voltage setting
(parameter 95.01 Supply voltage). Note
that the wrong setting of the parameter
may cause the motor to rush
uncontrollably, or may overload the brake
chopper or resistor.
Check the supply voltage.
If the problem persists, contact your local
ABB representative.
A491
External temperature
1
Measured temperature 1 has
exceeded warning limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.02
Measured temperature 1.
Check the cooling of the motor (or other
equipment whose temperature is being
measured).
Measured temperature 2 has
exceeded warning limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.03
Measured temperature 2.
Check the cooling of the motor (or other
equipment whose temperature is being
measured).
(Editable message text)
A492
External temperature
2
(Editable message text)
A4A1
IGBT overtemperature Estimated drive IGBT
temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A4A9
Cooling
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
40 °C/104 °F (frames R5…R9) or if it
exceeds 50 °C /122 °F (frames R0 …R9),
ensure that load current does not exceed
derated load capacity of drive. See
chapter Technical data, section Derating
in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Check drive module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
drive module for dust pick-up. Clean
whenever necessary.
Drive module temperature is
excessive.
362 Fault tracing
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
A4B0
Excess temperature
Power unit module
temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A4B1
Excess temperature
difference
High temperature difference
between the IGBTs of different
phases.
Check the motor cabling.
Check cooling of drive module(s).
A4F6
IGBT temperature
Drive IGBT temperature is
excessive.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A580
PU communication
Communication errors
Check the connections between the drive
detected between the drive
control unit and the power unit.
control unit and the power unit. Check the value of parameter 95.04
Control board supply.
Safe torque off
Safe torque off function is
active, ie safety circuit signal(s)
connected to connector STO is
lost.
Check safety circuit connections. For
more information, chapter The Safe
torque off function in the Hardware
manual of the drive and description of
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 231).
Check the value of parameter 95.04
Control board supply.
A5A0
Programmable warning:
31.22 STO indication
run/stop
A5EA
Measurement circuit
temperature
Problem with internal
temperature measurement of
the drive.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EB
PU board powerfail
Power unit power supply
failure.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EC
PU communication
internal
Communication errors
Check the connections between the drive
detected between the drive
control unit and the power unit.
control unit and the power unit.
A5ED
Measurement circuit
ADC
Measurement circuit fault.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EE
Measurement circuit
DFF
Measurement circuit fault.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5EF
PU state feedback
State feedback from output
phases does not match control
signals.
Contact your local ABB representative.
A5F0
Charging feedback
Charging feedback signal
missing.
Check the feedback signal coming from
the charging system.
A6A4
Motor nominal value
The motor parameters are set
incorrectly.
Check the settings of the motor
configuration parameters in group 99.
The drive is not dimensioned
correctly.
Check that the drive is sized correctly for
the motor.
A6A5
No motor data
Parameters in group 99 have
not been set.
Check that all the required parameters in
group 99 have been set.
Note: It is normal for this warning to
appear during the start-up and continue
until the motor data is entered.
A6A6
Voltage category
unselected
The voltage category has not
been defined.
Set voltage category in parameter 95.01
Supply voltage.
Fault tracing 363
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
A6D1
FBA A parameter
conflict
The drive does not have a
functionality requested by a
PLC, or requested functionality
has not been activated.
Check PLC programming.
Check settings of parameter groups 50
Fieldbus adapter (FBA).
A6E5
AI parametrization
The current/voltage hardware
setting of an analog input does
not correspond to parameter
settings.
Check the event log for an auxiliary code.
The code identifies the analog input
whose settings are in conflict.
Adjust either the hardware setting (on the
drive control unit) or parameter
12.15/12.25.
Note: Control board reboot (either by
cycling the power or through parameter
96.08 Control board boot) is required to
validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
A780
Motor stall
Motor is operating in stall
region because of e.g.
excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings.
Check fault function parameters.
Programmable warning:
31.24 Stall function
A791
Brake resistor
Brake resistor broken or not
connected.
Check that a brake resistor has been
connected.
Check the condition of the brake resistor.
A793
BR excess
temperature
Brake resistor temperature has
exceeded warning limit defined
by parameter 43.12 Brake
resistor warning limit.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
Check resistor overload protection
function settings (parameter group 43
Brake chopper).
Check warning limit setting, parameter
43.12 Brake resistor warning limit.
Check that the resistor has been
dimensioned correctly.
Check that braking cycle meets allowed
limits.
A794
BR data
Brake resistor data has not
been given.
Check the resistor data settings
(parameters 43.08…43.10).
A79C
BC IGBT excess
temperature
Brake chopper IGBT
temperature has exceeded
internal warning limit.
Let chopper cool down.
Check for excessive ambient
temperature.
Check for cooling fan failure.
Check for obstructions in the air flow.
Check the dimensioning and cooling of
the cabinet.
Check resistor overload protection
function settings (parameters
43.06…43.10).
Check minimum allowed resistor value
for the chopper being used.
Check that braking cycle meets allowed
limits.
Check that drive supply AC voltage is not
excessive.
A7AB
Extension I/O
configuration failure
Installed CMOD module is not
the same as configured.
Check that the installed module (shown
by parameter 15.02 Detected extension
module) is the same as selected by
parameter 15.01 Extension module type.
364 Fault tracing
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
A7C1
FBA A communication
Cyclical communication
between drive and fieldbus
adapter module A or between
PLC and fieldbus adapter
module A is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication.
See user documentation of fieldbus
interface.
Check settings of parameter groups 50
Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A
settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A
data out.
Check cable connections.
Check if communication master is able to
communicate.
Communication break in
embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication.
Check the status of the fieldbus master
(online/offline/error etc.).
Check cable connections to the
EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on
the control unit.
Control panel or PC tool
selected as active control
location for drive has ceased
communicating.
Check PC tool or control panel
connection.
Check control panel connector.
Check mounting platform if being used.
Disconnect and reconnect the control
panel.
An analog signal is outside the
limits specified for the analog
input.
Check signal level at the analog input.
Check the wiring connected to the input.
Check the minimum and maximum limits
of the input in parameter group 12
Standard AI.
The relay has changed states
more than the recommended
number of times.
Change the control board or stop using
the relay output.
Programmable warning:
50.02 FBA A comm loss
func
A7CE
EFB comm loss
Programmable warning:
58.14 Communication loss
action
A7EE
Panel loss
Programmable warning:
49.05 Communication loss
action
A8A0
AI supervision
Programmable warning:
12.03 AI supervision
function
A8A1
A8A2
A8B0
RO life warning
0001 Relay output 1
Change the control board or stop using
relay output 1.
0002 Relay output 2
Change the control board or stop using
relay output 2.
0003 Relay output 3
Change the control board or stop using
relay output 3.
RO toggle warning
The relay output is changing
states faster than
recommended, eg. if a fast
changing frequency signal is
connected to it. The relay
lifetime will be exceeded
shortly.
Replace the signal connected to the relay
output source with a less frequently
changing signal.
0001 Relay output 1
Select a different signal with parameter
10.24 RO1 source.
0002 Relay output 2
Select a different signal with parameter
10.27 RO2 source.
0003 Relay output 3
Select a different signal with parameter
10.30 RO3 source.
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
32.06 Supervision 1 action
Warning generated by the
signal supervision function 1.
Check the source of the warning
(parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Fault tracing 365
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
A8B1
Signal supervision
Warning generated by the
Check the source of the warning
(parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
signal supervision function 2.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
32.16 Supervision 2 action
A8B2
Signal supervision
Warning generated by the
signal supervision function 3.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
32.26 Supervision 3 action
A8B3
Signal supervision
Warning generated by the
signal supervision function 4.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
32.36 Supervision 4 action
A8B4
Signal supervision
Warning generated by the
signal supervision function 5.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
32.46 Supervision 5 action
A8B5
Signal supervision
Warning generated by the
signal supervision function 6.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
32.56 Supervision 6 action
Check the source of the warning
(parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Check the source of the warning
(parameter 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
Check the source of the warning
(parameter 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
Check the source of the warning
(parameter 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
A8C0
ULC invalid speed
table
User load curve: X-axis points
(speed) are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. See
parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point
1.
A8C1
ULC overload warning
User load curve: Signal has
been too long over the
overload curve.
See parameter 37.03 ULC overload
actions.
A8C4
ULC underload
warning
User load curve: Signal has
been too long under the
underload curve.
See parameter 37.04 ULC underload
actions.
A8C5
ULC invalid underload
table
User load curve: Underload
curve points are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. See
parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
A8C6
ULC invalid overload
table
User load curve: Overload
curve points are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. See
parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
A8C8
ULC invalid frequency
table
User load curve: X-axis points
(frequency) are not valid.
Check that points fulfill conditions. 500.0 Hz < 37.16 < 37.17 < 37.18 <
37.19 < 37.20 < 500.0 Hz. See
parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table
point 1.
A981
External warning 1
Fault in external device 1.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.01
External event 1 source.
Fault in external device 2.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.03
External event 2 source.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
31.01 External event 1
source
31.02 External event 1
type
A982
External warning 2
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
31.03 External event 2
source
31.04 External event 2
type
366 Fault tracing
Code
(hex)
A983
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
External warning 3
Fault in external device 3.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.05
External event 3 source.
Fault in external device 5.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.07
External event 4 source.
Fault in external device 5.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.09
External event 5 source.
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
31.05 External event 3
source
31.06 External event 3
type
A984
External warning 4
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
31.07 External event 4
source
31.08 External event 4
type
A985
External warning 5
(Editable message text)
Programmable warning:
31.09 External event 5
source
31.10 External event 5
type
AF88
Season configuration
warning
You have configured a season
which starts before the
previous season.
Configure the seasons with increasing
start dates, see parameters 34.60
Season 1 start date…34.63 Season 4
start date.
AF8C
Process PID sleep
mode
The drive is entering sleep
mode.
Informative warning. See section Sleep
and boost functions for process PID
control (page 112), and parameters
40.43…40.48.
AFAA
Autoreset
A fault is about to be autoreset. Informative warning. See the settings in
parameter group 31 Fault functions.
AFE1
Emergency stop (off2)
Drive has received an
emergency stop (mode
selection off2) command.
AFE2
Emergency stop (off1
or off3)
Drive has received an
emergency stop (mode
selection off1 or off3)
command.
AFEA
Enable start signal
missing
No enable start signal
received.
Check the setting of (and the source
selected by) parameter 20.19 Enable
start command.
(Editable message text)
Check that it is safe to continue
operation. Then return emergency stop
push button to normal position. Restart
drive.
If the emergency stop was unintentional,
check the source selected by parameter
21.05 Emergency stop source.
AFE9
Start delay
The start delay is active and
the drive will start the motor
after a predefined delay.
Informative warning. See parameter
21.22 Start delay.
AFEB
Run enable missing
No run enable signal is
received.
Check setting of parameter 20.12 Run
enable 1 source. Switch signal on (e.g. in
the fieldbus Control Word) or check
wiring of selected source.
AFEC
External power signal
missing
95.04 Control board supply is
set to External 24V but no
voltage is connected to the
control unit.
Check the external 24 V DC power
supply to the control unit, or change the
setting of parameter 95.04.
Fault tracing 367
Code
(hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
AFED
Enable to rotate
Signal enable to rotate has not
been received within a fixed
time delay.
Switch enable to rotate signal on (eg. in
digital inputs).
Check the setting of (and source
selected by) parameter 20.22 Enable to
rotate.
AFF6
Identification run
Motor ID run will occur at next
start.
Informative warning.
STO event
Safe torque off function is
active, ie. safety circuit
signal(s) connected to
connector STO is lost.
Check safety circuit connections. For
more information, see chapter The Safe
torque off function in the Hardware
manual of the drive and description of
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 231).
B5A0
Programmable event:
31.22 STO indication
run/stop
368 Fault tracing
Fault messages
Code
(hex)
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
1080
Backup/Restore
timeout
Panel or PC tool has failed to
communicate with the drive
when backup was being made
or restored.
Request backup or restore again.
1081
Rating ID fault
Drive software has not been
able to read the rating ID of the
drive.
Reset the fault to make the drive try to
reread the rating ID.
If the fault reappears, cycle the power to
the drive. You may have to be repeat this.
If the fault persists, contact your local
ABB representative.
2281
Calibration
Measured offset of output
phase current measurement or
difference between output
phase U2 and W2 current
measurement is too great (the
values are updated during
current calibration).
Try performing the current calibration
again (select Current measurement
calibration at parameter 99.13). If the
fault persists, contact your local ABB
representative.
2310
Overcurrent
Output current has exceeded
internal fault limit.
In addition to an actual
overcurrent situation, this fault
may also be caused by an
earth fault or supply phase
loss.
Check motor load.
Check acceleration times in parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed
control), 26 Torque reference chain
(torque control) or 28 Frequency
reference chain (frequency control). Also
check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling,
46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03
Torque scaling.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check there are no contactors opening
and closing in motor cable.
Check that the start-up data in parameter
group 99 corresponds to the motor rating
plate.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
2330
Earth leakage
Drive has detected load
unbalance typically due to
earth fault in motor or motor
cable.
Check there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
Try running the motor in scalar control
mode if allowed. (See parameter 99.04
Motor control mode.)
If no earth fault can be detected, contact
your local ABB representative.
Programmable fault: 31.20
Earth fault
Fault tracing 369
Code
(hex)
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
2340
Short circuit
Short-circuit in motor cable(s)
or motor
Check motor and motor cable for cabling
errors.
Check there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
Cycle the power to the drive.
2381
IGBT overload
Excessive IGBT junction to
case temperature. This fault
protects the IGBT(s) and can
be activated by a short circuit
in the motor cable.
Check motor cable.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
Input phase loss
Intermediate circuit DC voltage
is oscillating due to missing
input power line phase or
blown fuse.
Check input power line fuses.
Check for loose power cable
connections.
Check for input power supply imbalance.
Incorrect input power and
motor cable connection (ie.
input power cable is connected
to drive motor connection).
Check input power connections.
3130
Programmable fault: 31.21
Supply phase loss
3181
Wiring or earth fault
Programmable fault: 31.23
Wiring or earth fault
3210
DC link overvoltage
Excessive intermediate circuit
DC voltage.
Check that overvoltage control is on
(parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control).
Check that the supply voltage matches
the nominal input voltage of the drive.
Check the supply line for static or
transient overvoltage.
Check brake chopper and resistor (if
present).
Check deceleration time.
Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
Retrofit drive with brake chopper and
brake resistor.
Check that the brake resistor is
dimensioned properly and the resistance
is between acceptable range for the
drive.
3220
DC link undervoltage
Intermediate circuit DC voltage
is not sufficient because of a
missing supply phase, blown
fuse or fault in the rectifier
bridge.
Check supply cabling, fuses and
switchgear.
Output phase loss
Motor circuit fault due to
missing motor connection (all
three phases are not
connected).
Connect motor cable.
Programmable fault: 31.19
Motor phase loss
4110
Control board
temperature
Control board temperature is
too high.
Check proper cooling of the drive.
Check the auxiliary cooling fan.
4210
IGBT overtemperature Estimated drive IGBT
temperature is excessive.
3381
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
370 Fault tracing
Code
(hex)
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
4290
Cooling
Drive module temperature is
excessive.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
40 °C/104 °F (frames R5… R9) or if it
exceeds 50 °C /122 °F (frames R0…R9),
ensure that load current does not exceed
derated load capacity of drive. See
chapter Technical data, section Derating
in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Check drive module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
drive module for dust pick-up. Clean
whenever necessary.
42F1
IGBT temperature
Drive IGBT temperature is
excessive.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
4310
Excess temperature
Power unit module
temperature is excessive.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
4380
Excess temperature
difference
High temperature difference
between the IGBTs of different
phases.
Check the motor cabling.
Check cooling of drive module(s).
4981
External temperature
1
Measured temperature 1 has
exceeded fault limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.02
Measured temperature 1.
Check the cooling of the motor (or other
equipment whose temperature is being
measured).
Measured temperature 2 has
exceeded fault limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.03
Measured temperature 2.
Check the cooling of the motor (or other
equipment whose temperature is being
measured).
(Editable message text)
4982
External temperature
2
(Editable message text)
5081
Auxiliary fan broken
An auxiliary cooling fan
(connected to the fan
connectors on the control unit)
is stuck or disconnected.
Check auxiliary fan(s) and connection(s).
Replace fan if faulty.
Make sure the front cover of the drive
module is in place and tightened.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power.
5090
STO hardware failure
STO hardware diagnostics has
detected hardware failure.
Contact your local ABB representative for
hardware replacement.
Safe torque off
Safe torque off function is
active, ie. safety circuit
signal(s) connected to
connector STO is broken
during start or run.
Check safety circuit connections. For
more information, see chapter The Safe
torque off function in the Hardware
manual of the drive and description of
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 231).
Check the value of parameter 95.04
Control board supply.
Power unit memory has
cleared.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5091
Programmable fault: 31.22
STO indication run/stop
5092
PU logic error
Fault tracing 371
Code
(hex)
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
5093
Rating ID mismatch
The hardware of the drive does
not match the information
stored in the memory. This
may occur eg. after a firmware
update.
Cycle the power to the drive. You may
have to be repeat this.
5094
Measurement circuit
temperature
Problem with internal
temperature measurement of
the drive.
Contact your local ABB representative.
50A0
Fan
Cooling fan stuck or
disconnected.
Check fan operation and connection.
Replace fan if faulty.
5681
PU communication
Communication errors
Check the connection between the drive
detected between the drive
control unit and the power unit.
control unit and the power unit. Check the value of parameter 95.04
Control board supply.
5682
Power unit lost
Connection between the drive
control unit and the power unit
is lost.
Check the connection between the
control unit and the power unit.
5690
PU communication
internal
Internal communication error.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5691
Measurement circuit
ADC
Measurement circuit fault.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5692
PU board powerfail
Power unit power supply
failure.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5693
Measurement circuit
DFF
Measurement circuit fault.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5696
PU state feedback
State feedback from output
phases does not match control
signals.
Contact your local ABB representative.
5697
Charging feedback
Charging feedback signal
missing.
Check the feedback signal coming from
the charging system
6181
FPGA version
incompatible
Firmware and FPGA versions
are incompatible.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
6306
FBA A mapping file
Fieldbus adapter A mapping
file read error.
Contact your local ABB representative.
6481
Task overload
Internal fault.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
6487
Stack overflow
Internal fault.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
64A1
Internal file load
File read error.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
372 Fault tracing
Code
(hex)
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
64B2
User set fault
Loading of user parameter set Ensure that a valid user parameter set
exists. Reload if uncertain.
failed because
• requested set does not exist
• set is not compatible with
control program
• drive was switched off
during loading.
64E1
Kernel overload
Operating system error.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
6581
Parameter system
Parameter load or save failed.
Try forcing a save using parameter 96.07
Parameter save manually. Retry.
65A1
FBA A parameter
conflict
The drive does not have a
functionality requested by
PLC, or requested functionality
has not been activated.
Check PLC programming.
Check settings of parameter groups 50
Fieldbus adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A
settings.
6681
EFB comm loss
Communication break in
embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication.
Check the status of the fieldbus master
(online/offline/error etc.).
Check cable connections to the
EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on
the control unit.
Programmable fault: 58.14
Communication loss
action
What to do
6682
EFB config file
Embedded fieldbus (EFB)
configuration file could not be
read.
Contact your local ABB representative.
6683
EFB invalid
parameterization
Embedded fieldbus (EFB)
parameter settings
inconsistent or not compatible
with selected protocol.
Check the settings in parameter group 58
Embedded fieldbus.
6684
EFB load fault
Embedded fieldbus (EFB)
protocol firmware could not be
loaded.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Version mismatch between
EFB protocol firmware and
drive firmware.
6685
EFB fault 2
Fault reserved for the EFB
protocol application.
Check the documentation of the protocol.
6686
EFB fault 3
Fault reserved for the EFB
protocol application.
Check the documentation of the protocol.
6882
Text 32-bit table
overflow
Internal fault.
Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB
representative if the fault persists.
6885
Text file overflow
Internal fault.
Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB
representative if the fault persists.
Control panel loss
Control panel or PC tool
selected as active control
location for drive has ceased
communicating.
Check PC tool or control panel
connection.
Check control panel connector.
Disconnect and reconnect the control
panel.
Motor is operating in stall
region because of e.g.
excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings.
Check fault function parameters.
7081
Programmable fault: 49.05
Communication loss
action
7121
Motor stall
Programmable fault: 31.24
Stall function
Fault tracing 373
Code
(hex)
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
7181
Brake resistor
Brake resistor broken or not
connected.
Check that a brake resistor has been
connected.
Check the condition of the brake resistor.
Check the dimensioning of the brake
resistor.
7183
BR excess
temperature
Brake resistor temperature has
exceeded fault limit defined by
parameter 43.11 Brake resistor
fault limit.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
Check resistor overload protection
function settings (parameter group 43
Brake chopper).
Check fault limit setting, parameter 43.11
Brake resistor fault limit.
Check that braking cycle meets allowed
limits.
7184
Brake resistor wiring
Brake resistor short circuit or
brake chopper control fault.
Check brake chopper and brake resistor
connection.
Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.
7191
BC short circuit
Short circuit in brake chopper
IGBT.
Ensure brake resistor is connected and
not damaged.
Check the electrical specifications of the
brake resistor against chapter Resistor
braking in the Hardware manual of the
drive.
Replace brake chopper (if replaceable).
7192
BC IGBT excess
temperature
Brake chopper IGBT
temperature has exceeded
internal fault limit.
Let chopper cool down.
Check for excessive ambient
temperature.
Check for cooling fan failure.
Check for obstructions in the air flow.
Check resistor overload protection
function settings (parameter group 43
Brake chopper).
Check that braking cycle meets allowed
limits.
Check that drive supply AC voltage is not
excessive.
7310
Overspeed
Motor is turning faster than
highest allowed speed due to
incorrectly set
minimum/maximum speed,
insufficient braking torque or
changes in load when using
torque reference.
Check minimum/maximum speed
settings, parameters 30.11 Minimum
speed and 30.12 Maximum speed.
Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
Check applicability of torque control.
Check need for brake chopper and
resistor(s).
73B0
Emergency ramp
failed
Emergency stop did not finish
within expected time.
Check the settings of parameters 31.32
Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33
Emergency ramp supervision delay.
Check the predefined ramp times
(23.11…23.15 for mode Off1, 23.23 for
mode Off3).
374 Fault tracing
Code
(hex)
7510
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
FBA A communication
Cyclical communication
between drive and fieldbus
adapter module A or between
PLC and fieldbus adapter
module A is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication.
See user documentation of fieldbus
interface.
Check settings of parameter groups 50
Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A
settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A
data out.
Check cable connections.
Check if communication master is able to
communicate.
Programmable fault: 50.02
FBA A comm loss func
8001
ULC underload fault
User load curve: Signal has
been too long under the
underload curve.
See parameter 37.04 ULC underload
actions.
8002
ULC overload fault
User load curve: Signal has
been too long over the
overload curve.
See parameter 37.03 ULC overload
actions.
AI supervision
An analog signal is outside the
limits specified for the analog
input.
Check signal level at the analog input.
Check the wiring connected to the input.
Check the minimum and maximum limits
of the input in parameter group 12
Standard AI.
Fault generated by the signal
supervision function 1.
Check the source of the fault (parameter
32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Fault generated by the signal
supervision function 2.
Check the source of the fault (parameter
32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Fault generated by the signal
supervision function 4.
Check the source of the fault (parameter
32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Fault generated by the signal
supervision function 4.
Check the source of the fault (parameter
32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
Fault generated by the signal
supervision function 5.
Check the source of the fault (parameter
32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
Fault generated by the signal
supervision function66.
Check the source of the fault (parameter
32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
Fault in external device 1.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.01
External event 1 source.
Fault in external device 2.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.03
External event 2 source.
80A0
Programmable fault:
12.03 AI supervision
function
80B0
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault:
32.06 Supervision 1 action
80B1
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault:
32.16 Supervision 2 action
80B2
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault:
32.26 Supervision 3 action
80B3
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault:
32.36 Supervision 4 action
80B4
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault:
32.46 Supervision 5 action
80B5
Signal supervision
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault:
32.56 Supervision 6 action
9081
External fault 1
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault: 31.01
External event 1 source
31.02 External event 1
type
9082
External fault 2
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault: 31.03
External event 2 source
31.04 External event 2
type
Fault tracing 375
Code
(hex)
9083
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
External fault 3
Fault in external device 3.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.05
External event 3 source.
Fault in external device 5.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.07
External event 4 source.
Fault in external device 5.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.09
External event 5 source.
Check safety circuit connections. For
more information, see chapter The Safe
torque off function in the Hardware
manual of the drive and description of
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 231).
Check the value of parameter 95.04
Control board supply.
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault: 31.05
External event 3 source
31.06 External event 3
type
9084
External fault 4
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault: 31.07
External event 4 source
31.08 External event 4
type
9085
External fault 5
(Editable message text)
Programmable fault: 31.09
External event 5 source
31.10 External event 5
type
FA81
Safe torque off 1
Safe torque off function is
active, ie. STO circuit 1 is
broken.
FA82
Safe torque off 2
Safe torque off function is
active, ie. STO circuit 2 is
broken.
FF61
ID run
Motor ID run was not
completed successfully.
Check the nominal motor values in
parameter group 99 Motor data.
Check that no external control system is
connected to the drive.
Cycle the power to the drive (and its
control unit, if powered separately).
Check that no operation limits prevent
the completion of the ID run. Restore
parameters to default settings and try
again.
Check that the motor shaft is not locked.
FF81
FB A force trip
A fault trip command has been
received through fieldbus
adapter A.
Check the fault information provided by
the PLC.
FF8E
EFB force trip
A fault trip command has been
received through the
embedded fieldbus interface.
Check the fault information provided by
the PLC.
376 Fault tracing
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 377
10
Fieldbus control through the
embedded fieldbus interface
(EFB)
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network (fieldbus) using the embedded fieldbus interface.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through a communication
link using either a fieldbus adapter or the embedded fieldbus interface.
The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The drive
control program can handle 10 Modbus registers in a 10-millisecond time level. For
example, if the drive receives a request to read 20 registers, it will start its response
within 22 ms of receiving the request – 20 ms for processing the request and 2 ms
overhead for handling the bus. The actual response time depends on other factors as
well, such as the baud rate (a parameter setting in the drive).
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the embedded fieldbus interface
and other available sources, for example, digital and analog inputs.
378 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Fieldbus controller
Termination ON1)
Fieldbus
Data flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status Word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W
requests/responses
...
ON
ON
X5
ON
TERM BIAS
ON
ON
TERM BIAS
ON
TERM BIAS
1)
2)
X5
Service messages (acyclic)
X5
Termination ON1)
Bias ON2)
Termination OFF
Bias OFF
Termination OFF
Bias OFF
CEIA-01
CEIA-01
CEIA-01
Drive
Drive
Drive
The device at both ends on the fieldbus must have termination on.
One device, preferably at the end on the fieldbus must have bias on.
Connecting the fieldbus to the drive
Connect the fieldbus to terminal X5 on the CEIA-01, which is attached on the control
unit of the drive. The connection diagram is shown below.
To be added
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 379
Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface
Set the drive up for the embedded fieldbus communication with the parameters
shown in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives either the
value to use or the default value. The Function/Information column gives a
description of the parameter.
Parameter
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION
58.01
Protocol enable
Modbus RTU
Initializes embedded fieldbus communication.
EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION
58.03
Node address
1 (default)
Node address. There must be no two nodes
with the same node address online.
58.04
Baud rate
19.2 kbps (default) Defines the communication speed of the link.
Use the same setting as in the master station.
58.05
Parity
8 EVEN 1 (default) Selects the parity and stop bit setting. Use the
same setting as in the master station.
58.14
Communication
loss action
Fault (default)
Defines the action taken when a
communication loss is detected.
58.15
Communication
loss mode
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2
(default)
Enables/disables communication loss
monitoring and defines the means for
resetting the counter of the communication
loss delay.
58.16
Communication
loss time
3.0 s (default)
Defines the timeout limit for the
communication monitoring.
58.17
Transmit delay
0 ms (default)
Defines a response delay for the drive.
58.25
Control profile
ABB Drives
(default)
Selects the control profile used by the drive.
See section Basics of the embedded fieldbus
interface (page 382).
58.26
58.27
EFB ref1 type
EFB ref2 type
Speed or
frequency (default
for 58.26),
Transparent,
General, Torque
(default for 58.27),
Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of fieldbus references 1 and
2. The scaling for each reference type is
defined by parameters 46.01…46.03. With
the Speed or frequency setting, the type is
selected automatically according to the
currently active drive control mode.
58.28
58.29
EFB act1 type
EFB act2 type
Speed or
frequency (default
for 58.28),
Transparent
(default for 58.29),
General, Torque,
Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of actual values 1 and 2.
The scaling for each actual value type is
defined by parameters 46.01…46.03. With
the Speed or frequency setting, the type is
selected automatically according to the
currently active drive control mode.
380 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Setting for
fieldbus control
Parameter
Function/Information
58.31
58.32
EFB act1
transparent
source
EFB act2
transparent
source
Other
Defines the source of actual values 1 and 2
when the 58.26 EFB ref1 type (58.27 EFB
ref2 type) is set to Transparent.
58.33
Addressing
mode
Mode 0 (default)
Defines the mapping between parameters
and holding registers in the 400001…465536
(100…65535) Modbus register range.
58.34
Word order
LO-HI (default)
Defines the order of the data words in the
Modbus message frame.
For example, the
default settings
(I/Os 1…6 contain
the control word,
the status word,
two references and
two actual values)
Defines the address of the drive parameter
which the Modbus master accesses when it
reads from or writes to the register address
corresponding to Modbus In/Out parameters.
Select the parameters that you want to read
or write through the Modbus I/O words.
RO/DIO control
word, AO1 data
storage, AO2 data
storage, Feedback
data storage,
Setpoint data
storage
These settings write the incoming data into
storage parameters 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, 13.91 AO1 data storage, 13.92 AO2
data storage, 40.91 Feedback data storage or
40.92 Setpoint data storage.
Refresh settings
Validates the settings of the configuration
parameters.
58.101 Data I/O 1
…
…
58.114 Data I/O 14
58.06
Communication
control
The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when
they are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Setting the drive control parameters
After the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up, check and adjust the drive
control parameters listed in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column
gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired
source or destination for that particular drive control signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
20.01 Ext1
commands
Embedded fieldbus
Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
and stop commands when EXT1 is selected
as the active control location.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 381
Parameter
20.02 Ext2
commands
Setting for
fieldbus control
Embedded fieldbus
Function/Information
Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
and stop commands when EXT2 is selected
as the active control location.
SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as speed
reference 1.
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as speed
reference 2.
TORQUE REFERENCE SELECTION
26.11 Torque ref1
source
EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as torque
reference 1.
26.12 Torque ref2
source
EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as torque
reference 2.
FREQUENCY REFERENCE SELECTION
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1
EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as frequency
reference 1.
28.15 Ext2 frequency
ref1
EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as frequency
reference 2.
OTHER SELECTIONS
EFB references can be selected as the source at virtually any signal selector parameter by
selecting Other, then either 03.09 EFB reference 1 or 03.10 EFB reference 2.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
96.07 Parameter save Save (reverts to
manually
Done)
Saves parameter value changes (including
those made through fieldbus control) to
permanent memory.
382 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit
data words or 32-bit data words (with a transparent control profile).
The diagram below illustrates the operation of the embedded fieldbus interface. The
signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the
diagram.
Fieldbus network
1)
Cyclic communication
EFB profile
SEL
CW
REF1
REF2
2)
EFB CW
03.09 EFB reference
1
03.10 EFB reference
2
0
1
2
3
58.25
SW
ACT1
ACT2
SEL
2)
EFB SW
Actual 1
Actual 2
0
1
2
3
EXT1/2
Start commands
20.01
20.06
Reference
selection
58.25
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
…
I/O 69
Par. 01.01…255.255
58.101
…
58.114
Acyclic communication
Groups
22/26/28/40 etc.
Data I/O
selection
Reference
selection
Groups
22/26/28/40 etc.
Parameter
table
1. See also other parameters which can be controlled through fieldbus.
2. Data conversion if parameter 58.25 Control profile is set to ABB Drives. See section About the control
profiles (page 385).
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 383
 Control word and Status word
The Control Word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal
means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The CW is sent by the fieldbus
controller to the drive. With drive parameters, the user selects the EFB CW as the
source of drive control commands (such as start/stop, emergency stop, selection
between external control locations 1/2, or fault reset). The drive switches between its
states according to the bit-coded instructions of the CW.
The fieldbus CW is either written to the drive as it is or the data is converted. See
section About the control profiles (page 385).
The fieldbus Status Word (SW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It contains
status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller. The drive SW is either
written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted. See section About the
control profiles (page 385).
 References
EFB references 1 and 2 are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. The contents of each
reference word can be used as the source of virtually any signal, such as the speed,
frequency, torque or process reference. In embedded fieldbus communication,
references 1 and 2 are displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference
2 respectively. Whether the references are scaled or not depends on the settings of
58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type. See section About the control profiles
(page 385).
 Actual values
Fieldbus actual signals (ACT1 and ACT2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. They
convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master. Whether the
actual values are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.28 EFB act1 type and
58.29 EFB act2 type. See section About the control profiles (page 385).
 Data input/outputs
Data input/outputs are 16-bit or 32-bit words containing selected drive parameter
values. Parameters 58.101 Data I/O 1 … 58.114 Data I/O 14 define the addresses
from which the master either reads data (input) or to which it writes data (output).
 Register addressing
The address field of Modbus requests for accessing holding registers is 16 bits. This
allows the Modbus protocol to support addressing of 65536 holding registers.
Historically, Modbus master devices used 5-digit decimal addresses from 40001 to
49999 to represent holding register addresses. The 5-digit decimal addressing limited
to 9999 the number of holding registers that could be addressed.
384 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Modern Modbus master devices typically provide a means to access the full range of
65536 Modbus holding registers. One of these methods is to use 6-digit decimal
addresses from 400001 to 465536. This manual uses 6-digit decimal addressing to
represent Modbus holding register addresses.
Modbus master devices that are limited to the 5-digit decimal addressing may still
access registers 400001 to 409999 by using 5-digit decimal addresses 40001 to
49999. Registers 410000-465536 are inaccessible to these masters.
Note: Register addresses of 32-bit parameters cannot be accessed by using 5-digit
register numbers.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 385
About the control profiles
A control profile defines the rules for data transfer between the drive and the fieldbus
master, for example:
•
if packed boolean words are converted and how
•
if signal values are scaled and how
•
how drive register addresses are mapped for the fieldbus master.
You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the
two profiles:
•
ABB Drives
•
DCU Profile.
For the ABB Drives profile, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the
fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The DCU Profile involves
no data conversion or scaling. The figure below illustrates the effect of the profile
selection.
Profile selection
Data
conversion &
scaling
SEL
0
58.26…58.29
Fieldbus
5
58.25
Control profile selection with parameter 58.25 Control profile is:
• (0) ABB Drives
• (5) DCU Profile.
Drive
386 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Control Word
 Control Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives
control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in
which it is used in the drive. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown
in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 393.
Bit
Name
Value
STATE/Description
0
OFF1_
CONTROL
1
Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
0
Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to
OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
OFF2_
CONTROL
1
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0
Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED.
OFF3_
CONTROL
1
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0
Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive
parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure that the motor and driven machine can
be stopped using this stop mode.
3
INHIBIT_
OPERATION
1
Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED.
Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive
documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run
enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the
signal.
0
Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.
4
RAMP_OUT_
ZERO
1
Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
0
Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive
ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
1
Enable ramp function. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
1
2
5
RAMP_HOLD
6
RAMP_IN_
ZERO
1
0
Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
7
RESET
0=>1
Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0
Continue normal operation.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 387
Bit
Name
Value
STATE/Description
8
JOGGING_1
1
Request running at Jogging 1 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0
Continue normal operation.
9
JOGGING_2
1
Request running at Jogging 2 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0
Continue normal operation.
REMOTE_
CMD
1
Fieldbus control enabled.
0
Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control
Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
EXT_CTRL_
LOC
1
Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
0
Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
10
11
12
USER_0
13
USER_1
14
USER_2
15
USER_3
Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic
for application-specific functionality.
 Control Word for the DCU Profile
The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive
Control Word bits 0 to 15. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Control Word are not in use.
Bit
Name
Value
State/Description
0
STOP
1
Stop according to the Stop Mode parameter or the stop
mode request bits (bits 7…9).
0
(no op)
1
START
1
Start the drive.
0
(no op)
388 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Bit
Name
Value
State/Description
2
REVERSE
1
Reverse direction of motor rotation. See in the table
below how this bit and sign of the reference effect the
direction of the motor direction.
Bit REVERSE = 0
Bit REVERSE = 1
0
(no op)
RESET
0=>1
Fault reset if an active fault exists.
0
(no op)
EXT2
1
Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
0
Select External control location EXT1. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
1
Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable
signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal.
0
Run enable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable
signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
STOPMODE_RA
MP
1
Normal ramp stop mode
0
(no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7…9 are all
0.
STOPMODE_EM
ERGENCY_RAM
P
1
Emergency ramp stop mode.
0
(no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7…9 are all
0.
STOPMODE_CO
AST
1
Coast stop mode.
0
(no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7…9 are all
0.
RAMP_PAIR _2
1
Select ramp set 2 (Acceleration time 2 / Deceleration time
2) when parameter 23.11 Ramp set selection is set to
EFB.
0
Select ramp set 1 (Acceleration time 1 / Deceleration time
1) when parameter 23.11 Ramp set selection is set to
EFB.
1
Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive
ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
0
Normal operation.
1
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0
Normal operation.
3
Reserved
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Sign of the reference
Positive (+)
Negative (-)
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
RUN_DISABLE
11
RAMP_OUT_ZER
O
12
RAMP_HOLD
13
RAMP_IN_ZERO
1
Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
0
Normal operation.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 389
Bit
Name
Value
State/Description
14
REQ_LOCAL_LO
CK
1
Drive does not switch to local control mode (see
parameter 19.17 Local control disable).
0
Drive can switch between local and remote control
modes.
1
Select torque limit set 2 (Minimum torque 2 / Maximum
torque 2) when parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is set to
EFB.
0
Select torque limit set 1 (Minimum torque 1 / Maximum
torque 1) when parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is set to
EFB.
Local mode for control from the fieldbus is requested.
Steal control from the active source.
15
TORQ_LIM_PAIR
_2
16
FB_LOCAL_CTL
1
0
(no op)
17
FB_LOCAL_REF
1
Local mode for reference from the fieldbus is requested.
Steal reference from the active source.
0
(no op)
18
Reserved for
RUN_DISABLE_1
19
Reserved
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
USER_0
23
USER_1
24
USER_2
25
USER_3
26… Reserved
31
Not yet implemented.
Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic
for application-specific functionality.
390 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Status Word
 Status Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile.
The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the
fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition
diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 393.
Bit
Name
Value
STATE/Description
0
RDY_ON
1
READY TO SWITCH ON.
0
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1
READY TO OPERATE.
0
OFF1 ACTIVE.
1
OPERATION ENABLED.
0
OPERATION INHIBITED.
FAULT.
1
2
RDY_RUN
RDY_REF
3
TRIPPED
1
0
No fault.
4
OFF_2_STATUS
1
OFF2 inactive.
0
OFF2 ACTIVE.
1
OFF3 inactive.
0
OFF3 ACTIVE.
5
6
7
8
OFF_3_STATUS
SWC_ON_
INHIB
1
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0
–
ALARM
1
Warning/Alarm.
0
No warning/alarm.
1
OPERATING. Actual value equals Reference (is within
tolerance limits, e.g. in speed control, speed error is
10% max. of nominal motor speed).
0
Actual value differs from Reference (is outside
tolerance limits).
1
Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
AT_
SETPOINT
9
REMOTE
10
ABOVE_
LIMIT
11
USER_0
12
USER_1
13
USER_2
14
USER_3
15
Reserved
0
Drive control location: LOCAL.
1
Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds
supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both
directions of rotation.
0
Actual frequency or speed within supervision limit.
Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 391
 Status Word for the DCU Profile
The embedded fieldbus interface writes the drive Status Word bits 0 to 15 to the
fieldbus Status Word as is. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Status Word are not in use.
Bit
Name
Value
State/Description
0
READY
1
Drive is ready to receive the start command.
0
Drive is not ready.
1
External run enable signal is active.
0
External run enable signal is not active.
1
ENABLED
2
Reserved for
ENABLED_TO_R
OTATE
3
RUNNING
1
0
Drive is not modulating.
4
ZERO_SPEED
1
Drive is at zero speed.
0
Drive is not at zero speed.
5
ACCELERATING
1
Drive speed is increasing.
0
Drive speed is not increasing.
1
Drive speed is decreasing.
0
Drive speed is not decreasing.
1
Drive is at setpoint.
0
Drive is not at setpoint.
6
DECELERATING
7
AT_SETPOINT
8
LIMIT
9
SUPERVISION
Not yet implemented.
Drive is modulating.
1
Drive operation is limited.
0
Drive operation is not limited.
1
Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a
limit. Limit is set with parameters 46.31…46.33
0
Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within
limits.
Drive reference is in the reverse direction.
10
REVERSE_REF
1
0
Drive reference is in the forward direction
11
REVERSE_ACT
1
Drive is running in the reverse direction
0
Drive is running in the forward direction
12
PANEL_LOCAL
1
Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode.
0
Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode.
13
FIELDBUS_LOC
AL
1
Fieldbus is in local control mode.
0
Fieldbus is not in local control mode.
14
EXT2_ACT
1
External control location EXT2 is active.
0
External control location EXT1 is active.
15
FAULT
1
Drive is faulted.
0
Drive is not faulted.
392 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Bit
Name
Value
State/Description
16
ALARM
1
Warning/Alarm is active.
0
No warning/alarm.
17
Reserved
18
Reserved for
DIRECTION_LO
CK
19
Reserved
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
USER_0
23
USER_1
24
USER_2
25
USER_3
26
REQ_CTL
27…
31
Reserved
Not yet implemented.
Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.
1
Control is requested in this channel.
0
Control is not requested in this channel.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 393
State transition diagrams
 State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the
ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control
word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states
which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words. See
sections Control Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 386 and Status Word for
the ABB Drives profile on page 390.
394 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
MAINS OFF
Power ON
(SW Bit6=1)
(CW Bit0=0)
NOT READY TO
SWITCH ON
A B C D
(SW Bit0=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
(CW Bit3=0)
READY TO
SWITCH ON
OPERATION
INHIBITED
operation
inhibited
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
READY TO
OPERATE
from any state
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
B C D
(SW Bit1=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
and SW Bit12=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
I = Input Current
RFG = Ramp Function
Generator
f = Frequency
(SW Bit0=1)
(SW Bit2=0)
OFF1
ACTIVE
ABB Drives profile
from any state
Fault
FAULT
(SW Bit3=1)
(CW Bit7=1)
from any state
from any state
Emergency Stop
Emergency OFF
OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
(CW Bit3=1
and
SW Bit12=1)
OFF3
ACTIVE
OFF2
(SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE
(SW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(CW Bit4=0)
OPERATION
ENABLED
C D
(SW Bit2=1)
A
(CW Bit5=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
D
B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
STATE
C
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
OPERATION
D
condition
rising edge of the bit
(SW Bit8=1)
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 395
References
 References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB
reference 2. The references are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit
integer. A negative reference is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference.
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling is
in use depends on the setting of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type (see
page 294).
Fieldbus
Drive
20000
46.01 (with speed reference)
46.02 (with frequency reference)
10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
46.04 (with power reference)
0
0
-10000
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
-(46.04) (with power reference)
-20000
-(46.01) (with speed reference)
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10
EFB reference 2.
396 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Actual values
 Actual values for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and
ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit
integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive value.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling
is in use depends on the setting of parameters 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB
act2 type (see page 295).
Fieldbus
Drive
20000
46.01 (with speed reference)
46.02 (with frequency reference)
10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
46.04 (with power reference)
0
0
-10000
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
-(46.04) (with power reference)
-20000
-(46.01) (with speed reference)
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 397
Modbus holding register addresses
 Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and
DCU Profile
The table below shows the default Modbus holding register addresses for the drive
data with the ABB Drives profile. This profile provides a converted 16-bit access to
the drive data.
Note: Only the 16 least significant bits of the drive’s 32-bit Control and Status Words
can be accessed.
Note: Bits 16 through 32 of the DCU Control/Status word are not in use if 16-bit
control/status word is used with the DCU Profile.
Register address
Register data (16-bit words)
400001
Default: Control word (CW 16bit). See sections Control Word for the
ABB Drives profile (page 386) and Control Word for the DCU Profile
(page 387).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
400002
Default: Reference 1 (Ref1 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400003
Default: Reference 2 (Ref2 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400004
Default: Status Word (SW 16bit). See sections Status Word for the
ABB Drives profile (page 390) and Status Word for the DCU Profile
(page 391).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400005
Default: Actual value 1 (Act1 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.105 Data I/O 5.
400006
Actual value 2 (Act2 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.106 Data I/O 6.
400007…400014
Data in/out 7…14.
Selected by parameters 58.107 Data I/O 7 … 58.114 Data I/O 14.
400015…400089
Unused
400090…400100
Error code access. See section Error code registers (holding registers
400090…400100) (page 404).
400101…465536
Parameter read/write.
Parameters are mapped to register addresses according to parameter
58.33 Addressing mode.
398 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Modbus function codes
The table below shows the Modbus function codes supported by the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Code
Function name
Description
01h
Read Coils
Reads the 0/1 status of coils (0X references).
02h
Read Discrete Inputs
Reads the 0/1 status of discrete inputs (1X
references).
03h
Read Holding Registers
Reads the binary contents of holding registers (4X
references).
05h
Write Single Coil
Forces a single coil (0X reference) to 0 or 1.
06h
Write Single Register
Writes a single holding register (4X reference).
08h
Diagnostics
Provides a series of tests for checking the
communication, or for checking various internal error
conditions.
Supported subcodes:
• 00h Return Query Data: Echo/loopback test.
• 01h Restart Comm Option: Restarts and initializes
the EFB, clears communications event counters.
• 04h Force Listen Only Mode
• 0Ah Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
• 0Bh Return Bus Message Count
• 0Ch Return Bus Comm. Error Count
• 0Dh Return Bus Exception Error Count
• 0Eh Return Slave Message Count
• 0Fh Return Slave No Response Count
• 10h Return Slave NAK (negative acknowledge)
Count
• 11h Return Slave Busy Count
• 12h Return Bus Character Overrun Count
• 14h Clear Overrun Counter and Flag
0Bh
Get Comm Event
Counter
Returns a status word and an event count.
0Fh
Write Multiple Coils
Forces a sequence of coils (0X references) to 0 or 1.
10h
Write Multiple Registers
Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding
registers (4X references).
16h
Mask Write Register
Modifies the contents of a 4X register using a
combination of an AND mask, an OR mask, and the
register’s current contents.
17h
Read/Write Multiple
Registers
Writes the contents of a contiguous block of 4X
registers, then reads the contents of another group of
registers (the same or different than those written) in
a server device.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 399
Code
Function name
Description
2Bh / 0Eh
Encapsulated Interface
Transport
Supported subcodes:
• 0Eh Read Device Identification: Allows reading the
identification and other information.
Supported ID codes (access type):
• 00h: Request to get the basic device identification
(stream access)
• 04h: Request to get one specific identification
object (individual access)
Supported Object IDs:
• 00h: Vendor Name (“ABB”)
• 01h: Product Code (for example, “ASCCL”)
• 02h: Major Minor Revision (combination of contents
of parameters 07.05 Firmware version and 58.02
Protocol ID).
• 03h: Vendor URL (“www.abb.com”)
• 04h: Product name: (“ACS580”).
Exception codes
The table below shows the Modbus exception codes supported by the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Code
Name
Description
01h
ILLEGAL FUNCTION
The function code received in the query is not an
allowable action for the server.
02h
ILLEGAL ADDRESS
The data address received in the query is not an
allowable address for the server.
03h
ILLEGAL VALUE
The requested quantity of registers is larger than the
device can handle. This error does not mean that a
value written to the device is outside of the valid
range.
04h
DEVICE FAILURE
An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was
attempting to perform the requested action. See
section Error code registers (holding registers
400090…400100) on page 404.
400 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Coils (0xxxx reference set)
Coils are 1-bit read/write values. Control Word bits are exposed with this data type.
The table below summarizes the Modbus coils (0xxxx reference set). Note that the
references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire.
Reference ABB Drives profile
DCU Profile
000001
OFF1_CONTROL
STOP
000002
OFF2_CONTROL
START
000003
OFF3_CONTROL
Reserved
000004
INHIBIT_OPERATION
Reserved
000005
RAMP_OUT_ZERO
RESET
000006
RAMP_HOLD
EXT2
000007
RAMP_IN_ZERO
RUN_DISABLE
000008
RESET
STOPMODE_RAMP
000009
JOGGING_1
STOPMODE_EMERGENCY_RAMP
000010
JOGGING_2
STOPMODE_COAST
000011
REMOTE_CMD
Reserved
000012
EXT_CTRL_LOC
RAMP_OUT_ZERO
000013
USER_0
RAMP_HOLD
000014
USER_1
RAMP_IN_ZERO
000015
USER_2
Reserved
000016
USER_3
Reserved
000017
Reserved
FB_LOCAL_CTL
000018
Reserved
FB_LOCAL_REF
000019
Reserved
Reserved
000020
Reserved
Reserved
000021
Reserved
Reserved
000022
Reserved
Reserved
000023
Reserved
USER_0
000024
Reserved
USER_1
000025
Reserved
USER_2
000026
Reserved
USER_3
000027
Reserved
Reserved
000028
Reserved
Reserved
000029
Reserved
Reserved
000030
Reserved
Reserved
000031
Reserved
Reserved
000032
Reserved
Reserved
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 401
Reference ABB Drives profile
DCU Profile
000033
Control for relay output RO1
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 0)
Control for relay output RO1
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 0)
000034
Control for relay output RO2
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 1)
Control for relay output RO2
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 1)
000035
Control for relay output RO3
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 2)
Control for relay output RO3
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 2)
000036
Control for relay output RO4
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 3)
Control for relay output RO4
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 3)
000037
Control for relay output RO5
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 4)
Control for relay output RO5
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 4)
402 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set)
Discrete inputs are 1-bit read-only values. Status Word bits are exposed with this data
type. The table below summarizes the Modbus discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set).
Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on
the wire.
Reference ABB Drives profile
DCU Profile
100001
RDY_ON
READY
100002
RDY_RUN
ENABLED
100003
RDY_REF
Reserved
100004
TRIPPED
RUNNING
100005
OFF_2_STATUS
ZERO_SPEED
100006
OFF_3_STATUS
Reserved
100007
SWC_ON_INHIB
Reserved
100008
ALARM
AT_SETPOINT
100009
AT_SETPOINT
LIMIT
100010
REMOTE
SUPERVISION
100011
ABOVE_LIMIT
Reserved
100012
USER_0
Reserved
100013
USER_1
PANEL_LOCAL
100014
USER_2
FIELDBUS_LOCAL
100015
USER_3
EXT2_ACT
100016
Reserved
FAULT
100017
Reserved
ALARM
100018
Reserved
Reserved
100019
Reserved
Reserved
100020
Reserved
Reserved
100021
Reserved
Reserved
100022
Reserved
Reserved
100023
Reserved
USER_0
100024
Reserved
USER_1
100025
Reserved
USER_2
100026
Reserved
USER_3
100027
Reserved
REQ_CTL
100028
Reserved
Reserved
100029
Reserved
Reserved
100030
Reserved
Reserved
100031
Reserved
Reserved
100032
Reserved
Reserved
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 403
Reference ABB Drives profile
DCU Profile
100033
Delayed status of digital input
DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 0)
Delayed status of digital input
DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 0)
100034
Delayed status of digital input
DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 1)
Delayed status of digital input
DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 1)
100035
Delayed status of digital input
DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 2)
Delayed status of digital input
DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 2)
100036
Delayed status of digital input
DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 3)
Delayed status of digital input
DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 3)
100037
Delayed status of digital input
DI5 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 4)
Delayed status of digital input
DI5 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 4)
100038
Delayed status of digital input
DI6 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 5)
Delayed status of digital input
DI6 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 5)
404 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Error code registers (holding registers 400090…400100)
These registers contain information about the last query. The error register is cleared
when a query has finished successfully.
Reference Name
Description
400090
1 = Reset internal error registers (91…95). 0 = Do
nothing.
Reset Error Registers
400091
Error Function Code
Function code of the failed query.
400092
Error Code
Set when exception code 04h is generated (see table
above).
• 00h No error
• 02h Low/High limit exceeded
• 03h Faulty Index: Unavailable index of an array
parameter
• 05h Incorrect Data Type: Value does not match the
data type of the parameter
• 65h General Error: Undefined error when handling
query
400093
Failed Register
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or
holding register) that failed to be read or written.
400094
Last Register Written
Successfully
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or
holding register) that was written successfully.
400095
Last Register Read
Successfully
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or
holding register) that was read successfully.
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 405
11
Fieldbus control through a
fieldbus adapter
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network (fieldbus) through an optional fieldbus adapter module.
The fieldbus control interface of the drive is described first, followed by a
configuration example.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through an optional
fieldbus adapter (“fieldbus adapter A” = FBA A) mounted onto the control unit of the
drive. The drive can be configured to receive all of its control information through the
fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and
other available sources such as digital and analog inputs, depending on how control
locations EXT1 and EXT2 are configured.
Fieldbus adapters are available for various communication systems and protocols, for
example
•
•
•
•
PROFIBUS DP (FPBA-01 adapter)
CANopen (FCAN-01 adapter)
DeviceNetTM (FDNA-01 adapter)
EtherNet/IPTM (FENA-11 adapter)
406 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Note: The text and examples in this chapter describe the configuration of one
fieldbus adapter (FBA A) by parameters 50.01…50.18 and parameter groups 51 FBA
A settings…53 FBA A data out.
Drive
Fieldbus
controller
Fieldbus
Other
devices
Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter installed onto
drive control unit (slot 1)
Data Flow
Control word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W requests/responses
Process I/O (cyclic) or
Service messages (acyclic)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 407
Basics of the fieldbus control interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16- or
32-bit input and output data words. The drive is able to support a maximum of 12 data
words (16 bits) in each direction.
Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters
52.01 FBA A data in1 … 52.12 FBA A data in12. The data transmitted from the
fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53.01 FBA A data out1 …
53.12 FBA A data out12.
Fieldbus network
1)
Fieldbus adapter
DATA
OUT 2)
FBA Profile
Profile
selection
4)
1
DATA OUT
selection
Fieldbus-specific interface
2
3
…
4)
3)
12
DATA
IN 2)
Par. 10.01…99.99
Profile
selection
5)
DATA IN
selection
2
…
20.01
20.06
Speed/Torque
REF1 sel
Group 53
5)
1
3
FBA MAIN CW
FBA REF1
FBA REF2
EXT1/2
Start func
FBA MAIN SW
FBA ACT1
FBA ACT2
22.11 / 26.11
/ 26.12
Speed/Torque
REF2 sel
3)
Par. 01.01…99.99
12
Cyclic communication
Group 52
22.12 / 26.11
/ 26.12
Acyclic communication
See the manual of the fieldbus
adapter module.
1) See also other parameters which can be controlled from fieldbus.
2) The maximum number of data words used is protocol-dependent.
3) Profile/instance selection parameters. Fieldbus module specific parameters. For more
information, see the User’s manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
4) With DeviceNet, the control part is transmitted directly.
5) With DeviceNet, the actual value part is transmitted directly.
Parameter
table
408 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
 Control word and Status word
The Control word is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. It is sent by the fieldbus master station to the drive through the adapter
module. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions
in the Control word, and returns status information to the master in the Status word.
The contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages 411 and
413 respectively. The drive states are presented in the state diagram (page 414).
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast or Normal, the Control word
received from the fieldbus is shown by parameter 50.13 FBA A control word, and the
Status word transmitted to the fieldbus network by 50.16 FBA A status word. This
“raw” data is very useful to determine if the fieldbus master is transmitting the correct
data before handing control to the fieldbus network.
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 409
 References
References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative
reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s
complement from the corresponding positive reference.
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources including analog
and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a fieldbus adapter module. In order to
have the drive controlled through the fieldbus, the module must be defined as the
source for control information such as reference. This is done using the source
selection parameters in groups 22 Speed reference selection, 26 Torque reference
chain and 28 Frequency reference chain.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast or Normal, the references
received from the fieldbus are displayed by 50.14 FBA A reference 1 and 50.15 FBA
A reference 2.
Scaling of references
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling is
in use depends on the setting of 50.04 FBA A ref1 type and 50.05 FBA A ref2 type.
Fieldbus
Drive
20000
46.01 (with speed reference)
46.02 (with frequency reference)
10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
0
0
-10000
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
-20000
-(46.01) (with speed reference)
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.05 FB A reference 1 and 03.06
FB A reference 2.
410 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
 Actual values
Actual values are 16-bit words containing information on the operation of the drive.
The types of the monitored signals are selected by parameters 50.07 FBA A actual 1
type and 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast or Normal, the actual values
sent to the fieldbus are displayed by 50.17 FBA A actual value 1 and 50.18 FBA A
actual value 2.
Scaling of actual values
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling
is in use depends on the setting of parameters 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type and 50.08
FBA A actual 2 type.
Fieldbus
Drive
20000
46.01 (with speed reference)
46.02 (with frequency reference)
10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
0
0
-10000
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
-20000
-(46.01) (with speed reference)
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 411
 Contents of the fieldbus Control word
The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram (page
414).
Bit
Name
Value STATE/Description
0
Off1 control
1
0
1
Off2 control
1
0
2
Off3 control
1
0
3
Run
1
4
Ramp out zero
0
1
0
5
Ramp hold
1
6
Ramp in zero
0
1
7
Reset
0
0=>1
8
Inching 1
0
1
9
Inching 2
0
1
10
Remote cmd
0
1
0
11
Ext ctrl loc
1
0
12
User bit 0
13
User bit 1
1
0
1
0
Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1
ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks
(OFF2, OFF3) are active.
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
Emergency OFF, coast to a stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive parameter.
Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
WARNING: Ensure motor and driven machine can be
stopped using this stop mode.
Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED.
Note: Run enable signal must be active; see drive documentation. If
the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this
bit activates the signal.
Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.
Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
OUTPUT ENABLED.
Force Ramp function generator output to zero. The drive will
immediately decelerate to zero speed (observing the torque limits).
Enable ramp function.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the
source for this signal by drive parameters.
Force Ramp function generator input to zero.
Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the
source of the reset signal by drive parameters.
Continue normal operation.
Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 1.
Notes:
• Bits 4…6 must be 0.
• See also section Rush control (page 98).
Inching (jogging) 1 disabled.
Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 2.
See notes at bit 8.
Inching (jogging) 2 disabled.
Fieldbus control enabled.
Control word and reference not getting through to the drive, except
for bits 0…2.
Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if control location is
parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if control location is
parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
TBA
TBA
TBA
TBA
412 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Bit
Name
Value STATE/Description
14
User bit 2
15
User bit 3
1
0
1
0
TBA
TBA
TBA
TBA
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 413
 Contents of the fieldbus Status word
The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram (page
414).
Bit
Name
0
Ready to switch
ON
Ready run
Value STATE/Description
8
1
0
1
0
Ready ref
1
0
Tripped
1
0
Off 2 inactive
1
0
Off 3 inactive
1
0
Switch-on inhibited 1
0
Warning
1
0
At setpoint
1
9
Remote
10
11
12
13
14
15
Above limit
User bit 0
User bit 1
User bit 2
User bit 3
Reserved
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
0
-
READY TO SWITCH ON.
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
READY TO OPERATE.
OFF1 ACTIVE.
OPERATION ENABLED.
OPERATION INHIBITED.
FAULT.
No fault.
OFF2 inactive.
OFF2 ACTIVE.
OFF3 inactive.
OFF3 ACTIVE.
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
–
Warning active.
No warning active.
OPERATING. Actual value equals reference = is within tolerance
limits (see parameters 46.21…46.23).
Actual value differs from reference = is outside tolerance limits.
Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
Drive control location: LOCAL.
See bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2.
See parameter 06.30 MSW bit 11 selection.
See parameter 06.31 MSW bit 12 selection.
See parameter 06.32 MSW bit 13 selection.
See parameter 06.33 MSW bit 14 selection.
414 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
 The state diagram
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
MAINS OFF
Power ON
A
from any state
SW b6=1
Fault
CW b0=0
FAULT
NOT READY TO
SWITCH ON
B C D
SW b3=1
SW b0=0
CW b7=1
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110
CW b3=0
READY TO
SWITCH ON
OPERATION
INHIBITED
SW b2=0
operation
inhibited
from any state
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111
READY TO
OPERATE
from any state
OFF1 (CW b0=0)
OFF1
ACTIVE
SW b0=1
OFF2
ACTIVE
SW b1=1
from any state
Emergency stop
OFF3 (CW b2=0)
n(f) = 0 / I = 0
B C D
OFF3
ACTIVE
CW b4=0
OPERATION
ENABLED
C D
A
CW b5=0
f
SW b5=0
n(f) = 0 / I = 0
SW b2=1
CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111
RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
STATE
condition
B
CW b6=0
CW
SW
bx
n
I
RFG
SW b4=0
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
SW b1=0
D
Emergency stop
OFF2 (CW b1=0)
= Control word
= Status word
= bit x
= Speed
= Input Current
= Ramp Function
Generator
= Frequency
CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
C
CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111
OPERATION
D
SW b8=1
rising edge of
bit
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 415
Setting up the drive for fieldbus control
1. Install the fieldbus adapter module mechanically and electrically according to the
instructions given in the User’s manual of the module.
2. Power up the drive.
3. Enable the communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module
with parameter 50.01 FBA A enable.
4. With 50.02 FBA A comm loss func, select how the drive should react to a fieldbus
communication break.
Note: This function monitors both the communication between the fieldbus
master and the adapter module and the communication between the adapter
module and the drive.
5. With 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out, define the time between communication break
detection and the selected action.
6. Select application-specific values for the rest of the parameters in group 50
Fieldbus adapter (FBA), starting from 50.04. Examples of appropriate values are
shown in the tables below.
7. Set the fieldbus adapter module configuration parameters in group 51 FBA A
settings. As a minimum, set the required node address and the communication
profile.
8. Define the process data transferred to and from the drive in parameter groups 52
FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out.
Note: Depending on the communication protocol and profile being used, the
Control word and Status word may already be configured to be sent/received by
the communication system.
9. Save the valid parameter values to permanent memory by setting parameter
96.07 Parameter save manually to Save.
10. Validate the settings made in parameter groups 51, 52 and 53 by setting
parameter 51.27 FBA A par refresh to Configure.
11. Configure control locations EXT1 and EXT2 to allow control and reference signals
to come from the fieldbus. Examples of appropriate values are shown in the
tables below.
416 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
 Parameter setting example: FPBA (PROFIBUS DP)
This example shows how to configure a basic speed control application that uses the
PROFIdrive communication profile with PPO Type 2. The start/stop commands and
reference are according to the PROFIdrive profile, speed control mode.
The reference values sent over the fieldbus have to be scaled within the drive so they
have the desired effect. The reference value ±16384 (4000h) corresponds to the
range of speed set in parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (both forward and reverse
directions). For example, if 46.01 is set to 480 rpm, then 4000h sent over fieldbus will
request 480 rpm.
Direction
PZD1
PZD2
PZD3
Out
Control word
Speed reference
Acc time 1
PZD4
Dec time 1
PZD5
PZD6
In
Status word
Speed actual value
Motor current
DC voltage
The table below gives the recommended drive parameter settings.
Drive parameter
Setting for ACS580
drives
Description
50.01 FBA A enable
1 = [slot number]
Enables communication between the
drive and the fieldbus adapter module.
50.04 FBA A ref1 type
4 = Speed
Selects the fieldbus A reference 1 type
and scaling.
50.07 FBA A actual 1 type
0 = Speed or
frequency
Selects the actual value type and scaling
according to the currently active Ref1
mode defined in parameter 50.04.
51.01 FBA A type
1 = FPBA1)
Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter
module.
51.02 Node address
32)
Defines the PROFIBUS node address of
the fieldbus adapter module.
51.03 Baud rate
120001)
Displays the current baud rate on the
PROFIBUS network in kbit/s.
51.04 MSG type
1 = PPO11)
Displays the telegram type selected by
the PLC configuration tool.
51.05 Profile
0 = PROFIdrive
Selects the Control word according to the
PROFIdrive profile (speed control mode).
51.07 RPBA mode
0 = Disabled
Disables the RPBA emulation mode.
52.01 FBA data in1
4 = SW 16bit1)
Status word
52.02 FBA data in2
5 = Act1 16bit
Actual value 1
52.03 FBA data in3
01.072)
Motor current
52.05 FBA data in5
01.112)
DC voltage
53.01 FBA data out1
1 = CW 16bit1)
Control word
53.02 FBA data out2
2 = Ref1 16bit
Reference 1 (speed)
53.03 FBA data out3
23.122)
Acceleration time 1
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 417
Drive parameter
Setting for ACS580
drives
Description
53.05 FBA data out5
23.132)
Deceleration time 1
51.27 FBA A par refresh
1 = Configure
Validates the configuration parameter
settings.
19.12 Ext1 control mode
2 = Speed
Selects speed control as the control
mode 1 for external control location
EXT1.
20.01 Ext1 commands
12 = Fieldbus A
Selects fieldbus adapter A as the source
of the start and stop commands for
external control location EXT1.
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type 1 = Level
Selects a level-triggered start signal for
external control location EXT1.
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
Selects fieldbus A reference 1 as the
source for speed reference 1.
4 = FB A ref1
1)
Read-only or automatically detected/set
2)
Example
The start sequence for the parameter example above is given below.
Control word:
•
477h (1143 decimal) –> READY TO SWITCH ON
•
47Fh (1151 decimal) –> OPERATING (Speed mode)
418 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Control chain diagrams 419
12
Control chain diagrams
Contents of this chapter
The chapter presents the reference chains of the drive. The control chain diagrams
can be used to trace how parameters interact and where parameters have an effect
within the drive parameter system.
For a more general diagram, see section Operating modes of the drive (page 89).
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
28.22 Constant frequency sel1
28.23 Constant frequency sel2
28.24 Constant frequency sel3
28.26 Constant frequency 1
28.27 Constant frequency 2
28.28 Constant frequency 3
28.29 Constant frequency 4
28.30 Constant frequency 5
28.31 Constant frequency 6
28.32 Constant frequency 7
Selection
Selection
MAX
MIN
MUL
SUB
ADD
MAX
MIN
MUL
SUB
ADD
0
CONSTANT
FREQUENCY
SELECTION
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
28.21 Const frequency function
Selection
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2
Selection
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1
28.17 Ext2 frequency function
Selection
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2
Selection
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
Network reference
Value
Value
Panel comm loss active
Control from Fieldbus active
Fieldbus comm loss active
50.02 FBA A comm loss func = Speed ref safe
Panel as local control device
Value
AND
AND
28.41 Frequency ref safe
06.16 bit 8 Local control
03.01 Panel reference
6.16 bit 9 Network control
49.05 Communication loss action = Speed ref safe
Fieldbus:
ODVA CIP™
Constant frequency command
Constant frequency ref
Value
Value
28.13 Ext1 frequency function
28.92 Frequency ref act 3
Selection
OR
Value
28.96 Frequency ref act 7
Frequency reference safe command
Direction
Lock
420 Control chain diagrams
Frequency reference selection
Selection
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
28.51 Critical frequency function
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high
28.54 Critical frequency 2 low
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high
28.96 Frequency ref act 7
OR
>
30.13 Minimum frequency
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1
28.75 Freq deceleration time 2
28.82 Shape time 1
28.83 Shape time 2
Selection
Value
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2
>
6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero
Value
28.01 Frequency ref ramp input
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1
0
6.1 bit 5 Ramp hold
28.71 Freq ramp set selection
Value
28.97 Freq ref unlimited
30.14 Maximum frequency
Value
CRITICAL
FREQ
Value
Selection
>
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero
28.76 Freq ramp in zero source
Value
RAMP
0
Value
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output
Control chain diagrams 421
Frequency reference modification
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2
>
Selection
>
>
Selection
Selection
MAX
MIN
MUL
SUB
ADD
Selection
MAX
MIN
MUL
SUB
ADD
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
22.20 Ext2 speed function
>
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
Selection
>
Selection
22.13 Ext1 speed function
Selection
Value
22.86 Speed reference act 6
422 Control chain diagrams
Speed reference source selection I
>
>
Value
Value
22.31 Constant speed 6
22.32 Constant speed 7
20.26 Jogging 1 start source
Value
Value
22.30 Constant speed 5
20.25 Jogging enable
Value
22.29 Constant speed 4
Value
Value
22.28 Constant speed 3
20.27 Jogging 2 start source
Value
22.27 Constant speed 2
Selection
22.24 Constant speed sel3
Value
Selection
22.26 Constant speed 1
Selection
22.23 Constant speed sel2
Selection
22.22 Constant speed sel1
22.21 Constant speed function
22.86 Speed ref act 6
Value
AND
AND
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
0
CONSTANT
SPEED
SELECTION
Value
Value
Panel as local control device
Panel comm loss active
49.05 Communication loss
action = Speed ref safe
Fieldbus comm loss active
Control from Fieldbus active
AND
AND
Value
Value
OR
Value
Value
Value
22.57 Critical speed 3 high
Value
22.56 Critical speed 3 low
Value
22.55 Critical speed 2 high
Value
Value
Selection
22.54 Critical speed 2 low
22.53 Critical speed 1 high
22.52 Critical speed 1 low
22.51 Critical speed function
Speed ref safe command
22.41 Speed ref safe
6.16 bit 8 Local control
3.01 Panel reference
6.16 bit 9 Network control
Network reference
Value
50.02 FBA A comm loss func = Speed ref safe
Fieldbus:
ODVA CIP™
22.42 Jogging 1 ref
22.43 Jogging 2 ref
CRITICAL
SPEEDS
Direction
Lock
Value
22.01 Speed ref unlimited
Value
22.87 Speed reference act 7
Control chain diagrams 423
Speed reference source selection II
Value
Value
Value
Value
20.27 Jogging 2 start source
20.26 Jogging 1 start source
OR
Value
23.21 Dec time jogging
20.25 Jogging enable
Value
Value
23.20 Acc time jogging
Value
23.15 Deceleration time 2
23.33 Shape time 2
Value
23.13 Deceleration time 1
23.32 Shape time 1
Value
Value
Value
23.12 Acceleration time 1
23.14 Acceleration time 2
Selection
23.11 Ramp set selection
23.23 Emergency stop time
6.11 bit 5 Off 3 inactive
30.11 Minimum speed
22.01 Speed ref unlimited
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero
30.12 Maximum speed
0
Value
>
Value
Value
Value
23.29 Variable slope rate
46.01 Speed scaling
0
Value
23.28 Variable slope enable
AND
Value
Value
23.01 Speed ref ramp input
SHAPE
TIME
DEC TIME
ACC TIME
RAMP
Value
6.1 bit 9 Inching 2
Value
Value
Stop command
6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero
6.11 bit 5 Off 3 inactive
AND
0
Value
SHAPE
Value
23.21 Dec time jogging
22.43 Jogging 2 ref
23.20 Acc time jogging
Value
Value
22.42 Jogging 1 ref
Value
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero
6.1 bit 9 Inching 2
Value
6.1 bit 5 Ramp hold
Value
XOR
Value
6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero
Value
6.1 bit 8 Inching 1
AND
DEC TIME
ACC TIME
RAMP
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Value
424 Control chain diagrams
Speed reference ramping and shaping
24.11 Speed correction
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Value
Value
+
Value
Value
24.12 Speed error filter time
Value
24.02 Used speed feedback
24.01 Used speed reference
Value
25.07 Acc comp filter time
d
dt
Value
25.06 Acc comp derivation time
-
-1
x
TAccCom
Value
Value
24.04 Speed error inverted
25.56 Torque acc compensation
24.03 Speed error filtered
Value
Control chain diagrams 425
Speed error calculation
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
25.03 Speed integration time
25.04 Speed derivation time
25.05 Derivation filter time
25.15 Proportional gain em stop
Value
25.02 Speed proportional gain
24.03 Speed error filtered
PID
25.55 Torque deriv reference
Value
Value
30.21 Min torque 2 source
30.18 Torq lim sel
Value
30.19 Minimum torque
25.56 Torque acc compensation
25.54 Torque integral reference
Value
Value
25.53 Torque prop reference
Value
Value
Value
Value
30.22 Max torque 2 source
Speed regulator
Value
30.20 Maximum torque
30.18 Torq lim sel
Value
25.01 Torque reference speed control
426 Control chain diagrams
Speed controller
>
Selection
>
Value
26.71 Torque Reference act 2
Value
26.70 Torque Reference act 1
26.12 Torq ref2 source
Selection
26.11 Torq ref1 source
26.13 Torq ref1 function
26.14 Torq ref1/2 selection
MAX
MIN
MUL
SUB
ADD
Ref 1
Value
Selection
Value
>
Value
26.19 Torque ramp down time
MAX
Value
Value
MIN
26.17 Torque ref filter time
Value
Internal torque lim min
Value
Value
26.08 Minimum torque ref
6.16 bit 8 Local control
Value
03.01 Panel reference
Network ref
Fieldbus:
ODVA CIP™
Value
6.16 bit 9 Network control
26.72 Torque reference act 3
Internal torque lim max
26.09 Maximum torque ref
Value
26.18 Torq ramp up time
Value
Value
26.74 Torque ref ramp out
26.73 Torque reference act 4
Control chain diagrams 427
Torque reference source selection and modification
>
>
Value
Fieldbus:
ODVA
CIP™
Selection
>
Value
Value
Value
SPEED
Value
Value
SPEED
Selection
>
SCALAR
Value
SPEED
Value
Value
21.05 Emergency stop source
Value
6.01 bit 0 Off1 control
6.01 bit 2 Off3 control
AND
Value
SPEED
OR
26.74 Torque ref ramp out
Value
25.01 Torq reference speed control
Safety function active
99.04 Motor ctrl mode
06.17 bit 5 Safe reference active
06.17 bit 6 Last speed active
06.16 bit 8 Local control
19.16 Local control mode
6.16 bit 9 Network control
SPEED
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 sel
Selection
19.14 Ext2 control mode
Value
19.12 Ext1 control mode
Selection
>
26.21 Torque sel torque in
Selection
26.22 Torque sel speed in
0
Value
Value
Value
30.11 Minimum speed
Value
30.12 Maximum speed
Speed
limitation
Value
26.01 Torque reference to TC
26.75 Torque reference act 5
01.01 Motor speed used
19.01 Actual operation mode
Value
ADD
MAX
MIN
TORQUE
SPEED
ZERO
Torque selector
428 Control chain diagrams
Reference selection for torque controller
Value
Value
30.19 Minimum torque
Value
Power limiter
30.20 Maximum torque
Value
30.26 Power motoring limit
Value
30.27 Power generating limit
24.02 Used speed feedback
Value
Value
Value
30.31 Undervoltage control
30.30 Overvoltage control
26.01 Torq reference to TC
DC voltage
limiter
Torque limiter
Load angle
limitation
30.17 Maximum current
Motor pull-out
limitation
Value
Current limiter
Bit Name
0 = Undervoltage
1 = Overvoltage
2 = Minimum torque
3 = Maximum torque
4 = Internal current
5 = Load angle
6 = Motor pull-out
7 = Reserved
8 = Thermal
9 = Max current
10 = User current
11 = Thermal IGBT
12 =
13 =
14 =
15 =
30.02 Torque limit status
Value
26.02 Torque reference used
To TC
30.02 Torque limit status
Control chain diagrams 429
Torque limitation
Value
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3
>
Value
>
Value
Value
>
Selection
Value
>
a+ b
a+b
a-b
a
AVE
MAX
Mul
MIN
Add
DIV
MUL
SUB
ADD
Feedback 1
Selection
a+ b
a+b
a-b
a
AVE
MAX
Mul
MIN
Add
DIV
MUL
SUB
ADD
Setpoint 1
Value
0
b1
b0
2
3
1
Value
Value
Value
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost
step
Value
Value
0
Value
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max
+
Value
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
RAMP
Selection
40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable
Note! Process PID parameter set 2 is also available. See parameter group 41.
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time
Pulse
Value
40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time
Value
Value
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time
Value
40.62 PID internal setpoint actual
40.06 Process PID status word: bit 4 PID sleep mode
0
BIN
TO 0
INT
SEL OUT
>
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source
Selection
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source
40.10 Set 1 feedback function
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
Selection
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
Selection
Value
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2
>
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function
Value
Selection
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
>
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1
Selection
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
430 Control chain diagrams
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection
>
Value
Value
>
-1
1
-
x
Value
40.32 Set 1 gain
Value
40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode
Value
40.06 Process PID status word
>
Process
PID
status
Value
PID
Selection
Value
40.36 Set 1 output min
Value
Value
Value
Value
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time
40.34 Set 1 derivation time
40.33 Set 1 integration time
Scale
40.04 Process PID deviation actual
40.37 Set 1 output max
40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable
Value
Value
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay
Value
40.43 Set 1 sleep level
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay
Value
Value
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step
Value
Value
Sleep
Function
40.43 Set 1 sleep level
Value
Selection
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time
Value
40.06 bit 4 Sleep boost
40.06 bit 3 Sleep mode
Value
40.01 Process PID Output actual
>
Note! Process PID parameter set 2 is also available. See parameter group 41.
Selection
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
PROCESS PID FUNCTION
Control chain diagrams 431
Process PID controller
Value
Value
71.22 Internal setpoint 2
71.23 Internal setpoint 3
0
b1
b0
2
3
1
0
BIN
TO 0
INT
SEL OUT
Value
Selection
Value
71.08 Feedback 1 source
Selection
71.16 Setpoint 1 source
Value
Selection
71.20 Internal setpoint sel2
71.21 Internal setpoint 1
Selection
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1
71.11 Feedback filter time
Value
Value
71.26 Setpoint min
71.62 PID internal setpoint actual
Value
Value
Value
71.03 Setpoint act value
71.02 Feedback act value
Value
71.27 Setpoint max
432 Control chain diagrams
External PID setpoint and feedback source selection
Value
71.02 Feedback act value
Value
Value
71.15 Output scaling
-1
1
-
71.14 Setpoint scaling
Selection
71.31 Deviation inversion
Value
71.03 Setpoint act value
x
Scale
Value
Value
Value
PID
Value
71.36 Output min
Value
Value
71.58 Increase prevention
71.59 Decrease prevention
Value
Value
71.07 PID operation mode
Value
71.34 Derivation time
71.35 Derivation filter time
Value
71.32 Gain
71.33 Integration time
Value
71.37 Output max
71.04 Deviation act value
Value
Value
71.40 Deadband relay
Selection
71.39 Deadband range
71.38 Output freeze enable
External
PID
status
Comp
Value
71.01 External PID act value
71.06 PID status word
Value
Control chain diagrams 433
External PID controller
Input reference
AND
MAX
x
-1
Reverse command active
AND
20.21 Direction = Reverse
0
-1
20.21 Direction = Request
20.21 Direction = Request
Reverse command active
Reference from FB
Reference from FB
Reference from PID
Reference from Motor potentiometer
Reference from Panel
Jogging Reference
Safe reference
Constant refeference
OR
x
OR
20.21 Direction = Request
AND
Output reference
434 Control chain diagrams
Direction lock
Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting
the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to
www.abb.com/searchchannels.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select
Training courses.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals
Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select
Document Library – Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives).
Document library on the Internet
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet.
Go to www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library
or enter selection criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.
Contact us
www.abb.com/drives
www.abb.com/drivespartners
3AXD50000016097 Rev C (EN) 2015-01-20
3AXD50000016097C
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement